Panasonic KX-HDV230, KX-HDV330, KX-HDV430, T-Mobile KX-HDV130 Manual
Panasonic T-Mobile KX-HDV130 is a SIP phone that provides high-quality voice communications for business users. It features a sleek design, an intuitive user interface, and a range of advanced features to enhance productivity and collaboration. With its support for multiple lines, call forwarding, and conferencing, the KX-HDV130 is ideal for busy professionals who need a reliable and efficient communication solution.
Advertisement
Advertisement
KX-HDV430
Administrator Guide
SIP Phone
Model No.
KX-HDV130/
KX-HDV230/
KX-HDV330/
KX-HDV430
Thank you for purchasing this Panasonic product.
Please read this manual carefully before using this product and save this manual for future use.
In this manual, the suffix of each model number is omitted unless necessary.
Document Version: 2017-07
Introduction
Introduction
Outline
This Administrator Guide provides detailed information on the configuration and management of this unit.
Audience
This Administrator Guide contains explanations about the installation, maintenance, and management of the unit and is aimed at network administrators and phone system dealers.
Technical descriptions are included in this guide. Prior knowledge of networking and VoIP (Voice over
Internet Protocol) is required.
Related Documentation
Quick Start Guide
Briefly describes basic information about the installation of the unit.
Operating Instructions
Describes information about the installation and operation of the unit.
Manuals and supporting information are provided on the Panasonic Web site at: https://panasonic.net/cns/pcc/support/sipphone/
Technical Support
When technical support is required, contact your phone system dealer/service provider.
Trademarks
• Microsoft, Excel, Internet Explorer, Outlook, and Windows are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
• Firefox is a registered trademark of the Mozilla Foundation.
• Google Chrome is a registered trademark of Google Inc.
• All other trademarks identified herein are the property of their respective owners.
• Microsoft product screen shot(s) reprinted with permission from Microsoft Corporation.
NOTES
• The screen shots shown in this guide are provided for reference only, and may differ from the screens displayed on your PC.
2 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
1.1
1.1.1
1.1.2
1.1.3
1.1.4
1.1.5
1.1.5.1
1.1.6
1.1.6.1
1.1.6.2
1.1.6.3
1.1.6.4
1.2
1.2.1
Changing the Language for Phone User Interface Programming .............................. 16
Changing the Language for Web User Interface Programming ................................. 17
2 General Information on Provisioning ................................................. 25
2.2.2
2.2.3
2.2.4
2.2.5
2.2.6
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.5.1
2.5.2
2.1
2.1.1
2.1.2
2.1.3
2.1.4
2.1.5
2.2
2.2.1
Obtaining a Provisioning Server Address from DHCP Options .................................... 28
3 Phone User Interface Programming ................................................... 45
3.1
3.1.1
3.1.2
4 Web User Interface Programming ....................................................... 47
4.1
4.2
4.2.1
4.2.1.1
4.2.2
4.2.2.1
4.2.2.2
4.2.2.3
4.2.2.4
4.2.3
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 3
Table of Contents
4.4
4.4.1
4.4.1.1
4.4.1.2
4.4.2
4.4.2.1
4.4.3
4.4.3.1
4.4.4
4.4.4.1
4.4.4.2
4.4.4.3
4.4.4.4
4.4.4.5
4.4.5
4.4.5.1
4.4.5.2
4.4.6
4.4.6.1
4.4.7
4.4.7.1
4.4.8
4.4.8.1
4.2.3.1
4.3
4.3.1
4.3.1.1
4.3.1.2
4.3.1.3
4.3.2
4.3.2.1
4.3.2.2
4.3.2.3
4.3.2.4
4.3.3
4.3.3.1
4.3.3.2
4.3.4
4.3.4.1
4.3.5
4.3.5.1
4.3.6
4.3.6.1
4.3.7
4.3.7.1
4.3.7.2
4.3.8
4.3.8.1
4.3.9
4.3.9.1
4.3.9.2
Shortcut Key Settings (For KX-HDV130/KX-HDV230) .............................................. 91
4.3.9.3
4.3.10
4.3.11
4.3.12
Start Day and Time of DST (Start Day and Time of Summer Time) ........................ 105
End Day and Time of DST (End Day and Time of Summer Time) .......................... 106
Soft Key during IDLE Status (For KX-HDV130/KX-HDV230) .................................. 108
4 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
Table of Contents
4.6.1.2
4.6.1.3
4.6.2
4.6.2.1
4.6.2.2
4.6.3
4.6.3.1
4.6.4
4.6.5
4.6.5.1
4.6.6
4.6.6.1
4.6.6.2
4.6.6.3
4.6.6.4
4.6.6.5
4.5
4.5.1
4.5.1.1
4.5.1.2
4.5.2
4.5.2.1
4.5.2.2
4.5.3
4.5.3.1
4.5.3.2
4.5.4
4.5.4.1
4.5.4.2
4.6
4.6.1
4.6.1.1
Flexible Key Settings (No. 1–24) (For KX-HDV230/KX-HDV330/KX-HDV430) ......... 144
4.7.1
4.7.1.1
4.7.2
4.7.2.1
4.7.3
4.7.3.1
4.7.4
4.7.4.1
4.7.5
4.7.6
4.6.7
4.6.7.1
4.6.8
4.6.8.1
4.6.9
4.6.9.1
4.6.9.2
4.6.9.3
4.6.9.4
4.6.10
DSS Console (For KX-HDV230/KX-HDV330/KX-HDV430) ....................................... 155
4.6.10.1
4.7
Upgrade Firmware (For KX-HDV130/KX-HDV230) .................................................... 160
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 5
Table of Contents
5 Configuration File Programming ...................................................... 163
5.1
5.2
5.2.1
5.2.2
5.3
5.3.1
5.3.2
5.3.3
5.3.4
5.3.5
5.3.6
5.3.7
5.3.8
5.3.9
5.3.10
5.3.11
5.3.12
5.3.13
5.3.14
5.3.15
5.3.16
5.3.17
5.3.18
5.3.19
5.3.20
5.3.21
5.3.22
5.3.23
5.3.24
5.3.25
5.3.26
5.3.27
5.3.28
5.3.29
5.3.30
5.3.31
5.3.32
DSS Key Settings (For KX-HDV230/KX-HDV330/KX-HDV430) ................................ 317
5.3.33
5.3.34
5.3.35
5.3.36
5.3.37
Communication Camera Settings (For KX-HDV430) ................................................. 349
5.3.38
5.3.39
6 Useful Telephone Functions .............................................................. 357
6.1
6.1.1
6.1.2
6.1.3
6.2
6.2.1
6.3
Flexible Keys (For KX-HDV230/KX-HDV330/KX-HDV430) ........................................ 367
6 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
Table of Contents
6.3.1
6.3.2
6.4
6.4.1
6.4.2
6.5
6.5.1
6.5.2
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
Upgrade Firmware (For KX-HDV130/KX-HDV230) .................................................... 382
8.1
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 7
Table of Contents
8 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
Section 1
Initial Setup
This section provides an overview of the setup procedures for the unit.
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 9
1.1 Setup
1.1 Setup
1.1.1 Factory Defaults
Many of the settings for this unit have been configured before the unit ships.
Where possible, these settings are configured with the optimum or most common values for the setting. For example, the port number of the SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) server is set to "5060".
However, many of the settings, such as the address of the SIP server or the phone number, have not been pre-configured, and they must be modified depending on the usage environment. If the port number of the
SIP server is not "5060", the value of this setting must be changed.
This unit thus will not function properly using only the factory default settings. The settings for each feature must be configured according to the environment in which the unit is used.
Note
• If you are using a PoE hub, the number of devices that you can connect simultaneously is limited by the amount of power supplied by the hub.
1.1.2 Language Selection for the Unit
You can change the language used on the LCD.
In addition, various settings can be configured by accessing the Web user interface from a PC on the same
network (→ see 4 Web User Interface Programming
). You can select the language for the Web user interface.
Note
• To select the display language for the unit, refer to the Operating Instructions on the Panasonic Web site (→ see
).
• To select the display language for the Web user interface, see
1.1.3 Basic Network Setup
This section describes the basic network settings that you must configure before you can use the unit on your network.
You must configure the following network settings:
• IP Address Mode (IPv4 or IPv6 or IPv4/IPv6 Dual) settings
• TCP/IP settings (DHCP / RA for IPv6 / static IP)
• DNS server settings
For details about basic network settings via the Web user interface, see
4.3.1 Basic Network Settings .
TCP/IP Settings for IPv4 (DHCP or Static IP Address Assignment)
A unique IP address must be assigned to the unit so that it can communicate on the network. How you assign an IP address depends on your network environment. This unit supports the following 2 methods for assigning an IP address:
Obtaining an IP Address Automatically from a DHCP Server
You can configure the unit to automatically obtain its IP address when it starts up from a DHCP server running on your network. With this method, the system can efficiently manage a limited number of IP addresses. Note that the IP address assigned to the unit may vary every time the unit is started up.
For details about the DHCP server, consult your network administrator.
10 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
1.1.3 Basic Network Setup
Using a Static IP Address Specified by Your Network Administrator
If IP addresses for network devices are specified individually by your network administrator, you will need to manually configure settings such as the IP address, subnet mask, default gateway, and DNS servers.
For details about the required network settings, consult your network administrator.
TCP/IP Settings for IPv6 (DHCP, RA or Static IP Address Assignment)
A unique IP address must be assigned to the unit so that it can communicate on the network. How you assign an IP address depends on your network environment. This unit supports the following 3 methods for assigning an IP address:
Obtaining an IP Address Automatically from a DHCP Server
You can configure the unit to automatically obtain its IP address when it starts up from a DHCP server running on your network. With this method, the system can efficiently manage a limited number of IP addresses. Note that the IP address assigned to the unit may vary every time the unit is started up.
For details about the DHCP server, consult your network administrator.
Using a Static IP Address Specified by Your Network Administrator
If IP addresses for network devices are specified individually by your network administrator, you will need to manually configure settings such as the IP address, Prefix, default gateway, and DNS servers.
For details about the required network settings, consult your network administrator.
Using a RA (Router Advertisement)
An IPv6 address can be assigned using Stateless Autoconfiguration. This enables the setting of addresses for only the router and the node without the need to manage information.
For details about the required network settings, consult your network administrator.
DNS Server Settings
You can configure the unit to use 2 DNS servers: a primary DNS server is DNS1 and a secondary DNS server is DNS2. The primary DNS1 server receives priority over the secondary DNS2 server. If the primary
DNS1 server returns no reply, the secondary DNS2 server will be used.
For details about configuring the DNS server settings using the unit, or using the Web user interface, see
Configuring the Network Settings of the Unit
in this section.
DNS Priority Using Configuration File
The setting for DNS server(s) may be configured using the configuration files by your phone system dealer/ service provider (→ see " DHCP_DNS_ENABLE ", " DHCP_DNS_ENABLE_IPV6 ",
" USER_DNS1_ADDR "/" USER_DNS2_ADDR " (for IPv4) and
" USER_DNS1_ADDR_IPV6 "/" USER_DNS2_ADDR_IPV6 " (for IPv6) in
).
• When " DHCP_DNS_ENABLE " (for IPv4) is set to " Y ", you can manually configure the DNS server address by using " USER_DNS1_ADDR " or (" USER_DNS1_ADDR " and " USER_DNS2_ADDR "). When set to " N ", the
DNS server address will be automatically transmitted. This setting is available only when
(" IP_ADDR_MODE "="0" or " IP_ADDR_MODE "="2") and " CONNECTION_TYPE "="1".
• When " DHCP_DNS_ENABLE_IPV6 " (for IPv6) is set to " Y ", you can manually configure the DNS server address by using " USER_DNS1_ADDR_IPV6 " or (" USER_DNS1_ADDR_IPV6 " and
" USER_DNS2_ADDR_IPV6 "). When set to " N ", the DNS server address will be automatically transmitted.
This setting is available only when (" IP_ADDR_MODE "="1" or " IP_ADDR_MODE "="2") and
" CONNECTION_TYPE_IPV6 "="1".
Configuring the Network Settings of the Unit
The following procedures explain how to change the network settings via the unit.
For details about the individual network settings that can be configured via the unit, refer to the Operating
Instructions on the Panasonic Web site (→ see Introduction ).
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 11
1.1.3 Basic Network Setup
For details about the individual network settings that can be configured via the unit, refer to the Operating
Instructions on the Panasonic Web site (→ see
).
For details about configuring network settings via the Web user interface, see
.
To configure IP Mode (IPv4, IPv6, IPv4&IPv6)
KX-HDV130/KX-HDV230
[In standby mode]
1.
2.
[ ]/[ ]: " System Settings " →
OK
3.
[ ]/[ ]: " Network Settings " →
OK
4.
[ ]/[ ]: " IP Mode Select " →
OK
5.
[ ]/[ ]: " IPv4 " / " IPv6 " / " IPv4&IPv6 " →
OK
• The initial value is IPv4 .
KX-HDV330/KX-HDV430
[In standby mode]
1.
Tap / → "System Settings"
2.
Tap "Network Settings"
3.
Tap / → "IP Mode Select"
4.
Tap "IPv4"/"IPv6"/"IPv4&IPv6"
• The initial value is " IPv4 ".
Configuring the Network Settings Using IPv4
To configure network settings automatically
KX-HDV130/KX-HDV230
[In standby mode]
1.
2.
[ ]/[ ]: " System Settings " →
OK
3.
[ ]/[ ]: " Network Settings " →
OK
4.
[ ]/[ ]: " IPv4 Settings " →
OK
5.
[ ]/[ ]: " DHCP " →
OK
6.
[ ]/[ ]: " Auto " →
OK
• Select Manual to enter the addresses for DNS1 (primary DNS server) and, if necessary, DNS2
(secondary DNS server) manually, and then press
OK
.
KX-HDV330/KX-HDV430
[In standby mode]
1.
Tap / → "System Settings"
2.
Tap "Network Settings"
12 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
1.1.3 Basic Network Setup
3.
Tap / → "IPv4 Settings"
4.
Tap / → "Connection Mode"
5.
Select "DHCP" → "OK"
6.
Tap / → "DNS"
7.
Select "Auto" → "OK."
• Select Manual to enter the addresses for DNS1 (primary DNS server) and, if necessary, DNS2
(secondary DNS server) manually, and then tap "OK".
To configure network settings manually
KX-HDV130/KX-HDV230
[In standby mode]
1.
2.
[ ]/[ ]: " System Settings " →
OK
3.
[ ]/[ ]: " Network Settings " →
OK
4.
[ ]/[ ]: " IPv4 Settings " →
OK
5.
[ ]/[ ]: " Static " →
OK
6.
Enter the IP address, subnet mask, default gateway, DNS1 (primary DNS server), and, if necessary,
DNS2 (secondary DNS server), and then press
OK
.
KX-HDV330/KX-HDV430
[In standby mode]
1.
Tap / → "System Settings"
2.
Tap "Network Settings"
3.
Tap / → "IPv4 Settings"
4.
Tap / → "Connection Mode"
5.
Select "Static" → "OK"
6.
Enter the IP address, subnet mask, default gateway, DNS1 (primary DNS server), and, if necessary,
DNS2 (secondary DNS server), and then tap "OK".
Configuring the Network Settings Using IPv6
To configure network settings automatically using DHCP
KX-HDV130/KX-HDV230
[In standby mode]
1.
2.
[ ]/[ ]: " System Settings " →
OK
3.
[ ]/[ ]: " Network Settings " →
OK
4.
[ ]/[ ]: " IPv6 Settings " →
OK
5.
[ ]/[ ]: " DHCP " →
OK
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 13
1.1.3 Basic Network Setup
6.
[ ]/[ ]: " Auto " →
OK
• Select Manual to enter the addresses for DNS1 (primary DNS server) and, if necessary, DNS2
(secondary DNS server) manually, and then press
OK
.
KX-HDV330/KX-HDV430
[In standby mode]
1.
Tap / → "System Settings"
2.
Tap "Network Settings"
3.
Tap / → "IPv6 Settings"
4.
Tap / → "Connection Mode"
5.
Select "DHCP" → "OK"
6.
Tap / → "DNS"
7.
Select "Auto" → "OK"
• Select Manual to enter the addresses for DNS1 (primary DNS server) and, if necessary, DNS2
(secondary DNS server) manually, and then tap "OK".
To configure network settings automatically using RA
KX-HDV130/KX-HDV230
[In standby mode]
1.
2.
[ ]/[ ]: " System Settings " →
OK
3.
[ ]/[ ]: " Network Settings " →
OK
4.
[ ]/[ ]: " IPv6 Settings " →
OK
5.
[ ]/[ ]: " RA " →
OK
6.
Enter the addresses for DNS1 (primary DNS server) and, if necessary, DNS2 (secondary DNS server) manually, and then press
OK
.
KX-HDV330/KX-HDV430
[In standby mode]
1.
Tap / → "System Settings"
2.
Tap "Network Settings"
3.
Tap / → "IPv6 Settings"
4.
Tap / → "Connection Mode"
5.
Select "RA" → "OK"
6.
Enter the addresses for DNS1 (primary DNS server) and, if necessary, DNS2 (secondary DNS server) manually, and then tap "OK".
To configure network settings manually
KX-HDV130/KX-HDV230
[In standby mode]
14 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
1.1.4 Overview of Programming
1.
2.
[ ]/[ ]: " System Settings " →
OK
3.
[ ]/[ ]: " Network Settings " →
OK
4.
[ ]/[ ]: " IPv6 Settings " →
OK
5.
[ ]/[ ]: " Static " →
OK
6.
Enter the IP address, Prefix (for IPv6), Default Gateway, DNS1 (primary DNS server), and, if necessary,
DNS2 (secondary DNS server), and then press
OK
.
KX-HDV330/KX-HDV430
[In standby mode]
1.
Tap / → "System Settings"
2.
Tap "Network Settings"
3.
Tap / → "IPv6 Settings"
4.
Tap / → "Connection Mode"
5.
Select "Static" → "OK"
6.
Enter the IP address, subnet mask, default gateway, DNS1 (primary DNS server), and, if necessary,
DNS2 (secondary DNS server), and then tap "OK".
Note
• If your phone system dealer/service provider does not allow you these settings, you cannot change them even though the unit shows the setting menu. Contact your phone system dealer/service provider for further information.
• If you select DHCP for the connection mode, all the settings concerning static connection will be ignored, even if they have been specified.
• If you select DHCP for the connection mode and Auto for DNS, the DNS server settings (DNS1 and
DNS2) will be ignored, even if they have been specified.
1.1.4 Overview of Programming
There are 3 types of programming, as shown in the table below:
Programming
Type
Description
Phone user interface programming
Configuring the unit’s settings directly from the unit.
Web user interface programming
Configuring the unit’s settings by accessing the Web user interface from a PC connected to the same network.
References
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 15
1.1.5 Phone User Interface Programming
Programming
Type
Configuration file programming
Description
Configuring the unit’s settings beforehand by creating configuration files (pre-provisioning), and having the unit download the files from a server on the Internet and configure its own settings
(provisioning).
References
1.1.5 Phone User Interface Programming
You can change the settings directly from the unit.
For details about the operations, refer to the Operating Instructions on the Panasonic Web site (→ see
For details about additional features available with direct commands, see 3 Phone User Interface
1.1.5.1 Changing the Language for Phone User Interface
Programming
You can change the language used on the LCD. Because the language settings for the LCD of the unit are not synchronized, you must set the languages individually for the unit.
For details about changing the setting, refer to the Operating Instructions on the Panasonic Web site (→ see
1.1.6 Web User Interface Programming
After connecting the unit to your network, you can configure the unit’s settings by accessing the Web user
A
B
C
D
A.
Router
B.
Switching Hub
C.
PC
16 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
1.1.6 Web User Interface Programming
D.
SIP Phone
1.1.6.1 Password for Web User Interface Programming
To program the unit via the Web user interface, a login account is required. There are 2 types of accounts, and each has different access privileges.
• User: User accounts are for use by end users. Users can change the settings that are specific to the unit.
• Administrator: Administrator accounts are for use by administrators to manage the system configuration.
Administrators can change all the settings, including the network settings, in addition to the settings that can be changed from a User account.
A separate password is assigned to each account.
For details, see Access Levels (IDs and Passwords)
in 1.1.6.3 Before Accessing the Web User
.
Notice
• You should manage the passwords carefully, and change them regularly.
1.1.6.2 Changing the Language for Web User Interface Programming
When accessing the unit via the Web user interface on a PC connected to the same network, various menus and settings are displayed. You can change the language used for displaying these setting items. Because the language setting for the Web user interface is not synchronized with those of the unit, you must set the languages for each independently.
For details, see 4.4.1 Language Settings .
1.1.6.3 Before Accessing the Web User Interface
Recommended Environment
This unit supports the following specifications:
HTTP Version
Authentication Method
HTTP/1.0 (RFC 1945), HTTP/1.1 (RFC 2616)
Digest
The Web user interface will operate correctly in the following environments:
Operating System Microsoft ® Windows ® 7 or Windows 8 operating system
Web Browser
Language (recommended)
Windows Internet Explorer ® 7, Windows Internet Explorer 8, Windows
Internet Explorer 9, Windows Internet Explorer 10, Windows Internet
Explorer 11 web browser, Firefox ® (32.0.3), Google ® Chrome™
(37.0.2062.103)
English
Opening/Closing the Web Port
To access the Web user interface, you must open the unit’s Web port beforehand. For details, refer to the
Operating Instructions on the Panasonic Web site (→ see Introduction ).
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 17
1.1.6 Web User Interface Programming
Configuring Settings from the Unit
KX-HDV130/KX-HDV230
To open the unit’s Web port
[In standby mode]
1.
2.
[ ]/[ ]: " Basic Settings " →
OK
3.
[ ]/[ ]: " Other Option " →
OK
4.
[ ]/[ ]: " Embedded Web " →
OK
5.
[ ]/[ ]: " On " for " Embedded Web " →
OK
To close the unit’s Web port
[In standby mode]
1.
2.
[ ]/[ ]: " Basic Settings " →
OK
3.
[ ]/[ ]: " Other Option " →
OK
4.
[ ]/[ ]: " Embedded Web " →
OK
5.
[ ]/[ ]: " Off " for " Embedded Web " →
OK
Note
The "Embedded Web" settings can also be configured with the following procedure.
Press the button when the unit is in standby mode.
1.
[ ]/[ ]: " System Settings " →
OK
2.
[ ]/[ ]: " Network Settings " →
OK
3.
[ ]/[ ]: " Embedded Web " →
OK
KX-HDV330/KX-HDV430
To open the unit’s Web port
[In standby mode]
1.
Tap / → "Basic Settings"
2.
Tap / → "Other Option"
3.
Tap "Embedded Web"
4.
Select "On" → "OK"
To close the unit’s Web port
[In standby mode]
1.
Tap / → "Basic Settings"
2.
Tap / → "Other Option"
3.
Tap "Embedded Web"
4.
Select "Off" → "OK"
18 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
1.1.6 Web User Interface Programming
Note
The "Embedded Web" settings can also be configured with the following procedure.
When the unit is in standby mode,
1.
Tap / → "System Settings"
2.
Tap / → "Network Settings"
3.
Tap / → "Embedded Web"
Configuring Settings from the Web User Interface
To close the unit’s Web port
1.
In the Web user interface, click [Web Port Close] .
2.
Click OK .
Note
• The Web port of the unit will be closed automatically in the following conditions:
– 3 consecutive unsuccessful login attempts occur.
• The Web port can be set to stay open continuously, through Configuration file programming (→ see
" HTTPD_PORTOPEN_AUTO
). However, please recognize the possibility of unauthorized access to the unit by doing so.
Access Levels (IDs and Passwords)
2 accounts with different access privileges are provided for accessing the Web user interface: User and
Administrator. Each account has its own ID and password, which are required to log in to the Web user interface.
Account
User
Target User
End users
ID
(default) user
Password
(default)
-blank-
(NULL)
Password Restrictions
Administrator Network administrators, etc.
admin adminpass
• When logged in as User, you can change the password for the
User account (→ see
).
• The password can consist of 6 to
64 ASCII characters (casesensitive) (→ see
in 1.1.6.4 Accessing the Web User Interface
).
• When logged in as Administrator, you can change the password for both the User and Administrator accounts (→ see
).
• The password can consist of 6 to
64 ASCII characters (casesensitive) (→ see
in 1.1.6.4 Accessing the Web User Interface
).
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 19
1.1.6 Web User Interface Programming
Notice
• Only one account can be logged in to the Web user interface at a time. If you try to access the Web user interface while someone is logged in, you will be denied access.
• You cannot log in to the Web user interface even under the same account as someone who is already logged in.
• The user password is required to change the settings.
• The IDs can be changed through configuration file programming (→ see " ADMIN_ID " and " USER_ID " in
• If you forget your account IDs or passwords, consult your phone system dealer/service provider.
1.1.6.4 Accessing the Web User Interface
The unit can be configured from the Web user interface.
To access the Web user interface
1.
Open your Web browser, and then enter "http://" followed by the unit’s IP address into the address field of your browser.
a.
When the IP address is 192.168.0.1 (IPv4), access the following URL.
http://192.168.0.1/ b.
When the IP address is 2001:db8:1f70::999:de8:7648:6e8 (IPv6), access the following URL. With
IPv6, the IP address is enclosed in square brackets ("[" and "]").
http://[2001:db8:1f70::999:de8:7648:6e8]/
Note
• To determine the unit’s IP address, perform the following operations on the unit:
KX-HDV130/KX-HDV230
1.
2.
[ ]/[ ]: " System Settings " →
OK
3.
[ ]/[ ]: " Status " →
OK
4.
[ ]/[ ]: " IPv4 Settings "/" IPv6 Settings " →
OK
5.
[ ]/[ ]: " IP Address ".
(IPv6 only)
KX-HDV330/KX-HDV430
[In standby mode]
1.
Tap / → "System Settings"
2.
Tap "Status"
3.
Tap / → "IPv4 Settings"/"IPv6 Settings"
4.
Tap " IP Address
2.
For authentication, enter your ID (username) and password, and then click OK .
Notice
• The default ID for the User account is "user", and the default password is blank. The ID cannot be changed from the Web user interface, but it can be changed through configuration file programming.
• When you log in as User to the Web user interface for the first time, the [User Password
Settings]
screen (→ see 4.4.2 User Password Settings ) will be displayed. Enter a new
20 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
1.1.6 Web User Interface Programming password, and then perform authentication again with the new password to log in to the Web user interface.
• The default ID for the Administrator account is "admin", and the default password is "adminpass".
The ID cannot be changed from the Web user interface, but it can be changed through configuration file programming.
3.
The Web user interface window is displayed. Configure the settings for the unit as desired.
4.
You can log out from the Web user interface at any time by clicking [Web Port Close] .
*1
IPv6 only
Controls on the Window
The Web user interface window contains various controls for navigating and configuring settings. The following figure shows the controls that are displayed on the [Basic Network Settings] screen as an example:
Note
• Actual default values may vary depending on your phone system dealer/service provider.
• When you log in to the Web user interface with the User account, the languages of messages displayed on the configuration screen may differ depending on the country/area of use.
Tabs
Tabs are the top categories for classifying settings. When you click a tab, the corresponding menu items and the configuration screen of the first menu item appear. There are 6 tabs for the Administrator account and 3 tabs for the User account. For details about the account types, see
Access Levels (IDs and Passwords)
in this section.
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 21
1.1.6 Web User Interface Programming
Menu
The menu displays the sub-categories of the selected tab.
Configuration Screen
Clicking a menu displays the corresponding configuration screen, which contains the actual settings,
grouped into sections. For details, see 4.2 Status
.
Buttons
The following standard buttons are displayed in the Web user interface:
Logout
Button
Web Port Close
Function
Logs out of the Web user interface.
Save
Closes the Web port of the unit and logs you out of the Web user interface after a confirmation message is displayed.
Applies changes and displays a result message (→ see
this section).
Cancel Discards changes. The settings on the current screen will return to the values they had before being changed.
Refresh Updates the status information displayed on the screen. This button is displayed in the upper-right area of the [Network Status] and [VoIP Status] screens.
Entering Characters
In the Web user interface, when specifying a name, message, password, or other text item, you can enter any of the ASCII characters displayed in the following table with a white background.
However, there are additional limitations for certain types of fields as follows:
• Number field
– You may only enter a sequence of numeric characters.
• IP Address field
– You can enter the IP address using dotted-decimal notation (i.e., "n.n.n.n" where n=0–255).
– With IPv6, you can enter the IP address using dotted-decimal notation (i.e., "n:n:n:n:n:n:n:n" where n=0-FFFF, abbreviation available).
• FQDN field
22 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
1.1.6 Web User Interface Programming
– You can enter the IP address using dotted-decimal notation (i.e., "n.n.n.n" where n=0–255).
– With IPv6, the IP address is enclosed in square brackets ("[" and "]").
Example: http://[2001:db8:1f70::999:de8:7648:6e8]/
• Display Name field (→ see [Display Name] in
– This is the only field in which you can enter Unicode characters.
Result Messages
When you click [Save] after changing the settings on the current configuration screen, one of the following messages will appear in the upper-left area of the current configuration screen:
Result Message
Complete
Failed (Parameter Error)
Failed (Memory Access
Failure)
Description
The operation has successfully completed.
The operation failed because:
• Some specified values are out of range or invalid.
The operation failed because:
• Access error to the flash memory occurred while reading or writing the data.
Applicable Screens
All screens except
All screens
All screens
Failed (Transfer Failure)
All screens
Failed (Busy)
Failed (Canceled)
Failed (Invalid File)
Failed (File Size Error)
The operation failed because:
• A network error occurred during the data transmission.
The operation failed because:
• The unit is in an operation that accesses the flash memory of the unit.
• When attempting to import/export the phonebook data, the unit is on a call.
• While transferring the phonebook data, a call arrived at the unit.
The operation failed because:
• While transferring the phonebook data, the connection with the unit was interrupted.
The operation failed because:
• Analysis of the received data failed.
The operation failed because:
• The size of the imported phonebook is too large.
All screens
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 23
1.2 Firmware Update
Result Message
No Data
Description
The operation failed because:
• The imported phonebook file contains no valid phonebook entries.
• No phonebook entry is registered in the export source the unit.
Applicable Screens
*1
"Failed (Transfer Failure)" may not be displayed depending on your Web browser.
1.2 Firmware Update
1.2.1 Firmware Update
You can update the unit’s firmware to improve the unit’s operation. You can configure the unit so that it automatically downloads the new firmware file from a specified location. The firmware update will be executed when the unit is restarted.
For details, see 7 Firmware Update
.
A C
B
D
A C
B
A.
Provisioning server
B.
Configuration file
C.
Firmware server
D.
Firmware
Download
Check for update
Firmware download and update
24 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
Section 2
General Information on Provisioning
This section provides an overview of the configuration file programming procedures for the unit, including preprovisioning and provisioning.
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 25
2.1 Pre-provisioning
2.1 Pre-provisioning
2.1.1 What is Pre-provisioning?
Pre-provisioning is an auto-provisioning mechanism that automatically obtains the server address saved in the configuration file administered by the carrier or distributor.
There are two methods for automatically obtaining the server address saved in the configuration file.
1.
SIP PnP
The phone multicasts a SIP SUBSCRIBE message and obtains a provisioning server address via a
SIP NOTIFY message.
2.
DHCP options
The phone obtains a provisioning server address via the DHCP option information. DHCP options 66,
159 and 160 will be used when the phone’s IP address mode is IPv4, and DHCP option 17 will be used when the phone’s IP address mode is IPv6.
2.1.2 How to Obtain a Pre-provisioning Server Address
Upon startup, the phone will attempt to obtain a pre-provisioning server address as follows.
1.
When the phone’s IP address mode is IPv4
The phone will attempt to obtain a pre-provisioning server address using SIP PnP, but when it cannot, it will attempt to do so from DHCPv4 options.
2.
When the phone’s IP address mode is IPv6
The phone will attempt to obtain a pre-provisioning server address from DHCPv6 options.
3.
When the phone’s IP address mode is IPv4/v6 Dual
The phone will attempt to obtain a pre-provisioning server address using SIP PnP, but when it cannot, it will attempt to do so from DHCPv4 options. When this is not possible, it will attempt to do so from
DHCPv6 options.
Note
• The SIP PnP function is enabled in the initial state. It can be enabled or disabled from the configuration parameter " SIPPNP_PROV_ENABLE ".
2.1.3 Server Address Formats
1.
Basic format
Format: <scheme>://<user>:<password>@<host>:<port>/<url-path>/<file name>
* The server name (<host>) may be the IP address or the domain.
* Maximum length: 384 characters
2.
Macros used with file names
Macro Format {XXXX}
{MAC}
{mac}
Macro Expansion
If the URL contains {MAC}, it will be replaced with the device’s MAC address in uppercase letters.
Example: {MAC} → 0080F0C571EB
If the URL contains {mac}, it will be replaced with the device’s MAC address in lowercase letters.
Example: {mac} → 0080f0C571eb
{MODEL} If the URL contains {MODEL}, it will be replaced with the device’s model name.
Example: {MODEL} → KX-HDV130
26 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
2.1.4 Obtaining a Provisioning Server Address via SIP PnP
{fwver}
Macro Format {XXXX} Macro Expansion
If the URL contains {fwver}, it will be replaced with the device’s firmware version.
Example: {fwver} → 01.000
Note
• Macros distinguish between uppercase and lowercase letters.
• Macros not specified above will be treated as strings of characters.
2.1.4 Obtaining a Provisioning Server Address via SIP PnP
1.
Basic Sequence
At startup, the phone will multicast a SIP SUBSCRIBE message for the ua-profile event, receive a SIP
NOTIFY message from the PnP server and obtain a pre-provisioning server address. It will then obtain a provisioning server address from the pre-provisioning server.
A B C
D
A
B
C
D
D
A.
SIP Phone
B.
PnP Server
C.
Pre-provisioning Server
D.
xxxxxxxxxxxx.cfg
SUBSCRIBE (multicast)
NOTIFY (unicast)
Body http://server/{MODEL}.cfg
HTTP GET {MODEL}.cfg
200OK
Obtain provisioning server information
CFG_STANDARD_FILE_PATH
CFG_PRODUCT_FILE_PATH
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 27
2.1.5 Obtaining a Provisioning Server Address from DHCP Options
CFG_MASTER_FILE_PATH
2.
Provisioning server URL formats
Format: <scheme>://<user>:<password>@<host>:<port>/<url-path>/<file name>
<scheme>
<user>
<password>
<host>
Mandatory
Optional
Optional
Mandatory
Protocol (TFTP/FTP/HTTP/HTTPS)
User name
Password
IP Address or Domain
<port>
<url-path>
<file name>
Optional
Optional
Mandatory
Port number
Full path of the resource
File name
1.
Case 1: Protocol, server name and file name http://10.0.0.1/{MODEL}.cfg
http://prov.com/{MODEL}.cfg
2.
Case 2: Protocol, server name, path and file name http://10.0.0.1/pana/{MODEL}.cfg
http://prov.com/pana/{MODEL}.cfg
3.
Case 3 Protocol, user name, password, server name and file name http://id:[email protected]/{MAC}.cfg
http://id:[email protected]/{MAC}.cfg
2.1.5 Obtaining a Provisioning Server Address from DHCP
Options
1.
DHCPv4 a.
Basic Sequence
In a DHCPv4 environment, the phone will transmit a DHCP DISCOVER message for DHCP options (66, 67, 159 and 160), receive a DHCP OFFER message, obtain a pre-provisioning server address and obtain a provisioning server address from the pre-provisioning server.
Note
• DHCP options (66, 159 and 160) are enabled in the initial state and can be enabled and disabled from the configuration parameters.
DHCP options
Option 66
Configuration parameter
OPTION66_ENABLE
Priority
3
Option 159 OPTION159_PROV_ENABLE 2
Option 160 OPTION160_PROV_ENABLE 1
28 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
2.1.5 Obtaining a Provisioning Server Address from DHCP Options
A B
A
B
C
D
D
E
F
A.
SIP Phone
B.
DHCP Server
C.
Pre-provisioning Server
D.
KX-HDVx30.cfg
DHCP DISCOVER
DHCP OFFER
DHCP REQUEST
DHCP ACK
TFTP {MODEL}.cfg
200OK
Obtain provisioning server information
CFG_STANDARD_FILE_PATH
CFG_PRODUCT_FILE_PATH
CFG_MASTER_FILE_PATH b.
Format for pre-provisioning files obtained from DHCP option 67
Format: <path>/<file name>
<path>
<file name>
Optional
Mandatory path file name
1.
Case 1: File name only
{MODEL}.cfg
2.
Case 2: Path and file name pana/{MODEL}.cfg
Document Version: 2017-07
C
D
Administrator Guide 29
2.1.5 Obtaining a Provisioning Server Address from DHCP Options c.
Format for pre-provisioning server address obtained from DHCP options 159 and 160
Format: <scheme>://<user>:<password>@<host>:<port>/<path>
<scheme>
<user>
<password>
<host>
<port>
<path>
Mandatory
Optional
Optional
Mandatory
Optional
Optional
Protocol (TFTP/FTP/HTTP/HTTPS)
User name
Password
IP Address or Domain
Port number
P ath
The obtained file is the <path>/<file name> set in DHCP option 67.
If DHCP option 67 is not set, {MODEL}.cfg is obtained.
The examples in parentheses below are when {MODEL}.cfg is set for DHCP option 67.
1.
Case 1: Protocol and server name http://10.0.0.1 (http://10.0.0.1/{MODEL}.cfg) http://prov.com (http://prov.com/{MODEL}.cfg)
2.
Case 2: Protocol, server name and path http://10.0.0.1/pana (http://10.0.0.1/pana/{MODEL}.cfg) http://prov.com/pana (http://prov.com/pana/{MODEL}.cfg)
3.
Case 3: Protocol, user name, password and server name http://id:[email protected] (http://id:[email protected]/{MODEL}.cfg) http://id:[email protected] (http://id:[email protected]/{MODEL}.cfg) d.
Format for pre-provisioning server address obtained from DHCP option 66
Format: <scheme>://<user>:<password>@<host>:<port>/<path>
<scheme>
<user>
<password>
<host>
<port>
<path>
Optional
Optional
Optional
Mandatory
Optional
Optional
Protocol (TFTP/FTP/HTTP/HTTPS)
User name
Password
IP Address or Domain
Port number
P ath
If DHCP option 66 does not include <scheme>, {MODEL}.cfg is obtained.
If the last character of DHCP option 66 is "/", {MODEL}.cfg is obtained.
Otherwise DHCP option 66 includes <file name>.
1.
Case 1: Protocol and server name http://10.0.0.1/ (http://10.0.0.1/{MODEL}.cfg) http://prov.com/ (http://prov.com/{MODEL}.cfg)
2.
Case 2: Protocol, server name and path http://10.0.0.1/pana/ (http://10.0.0.1/pana/{MODEL}.cfg) http://prov.com/pana/ (http://prov.com/pana/{MODEL}.cfg)
3.
Case 3: Protocol, user name, password and server name http://id:[email protected]/ (http://id:[email protected]/{MODEL}.cfg) http://id:[email protected]/ (http://id:[email protected]/{MODEL}.cfg)
4.
Case 4: Server name tftp://10.0.0.1 (tftp://10.0.0.1/{MODEL}.cfg) tftp://prov.com (tftp://prov.com/{MODEL}.cfg)
30 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
2.1.5 Obtaining a Provisioning Server Address from DHCP Options
2.
DHCPv6 a.
In a DHCPv6 environment, the phone will transmit a DHCPv6 REQUEST message for DHCP option 17, receive a DHCPv6 REPLY message, obtain a pre-provisioning server address and obtain a provisioning server address from the pre-provisioning server.
Note
• DHCP option 17 is enabled in the initial state and can be enabled and disabled from the configuration parameters (" DHCPV6_OPTION17_PROV_ENABLE ").
A B C
D
A
B
D
C
D
A.
SIP Phone
B.
DHCP Server
C.
Pre-provisioning Server
D.
KX-HDVx30.cfg
DHCPv6 REQUEST
DHCPv6 REPLY
TFTP {MODEL}.cfg
200OK
Obtain provisioning server information
CFG_STANDARD_FILE_PATH
CFG_PRODUCT_FILE_PATH
CFG_MASTER_FILE_PATH b.
Format for pre-provisioning addresses obtained from DHCPv6 option 17
Format: <scheme>://<user>:<password>@<host>:<port>/<url-path>
<scheme>
<user>
Mandatory
Optional
Protocol (TFTP/FTP/HTTP/HTTPS)
User name
<password>
<host>
Optional
Mandatory
Password
IP Address or Domain
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 31
2.2 Provisioning
<port>
<url-path>
<file name>
Optional
Optional
Mandatory
Port number
Full path of the resource
File name
1.
Case 1: Protocol, server name, and file name http://[2001:0db8:bd05:01d2:288a:1fc0:0001:10ee]/{MODEL}.cfg
http://prov.com/{MODEL}.cfg
2.
Case 2: Protocol, server name, path and file name http://[2001:db8::1234:0:0:9abc]/pana/{MODEL}.cfg
http://prov.com/pana/{MODEL}.cfg
3.
Case 3: Protocol, user name, password, server name and file name http://id:pass@[2001:db8::9abc]/{MAC}.cfg
http://id:[email protected]/{MAC}.cfg
2.2 Provisioning
2.2.1 What is Provisioning?
After pre-provisioning has been performed (→ see
), you can set up the unit automatically by downloading the configuration file stored on the provisioning server into the unit. This is called "provisioning".
2.2.2 Protocols for Provisioning
Provisioning can be performed over HTTP, HTTPS, FTP, and TFTP. The protocol you should use differs depending on how you will perform provisioning. Normally, HTTP, HTTPS, or FTP is used for provisioning. If you are transmitting encrypted configuration files, it is recommended that you use HTTP. If you are transmitting unencrypted configuration files, it is recommended that you use HTTPS. You may not be able to use FTP depending on the conditions of the network router or the network to be used.
2.2.3 Configuration File
This section gives concrete examples of the functions of the configuration file and how to manage it.
The configuration file is a text file that contains the various settings that are necessary for operating the unit.
The files are normally stored on a server maintained by your phone system dealer/service provider, and will be downloaded to the units as required. All configurable settings can be specified in the configuration file.
You can ignore settings that already have the desired values. Only change parameters as necessary.
For details about setting parameters and their descriptions, see
5 Configuration File Programming
.
Using 3 Types of Configuration Files
The unit can download up to 3 configuration files. One way to take advantage of this is by classifying the configuration files into the following 3 types:
Type Usage
Master configuration file Configure settings that are common to all units, such as the SIP server address, and the IP addresses of the DNS and NTP
(Network Time Protocol) servers managed by your phone system dealer/service provider. This configuration file is used by all the units.
Example of the configuration file’s URL: http://prov.example.com/Panasonic/ConfigCommon.cfg
32 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
2.2.4 Downloading Configuration Files
Type
Product configuration file
Standard configuration file
Usage
Configure settings that are required for a particular model, such as the default setting of the privacy mode. This configuration file is used by all the units that have the same model name.
The same number of configuration files as models being used on the network are stored on the provisioning server, and units with the same model name download the corresponding configuration file.
Example of the configuration file’s URL: http://prov.example.com/Panasonic/Config{MODEL}.cfg
Note
• When a unit requests the configuration file, "{MODEL}" is replaced by the model name of the unit.
Configure settings that are unique to each unit, such as the phone number, user ID, password, etc.
The same number of configuration files as units are stored on the provisioning server, and each unit downloads the corresponding standard configuration file.
Example of the configuration file’s URL: http://prov.example.com/Panasonic/Config{MAC}.cfg
Note
• When a unit requests the configuration file, "{MAC}" is replaced by the MAC address of the unit.
Depending on the situation, you can use all 3 types of configuration files, and can also use only a standard configuration file.
The above example shows only one possible way to use configuration files. Depending on the requirements of your phone system dealer/service provider, there are a number of ways to use configuration files effectively.
Using 2 Types of Configuration Files
The following table shows an example of using 2 types of configuration files: a master configuration file to configure settings common to all units, and product configuration files to configure settings common to particular groups.
Using Product Configuration Files According to the Position Groups
You can use product configuration files for different groups or for multiple users within the same group.
Sales
Department Name
Planning
URL of Product Configuration File http://prov.example.com/Panasonic/ConfigSales.cfg
http://prov.example.com/Panasonic/ConfigPlanning.cfg
2.2.4 Downloading Configuration Files
Downloading a Configuration File via the Web User Interface
The following procedure describes how to enable downloading a configuration file via the Web User
Interface to be used for programming the unit.
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 33
2.2.4 Downloading Configuration Files
1.
Confirm that the provisioning server’s IP address/FQDN and directory are correct, and store the configuration files in the directory (e.g., http://provisioning.example.com/Panasonic/Config_Sample.cfg).
2.
Enter the IP address of the unit into the PC’s Web browser (→ see 1.1.6.3 Before Accessing the Web
3.
Log in as the administrator (→ see Access Levels (IDs and Passwords)
in 1.1.6.3 Before Accessing the Web User Interface
).
4.
Click the [Maintenance] tab, and then select [Provisioning Maintenance] .
5.
Enter the URL set up in Step 1 in [Standard File URL] .
6.
Click [Save] .
Timing of Downloading
A unit downloads configuration files when it starts up, at regular intervals, and when directed to do so by the server.
Download Timing Explanation
Startup The configuration files are downloaded when the unit starts up.
34 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
2.2.4 Downloading Configuration Files
Download Timing
At regular intervals of time
Explanation
The configuration files are downloaded at specified intervals of time, set in minutes. In the example below, the unit has been programmed to download configuration files from the provisioning server every 3 days
(4320 minutes).
CFG_CYCLIC_INTVL="4320"
A
B
A
B
C
A.
SIP Phone
B.
Provisioning Server
Power on
3 days later
6 days later
: Check
: Download
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 35
2.2.4 Downloading Configuration Files
Download Timing Explanation
The configuration files are downloaded periodically under the following conditions:
• In the configuration file, add the line, CFG_CYCLIC="Y" .
– Set an interval (minutes) by specifying " CFG_CYCLIC_INTVL ".
• In the Web user interface:
– Click the [Maintenance] tab, click [Provisioning Maintenance] , and then select [Yes] for [Cyclic Auto Resync] .
– Enter an interval (minutes) in [Resync Interval] .
Note
• The interval may be determined by your phone system dealer/ service provider. A maximum interval of 28 days (40320 minutes) can be set on the unit.
36 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
2.2.4 Downloading Configuration Files
Download Timing Explanation
At a specified time each day After the unit is powered on, it will download configuration files once per day at the specified time.
CFG_RESYNC_TIME="02:00"
A
B
A
B
C
A.
SIP Phone
B.
Provisioning Server
power on at 12:00
02:00
02:00
: Check
: Download
• In the configuration file:
– Set a time by specifying " CFG_RESYNC_TIME ".
• In the Web user interface:
– Click the [Maintenance] tab, click [Provisioning Maintenance] , and then enter the time in [Time Resync] .
Note
• The time is specified using a 24-hour clock ("00:00" to "23:59").
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 37
2.2.5 Provisioning Server Setting Example
Download Timing
When directed
Explanation
When a setting needs to be changed immediately, units can be directed to download the configuration files by sending them a NOTIFY message that includes a special event from the SIP server.
• In the configuration file:
– Specify the special event text in " CFG_RESYNC_FROM_SIP ".
• In the Web user interface:
– Click the [Maintenance] tab, click [Provisioning Maintenance] , and then enter the special event text in [Header Value for Resync
Event] .
Generally, "check-sync" or "resync" is set as the special event text.
2.2.5 Provisioning Server Setting Example
This section gives an example of how to set up the units and provisioning server when configuring 2 units with configuration files. The standard configuration files and the master configuration file are used in this example.
Conditions
Item
Provisioning server FQDN
Units’ MAC addresses prov.example.com
• 0080F0111111
• 0080F0222222
Description/Setting
URL of the configuration files Configure the following 2 settings either by pre-provisioning or through the Web user interface. The values of both settings must be the same.
• CFG_STANDARD_FILE_PATH="http://prov.example.com/
Panasonic/Config{MAC}.cfg"
• CFG_MASTER_FILE_PATH="http://prov.example.com/
Panasonic/ConfigCommon.cfg"
Directory on the provisioning server containing the configuration files
File name of configuration files
Create the "Panasonic" directory just under the HTTP root directory of the provisioning server.
Store the following configuration files in the "Panasonic" directory.
• Contains the common settings for the 2 units:
– ConfigCommon.cfg
• Contains the settings unique to each unit:
– Config0080F0111111.cfg
– Config0080F0222222.cfg
To set up the provisioning server
1.
Connect the units to the network, and turn them on.
a.
The unit with the MAC address 0080F0111111 accesses the following URLs: http://prov.example.com/Panasonic/ConfigCommon.cfg
http://prov.example.com/Panasonic/Config0080F0111111.cfg
38 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
2.2.6 Encryption b.
The unit with the MAC address 0080F0222222 accesses the following URLs: http://prov.example.com/Panasonic/ConfigCommon.cfg
http://prov.example.com/Panasonic/Config0080F0222222.cfg
Example Provisioning Direction from the Server
The following figure shows an example NOTIFY message from the server, directing the units to perform provisioning. The text "check-sync" is specified for " CFG_RESYNC_FROM_SIP ".
NOTIFY sip:[email protected] SIP/2.0
Via: SIP/2.0/UDP xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx:5060;branch=abcdef-ghijkl
From: sip:[email protected]
To: sip:[email protected]
Date: Wed, 1 Jan 2014 01:01:01 GMT
Call-ID: 123456-1234567912345678
CSeq: 1 NOTIFY
Contact: sip:xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx:5060
Event: check-sync
Content-Length: 0
2.2.6 Encryption
Secure Provisioning Methods
In order to perform provisioning securely, there are 2 methods for transferring configuration files securely between the unit and the server.
Which method is used depends on the environment and equipment available from the phone system.
Method 1: Transferring Encrypted Configuration Files
A
B
CFG_FILE_KEY2 CFG_FILE_KEY2
A.
Unencrypted configuration file
B.
Encrypted configuration file
To use this method, an encryption key is required to encrypt and decrypt the configuration files. A preset encryption key unique to each unit, an encryption key set by your phone system dealer/service provider, etc., is used for the encryption. When the unit downloads an encrypted configuration file, it will decrypt the file using the same encryption key, and then configure the settings automatically.
Method 2: Transferring Configuration Files Using HTTPS
This method uses SSL, which is commonly used on the Internet, to transfer configuration files between the unit and server. For more secure communication, you can use a root certificate.
Notice
• To avoid redundant data transfer over the network, important data, such as the encryption key used to encrypt the configuration files and the root certificate for SSL, should be configured through preprovisioning as much as possible.
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 39
2.3 Priority of Setting Methods
• It is recommended that you encrypt the data in order to keep the communication secure when transferring configuration files.
However, if you are using the units within a secure environment, such as within an intranet, it is not necessary to encrypt the data.
To decrypt configuration files, the unit uses the encryption key registered to it beforehand. The unit determines the encryption status by checking the extension of the downloaded configuration file.
For details about encrypting configuration files, contact the appropriate person in your organization.
Extension of Configuration
File
".e2c"
".e3c"
Configuration File Parameters Used for Decrypting
CFG_FILE_KEY2
CFG_FILE_KEY3
Other than ".e2c", and ".e3c" Processed as unencrypted configuration files.
The extension ".cfg" should be used for unencrypted configuration files.
Comparison of the 2 Methods
The following table compares the characteristics for the 2 transfer methods.
Provisioning server load
Operation load
Management of configuration files
Security of data on the server when operating
Light
Transferring Encrypted
Configuration Files
Necessary to encrypt data beforehand.
Files must be decrypted and reencrypted for maintenance.
High
Transferring Configuration Files
Using HTTPS
Heavy
(The server encrypts data for each transmission.)
Unnecessary to encrypt data beforehand.
It is easy to manage files because they are not encrypted on the server.
Low
(Configuration files are readable by anyone with access to the server.)
Moreover, there is another method: configuration files are not encrypted while stored on the server, and then, using the encryption key registered to the unit beforehand, they are encrypted when they are transferred. This method is particularly useful when several units are configured to download a common configuration file using different encryption keys. However, as when downloading an unencrypted configuration file using HTTPS, the server will be heavily burdened when transferring configuration files.
2.3 Priority of Setting Methods
The same settings can be configured by different configuration methods: provisioning, Web user interface programming, etc. This section explains which value is applied when the same setting is specified by multiple methods.
The following table shows the priority with which settings from each method are applied (lower numbers indicate higher priority):
Priority
3
2
Setting Method
The factory default settings for the unit
Pre-provisioning with the configuration file
40 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
2.4 Configuration File Specifications
Priority
1
1-1
1-2
Setting Method
Provisioning with the standard configuration file
Provisioning with the product configuration file
1-3 Provisioning with the master configuration file
Settings configured from the Web user interface or the phone user interface
According to the table, settings configured later override previous settings (i.e., settings listed lower in the table have a higher priority).
Notice
• Make sure to perform Reset to Factory Default before connecting the unit to a different phone system.
Contact your phone system dealer/service provider for further information.
2.4 Configuration File Specifications
The specifications of the configuration files are as follows:
File Format
The configuration file is in plain text format.
Lines in Configuration Files
A configuration file consists of a sequence of lines, with the following conditions:
• Each line must end with "<CR><LF>".
Note
<CR> or <LF> alone may be acceptable under certain conditions.
• Lines that begin with " # " are considered comments.
• Configuration files must start with a comment line containing the following designated character sequence
(44 bytes):
# Panasonic SIP Phone Standard Format File #
The hexadecimal notation of this sequence is:
23 20 50 61 6E 61 73 6F 6E 69 63 20 53 49 50 20
50 68 6F 6E 65 20 53 74 61 6E 64 61 72 64 20 46
6F 72 6D 61 74 20 46 69 6C 65 20 23
• To prevent the designated character sequence being altered by chance, it is recommended that the configuration file starts with the comment line shown below:
# Panasonic SIP Phone Standard Format File # DO NOT CHANGE THIS LINE!
• Configuration files must end with an empty line.
• Each parameter line is written in the form of XXX="yyy" (XXX: parameter name, yyy: parameter value).
The value must be enclosed by double quotation marks.
• A parameter line written over multiple lines is not allowed. It will cause an error on the configuration file, resulting in invalid provisioning.
Configuration Parameters
• The unit supports multiple telephone lines. For some parameters, the value for each line must be specified independently. A parameter name with the suffix " _1 " is the parameter for line 1; " _2 " for line 2, and so on.
Examples of setting the line (phone number) for accessing a voice mail server:
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 41
2.4 Configuration File Specifications
" VM_NUMBER_1 ": for line 1,
" VM_NUMBER_2 ": for line 2 (For KX-HDV130)
, ..., " VM_NUMBER_6 ": for line 6 (For KX-HDV230)
, ..., " VM_NUMBER_12 ": for line 12 (For KX-HDV330)
, ..., " VM_NUMBER_16 ": for line 16 (For KX-HDV430)
Note
• The number of lines available varies depending on the phone being used, as follows:
– KX-HDV130: 1–2
– KX-HDV230: 1–6
– KX-HDV330: 1–12
– KX-HDV430: 1–16
• Some parameter values can be specified as "empty" to set the parameter values to empty.
Example:
NTP_ADDR=""
• The parameters have no order.
• If the same parameter is specified in a configuration file more than once, the value specified first is applied.
• All configurable settings can be specified in the configuration file. You can ignore settings that already have the desired values. Only change parameters as necessary.
• Boolean parameters (BOOLEAN) accept all of the following configurations.
" Y ": " Y ", " y ", " Yes ", " YES ", " yes "
" N ": " N ", " n ", " No ", " NO ", " no "
Parameter Extensions
You can use parameter extensions to specify parameters as Read-Only or Carrier Default.
Read-Only Specification
• When "?R" or "?r" is specified, the phone user interface and Web user interface for the parameter in question is restricted to Read-Only.
* Restricting the phone user interface to Read-Only
The Read-Only parameter settings menu appears, but an error occurs during registration.
* Restricting the Web user interface to Read-Only
The Read-Only parameter settings menu appears grayed out and nothing can be entered.
Note
• Parameters that can be configured from the device and from the Web can be confirmed from
footnotes 1-3 on the parameter names in "5.1 Configuration File Parameter List".
• When "?R" or "?r" is not specified, the phone user interface and Web user interface are both readable and writable.
* Optional specifications for "?R" and "?r" are enabled when the last parameter in question is configured.
Carrier Default Specification
• When "?!" is specified, applicable parameter values are managed as carrier default values when applied to operational information.
* Carrier default values are applied once a reset to carrier defaults is executed. Carrier defaults will also be initialized when a reset to device defaults is executed.
42 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
2.5 Configuration File Examples
* Once "?!" is specified, the parameter in question will be designated as a carrier default even if said parameter is configured without "?!". (This setting will remain in place until restored to factory default.)
Specification of Multiple Parameter Extensions
• One parameter can be assigned multiple extensions.
Example: XXX ?R?!= "" / XXX ?!?r= ""
Parameter Extension Configuration Example
1.
In the configuration file, set IP Addressing Mode to IPv4 and Read-Only
Example parameter: IP_ADDR_MODE ?R
="0" ("0": IPv4)
2.
If an error occurs when attempting to set the IP Mode to IPv6, see To configure IP Mode (IPv4, IPv6,
IPv4&IPv6) in
Configuring the Network Settings of the Unit
.
2.5 Configuration File Examples
• Simplified Example of the Configuration File
• Comprehensive Example of the Configuration File
2.5.1 Examples of Codec Settings
Setting the Codec Priority to (1)G.729A, (2)PCMU, (3)G.722
## Codec Settings
# Enable G722
CODEC_ENABLE0_1="Y"
CODEC_PRIORITY0_1="3"
# Disable PCMA
CODEC_ENABLE1_1="N"
# Enable G729A
CODEC_ENABLE3_1="Y"
CODEC_PRIORITY3_1="1"
# Enable PCMU
CODEC_ENABLE4_1="Y"
CODEC_PRIORITY4_1="2"
Setting Narrow-band Codecs (PCMA and G.729A)
## Codec Settings
# Disable G722
CODEC_ENABLE0_1="N"
# Enable PCMA
CODEC_ENABLE1_1="Y"
CODEC_PRIORITY1_1="1"
# Enable G729A
CODEC_ENABLE3_1="Y"
CODEC_PRIORITY3_1="1"
# Disable PCMU
CODEC_ENABLE4_1="N"
Setting the G.729A Codec Only
## Codec Settings
# Disable G722
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 43
2.5.2 Example with Incorrect Descriptions
CODEC_ENABLE0_1="N"
# Disable PCMA
CODEC_ENABLE1_1="N"
# Enable G729A
CODEC_ENABLE3_1="Y"
CODEC_PRIORITY3_1="1"
# Disable PCMU
CODEC_ENABLE4_1="N"
2.5.2 Example with Incorrect Descriptions
The following listing shows an example of a configuration file that contains incorrect formatting:
An improper description is entered in the first line. A configuration file must start with the designated character sequence " # Panasonic SIP Phone Standard Format File # ".
Comment lines start in the middle of the lines.
Incorrect Example
# This is a simplified sample configuration file.
A
############################################################
# Configuration Setting #
############################################################
CFG_STANDARD_FILE_PATH="http://config.example.com/0123456789AB.cfg"
# URL of this configuration file
############################################################
# SIP Settings #
# Suffix "_1" indicates this parameter is for "line 1". #
############################################################
SIP_RGSTR_ADDR_1="registrar.example.com" # IP Address or FQDN of SIP registrar server
SIP_PRXY_ADDR_1="proxy.example.com" # IP Address or FQDN of proxy server
B
44 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
Section 3
Phone User Interface Programming
This section explains how to configure the unit by entering direct commands through the phone user interface.
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 45
3.1 Phone User Interface Programming
3.1 Phone User Interface Programming
This section provides information about the features that can be configured directly from the unit.
3.1.1 Configuring the Network Settings of the Unit
You can configure the Network Settings directly from the unit.
(→ see
Configuring the Network Settings of the Unit
).
3.1.2 Opening/Closing the Web Port
To access the Web user interface, you must open the unit’s Web port beforehand.
(→ see
).
46 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
Section 4
Web User Interface Programming
This section provides information about the settings available in the Web user interface.
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 47
4.1 Web User Interface Setting List
4.1 Web User Interface Setting List
The following tables show all the settings that you can configure from the Web user interface and the access levels. For details about each setting, see the reference pages listed.
For details about setting up Web user interface programming, see 1.1.6 Web User Interface
Status
Menu Item
Version
Information
Section Title
Version Information
Setting
Access
Level
U
ü
ü ü
A
ü
Ref.
Network Status Network Common
IPv4
IPv6
VLAN
Model
Operating Bank (For
KX-HDV230)
IPL Version
Firmware Version
MAC Address
Ethernet Link Status
IP Address Mode
Connection Mode
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Default Gateway
DNS1
DNS2
Connection Mode
IP Address
Prefix
Default Gateway
DNS1
DNS2
Setting Mode
LAN Port VLAN ID
LAN Port VLAN Priority
PC Port VLAN ID
PC Port VLAN Priority
page 64 page 64 page 64 page 64 page 64 page 64
page 65 page 65 page 65 page 65 page 65 page 65
page 62 page 62 page 62 page 62
page 63 page 63 page 63 page 63 page 63
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
48 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
Menu Item Section Title Setting
VoIP Status VoIP Status Line No.
Phone Number
VoIP Status
*1
The access levels are abbreviated as follows:
U: User; A: Administrator
A check mark indicates that the setting is available for that access level.
Network
Menu Item
Basic Network
Settings
Ethernet Port
Settings
Section Title
IP Addressing Mode
IPv4
IPv6
Link Speed/Duplex
Mode
LLDP
CDP
Setting
Connection Mode
DHCP Host Name
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Auto DNS via DHCP
Connection Mode
IP Address
Prefix
Auto DNS via DHCP
PC Port
Enable LLDP
PC VLAN ID
PC Priority
Enable CDP
4.1 Web User Interface Setting List
ü
ü
ü
Access
U A
ü
ü
ü
Ref.
Ref.
page 73 page 73 page 73 page 73 page 73
page 69 page 69 page 69 page 69 page 69
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
U
Access
A
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 49
4.1 Web User Interface Setting List
Menu Item Section Title
VLAN
HTTP Client
Settings
STUN Settings
Multicast Paging
Settings
LDAP Settings
50 Administrator Guide
HTTP Client
Proxy Server
STUN
Multicast Paging
LDAP
Setting
Enable VLAN
PC Priority
Authentication Password
Proxy Server Address
Group 1–5
- Port
- Priority
- Label
- Enable Transmission
Enable LDAP
User ID
Password
Number Filter
Number Attributes
Distinguished Name(Base
DN)
–
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
–
U
Access
A
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
Ref.
page 77 page 77 page 77 page 77
–
page 79 page 79 page 79 page 79 page 79 page 79
page 81 page 81 page 81 page 81 page 81
page 82 page 82 page 82 page 82
Document Version: 2017-07
4.1 Web User Interface Setting List
Menu Item Section Title Setting
Xtended Service
Settings
UC Settings
XML Application
Settings
Xtended Service
Xtended Service
Settings [Line 1]–[Line n]
Presence Feature
XML Application
Enable DNS SRV lookup
Server Address
Port
User ID
Enable Phonebook
Phonebook Type
Group
GroupCommon
Enterprise
(For KX-HDV330/
KX-HDV430)
Enable UC
Server Address
User ID
Enable XMLAPP
User ID
Local XML Port
Bootup URL
Making Call URL
U
Access
A
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
page 88 page 88 page 88 page 88
page 90 page 90 page 90 page 90 page 90 page 90
Ref.
page 85 page 85 page 85 page 85
page 83 page 83 page 83 page 83
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 51
4.1 Web User Interface Setting List
Menu Item Section Title Setting
Idling URL
Soft Key A (Left)
U
Access
A
ü
ü
ü
Ref.
Shortcut Key Settings
(For KX-HDV130/
KX-HDV230)
*1
*2
*3
ACD Settings
Call Center
Settings
XML Phonebook
ACD Settings
Call Center Settings
Soft Key B (Center)
Soft Key C (Right)
User ID
Password
Line 1–n
Line 1–n
Enable Call Center
- User ID
- Password
Status Event
–
–
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
–
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
–
ü
ü
ü
ü
TWAMP
Settings
TWAMP
Control Port
ü
ü
ü
ü
The access levels are abbreviated as follows:
U: User; A: Administrator
A check mark indicates that the setting is available for that access level.
This setting can also be configured through other programming methods (phone user interface programming or configuration file programming).
This setting can also be configured through configuration file programming.
page 92 page 92 page 92 page 92 page 92
–
–
page 95 page 95 page 95 page 95
52 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
4.1 Web User Interface Setting List
System
Menu Item Section Title Setting
Language
Settings
User Password
Settings
Admin
Password
Settings
Time Adjust
Settings
Advanced
Settings
Selectable Language
Language Settings
User Password
Admin Password
Synchronization
(Synchronisation)
Time Zone
Daylight Saving Time
(Summer Time)
Start Day and Time of
DST (Start Day and
Time of Summer Time)
End Day and Time of
DST (End Day and
Time of Summer Time)
Soft Key during IDLE
Status (For
KX-HDV130/
KX-HDV230)
IP Phone
Web Language
IP Phone
Web Language
Current Password
Confirm New Password
Current Password
Confirm New Password
Synchronization Interval
Enable DST (Enable Summer
Time)
DST Offset (Summer Time
Offset)
Month
Day of Week
Time
Month
Day of Week
Time
IP Phone
Soft Key C (Right)
Enable Admin Ability
Password for Unlocking
Missed Call Notification
－
ü
ü
ü
ü
－
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
Access
Level
U
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
A
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
Ref.
page 105 page 105 page 105 page 105
page 109 page 109 page 109 page 109
－
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 53
4.1 Web User Interface Setting List
Menu Item Section Title Setting
Voice Message Notification
- Message
Network Camera Notification
(For KX-HDV430)
- Message
File Name
Access
Level
U A
－
ü
－
ü
ü
ü
－ －
ü
ü
ü
ü
Ref.
－
－
Import Display
File (For
KX-HDV330/KX
-HDV430)
Wait Time (For
KX-HDV330/KX
-HDV430)
Communication
Camera (For
KX-HDV430)
Import Display File
Wait Time
ü
ü ü
Communication
Camera Settings [No.
1]–[No. 16]
Phone Number
Name
ü
ü
ü
*1
*2
*3
VoIP
The access levels are abbreviated as follows:
U: User; A: Administrator
A check mark indicates that the setting is available for that access level.
This setting can also be configured through other programming methods (phone user interface programming or configuration file programming).
This setting can also be configured through configuration file programming.
Menu Item
SIP Settings
SIP Settings
[Line 1]–[Line n]
Section Title
User Agent
NAT Identity
Basic
Setting
User Agent
Enable Rport (RFC 3581)
Enable Port Punching for
SIP
Enable Port Punching for
Phone Number
Access
Level
U A
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
Ref.
54 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
Menu Item
VoIP Settings
Document Version: 2017-07
RTP
Section Title
Advanced
4.1 Web User Interface Setting List
Setting
Registrar Server Port
Proxy Server Address
Presence Server Address
Outbound Proxy Server
Service Domain
Enable DNS SRV lookup
SRV lookup Prefix for UDP
SRV lookup Prefix for TLS
Local SIP Port
REGISTER Expires Timer
Enable Session Timer (RFC
Session Timer Method
Enable SSAF (SIP Source
Address Filter)
Enable c=0.0.0.0 Hold (RFC
Transport Protocol
RTP Packet Time
Minimum RTP Port Number
U
Access
A
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
Ref.
page 122 page 122 page 122 page 122
page 117 page 117 page 117 page 117 page 117 page 117
page 118 page 118 page 118 page 118 page 118 page 118
Administrator Guide 55
4.1 Web User Interface Setting List
Menu Item
VoIP Settings
[Line 1]–[Line n]
Basic
Section Title
Voice Quality Report
Advanced
Setting
Telephone-event Payload
Enable PUBLISH
Alert Report Trigger
Threshold MOS-LQ (Critical)
Threshold MOS-LQ
Threshold Delay (Critical)
G.722
- Enable
- Priority
PCMA
- Enable
- Priority
G.729A
- Enable
- Priority
PCMU
- Enable
- Priority
DTMF Type
RTP Packet QoS (DSCP)
Enable Mixed SRTP & RTP
Enable Mixed SRTP & RTP
U
Access
Level
A
ü
ü
–
–
-
–
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
–
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
-
ü
–
ü
–
ü
ü
ü
Ref.
page 125 page 125 page 125 page 125 page 125
–
–
-
–
page 129 page 129 page 129 page 129 page 129
*1
The access levels are abbreviated as follows:
56 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
4.1 Web User Interface Setting List
*2
U: User; A: Administrator
A check mark indicates that the setting is available for that access level.
This setting can also be configured through configuration file programming.
Telephone
Menu Item Section Title Setting
Call Control Call Control
Call Control [Line
Emergency Call Phone
Numbers
Call Rejection Phone
Numbers
Call Features
Send SUBSCRIBE to Voice
Mail Server
Conference Server URI
Timer for Dial Plan
Country Calling Code
National Access Code
Default Line for Outgoing
Enable Call Park Key
Park Retrieve Soft Key
Group Call Pickup
Barge in
Private Hold
Enable Block Anonymous
Call
Enable Call Forwarding
Always
Ref.
page 132 page 132 page 132 page 132 page 132
page 133 page 133 page 133 page 133 page 133
page 135 page 135 page 135 page 135 page 135
page 138 page 138 page 138 page 138
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
Access
U A
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 57
4.1 Web User Interface Setting List
Menu Item
Hotline Settings
Program Key
(For
KX-HDV130)
Section Title
Dial Plan
Hotline
Program Key
Setting
Forwarding Number
Enable Call Forwarding
Forwarding Number (Busy)
Enable Call Forwarding No
Answer
Forwarding Number (No
Answer)
Ring Counts (No Answer)
Enable Shared Call
Enable Key Synchronization
(Enable Key
Enable Call Park Notification
Enable Click to Call
Enable Executive Setting
(For KX-HDV330/
KX-HDV430)
(For KX-HDV330/
KX-HDV430)
MoH Server URI
Dial Plan (max 1000 columns)
Call Even If Dial Plan Does
Hotline Number
Hotline Delay
No. 1-2
Access
Level
U A
ü ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
–
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
–
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
page 141 page 141 page 141 page 141 page 141
–
Ref.
page 139 page 139 page 139 page 139 page 139 page 139
Parameter
ü
ü
ü
ü
58 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
Menu Item
Flexible Key
Settings (For
KX-HDV230/
KX-HDV330/
KX-HDV430)
Section Title
Flexible Key Settings No. 1–24
Setting
Tone Settings
Import
Phonebook
Export
Phonebook
Video Call
Settings (For
KX-HDV430)
Dial Tone
Busy Tone
Ringing Tone
Stutter Tone
Reorder Tone
Import Phonebook
Export Phonebook
Default Call Mode
Type
Label Name
Tone Frequencies
Tone Timings
Tone Frequencies
Tone Timings
Tone Frequencies
Tone Timings
Tone Frequencies
Tone Timings
Tone Frequencies
Tone Timings
File Name
–
Screen Mode
Send Image
Rate Settings
DSS 1-5 Key
DSS Console
(For
KX-HDV230/
KX-HDV330/
KX-HDV430)
Type
4.1 Web User Interface Setting List
Access
U A
— —
Ref.
—
ü ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
— —
ü
ü
page 154 page 154 page 154 page 154
—
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 59
4.1 Web User Interface Setting List
Menu Item Section Title Setting
Parameter
Label Name
ü
ü
Access
Level
U A
ü
ü
Ref.
*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
*6
The access levels are abbreviated as follows:
U: User; A: Administrator
A check mark indicates that the setting is available for that access level.
This setting can also be configured through configuration file programming.
This setting can also be configured through phone user interface programming.
This setting can also be configured through other programming methods (phone user interface programming or configuration file programming).
The number of lines available varies depending on the phone being used.
Each DSS console supports 40 keys. DSS console 1 uses keys 1-40, DSS console 2 uses keys 41-80, etc.
Maintenance
Menu Item Section Title Setting
Provisioning
Maintenance
Provisioning
Maintenance
Product File URL
Cyclic Auto Resync
Time Resync
Header Value for Resync
Firmware
Maintenance
Upgrade
Firmware (For
KX-HDV130/
KX-HDV230)
Firmware Maintenance Enable Firmware Update
Firmware File URL
Upgrade Firmware
Export Logging
File
Export Logging File
Reset to Defaults Reset to Carrier
Defaults
KX-HDV330/KX-HDV430)
Firmware File URL (For
KX-HDV130)
File Name (For KX-HDV230)
Logging File Type
The following settings will be reset to carrier default values when you click [Reset to
Carrier Defaults] .
Access
Level
U A
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
Ref.
page 158 page 158 page 158 page 158 page 158
60 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
4.2 Status
Menu Item Section Title Setting
U
Access
A
ü
Ref.
Restart Restart Click [Restart] to proceed.
Restarting will take a few moments.
*1
*2
The access levels are abbreviated as follows:
U: User; A: Administrator
A check mark indicates that the setting is available for that access level.
This setting can also be configured through configuration file programming.
4.2 Status
This section provides detailed descriptions about all the settings classified under the [Status] tab.
4.2.1 Version Information
This screen allows you to view the current version information such as the model number and the firmware version of the unit.
4.2.1.1 Version Information
Model
Description
Value Range
Indicates the model number of the unit (reference only).
Model number
Operating Bank (For KX-HDV230)
Description
Value Range
Indicates the storage area of the firmware that is currently operating
(reference only).
• Bank1
• Bank2
IPL Version
Description Indicates the version of the IPL (Initial Program Load) that runs when starting the unit and the SIP software version of the unit (reference only).
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 61
4.2.2 Network Status
Value Range IPL version ("nn.nnn" [n=0–9])
SIP software version ("[SIP: n.nn]" [n=0–9])
Firmware Version
Description
Value Range
Indicates the version of the firmware that is currently installed on the unit (reference only).
Firmware version ("nn.nnn" [n=0–9]) (For KX-HDV130/
KX-HDV330/KX-HDV430)
Bank1 (Bank2): Firmware version ("nn.nnn" [n=0–9]) (For
KX-HDV230)
4.2.2 Network Status
This screen allows you to view the current network information of the unit, such as the MAC address, IP address, Ethernet port status, etc.
Clicking [Refresh] updates the information displayed on the screen.
4.2.2.1 Network Common
MAC Address
Description
Value Range
Indicates the MAC address of the unit (reference only).
Not applicable.
Ethernet Link Status
Description Indicates when either the Ethernet LAN port or the Ethernet PC port is connected (reference only).
Connected Value Range
IP Address Mode
Description Indicates the current IP Address Mode.
62 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
Value Range
4.2.2.2 IPv4
Connection Mode
Description
Value Range
IP Address
Description
Value Range
Subnet Mask
Description
Value Range
Default Gateway
Description
Value Range
DNS1
Description
Value Range
4.2.2 Network Status
• IPv4
• IPv6
• IPv4&IPv6
Indicates whether the IP address of the unit is assigned automatically
(DHCP) or manually (static) (reference only).
• DHCP
• Static
Indicates the currently assigned IP address of the unit (reference only).
IP address
Indicates the specified subnet mask for the unit (reference only).
Subnet mask
Indicates the specified IP address of the default gateway for the network (reference only).
Note
• If the default gateway address is not specified, this field will be left blank.
IP address of the default gateway
Indicates the specified IP address of the primary DNS server
(reference only).
Note
• If the primary DNS server address is not specified, this field will be left blank.
IP address of the primary DNS server
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 63
4.2.2 Network Status
DNS2
Description
Value Range
4.2.2.3 IPv6
Connection Mode
Description
Value Range
IP Address
Description
Value Range
Prefix
Description
Value Range
Default Gateway
Description
Value Range
DNS1
Description
Value Range
64 Administrator Guide
Indicates the specified IP address of the secondary DNS server
(reference only).
Note
• If the secondary DNS server address is not specified, this field will be left blank.
IP address of the secondary DNS server
Indicates whether the IP address of the unit is assigned automatically
(DHCP) or manually (static) (reference only).
• DHCP
• Static
• Stateless Autoconfiguration
Indicates the currently assigned IP address of the unit (reference only).
IP address
Indicates the prefix for IPv6.
0–128
Indicates the specified IP address of the default gateway for the network (reference only).
Note
• If the default gateway address is not specified, this field will be left blank.
IP address of the default gateway
Indicates the specified IP address of the primary DNS server
(reference only).
Note
• If the primary DNS server address is not specified, this field will be left blank.
IP address of the primary DNS server
Document Version: 2017-07
4.2.3 VoIP Status
DNS2
Description Indicates the specified IP address of the secondary DNS server
(reference only).
Note
• If the secondary DNS server address is not specified, this field will be left blank.
IP address of the secondary DNS server Value Range
4.2.2.4 VLAN
Setting Mode
Description
Value Range
Indicates the specified VLAN feature (reference only).
• Disable
• LLDP
• CDP
• LLDP/CDP
• Manual
LAN Port VLAN ID
Description
Value Range
LAN Port VLAN Priority
Description
Value Range
PC Port VLAN ID
Description
Value Range
Indicates the VLAN ID (reference only) for the IP Phone.
0–4094
Indicates the priority number (reference only) for the IP Phone.
0–7
Indicates the VLAN ID (reference only) for the PC.
0–4094
PC Port VLAN Priority
Description
Value Range
Indicates the priority number (reference only) for the PC.
0–7
4.2.3 VoIP Status
This screen allows you to view the current VoIP status of each line’s unit.
Clicking [Refresh] updates the information displayed on the screen.
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 65
4.3 Network
4.2.3.1 VoIP Status
Description
Value Range
Indicates the line number to which a phone number is assigned
(reference only).
Line 1–Line n
*1 The number of lines available varies depending on the phone being used.
Phone Number
Description
Value Range
Indicates the currently assigned phone numbers (reference only).
Note
• The corresponding field is blank if a line has not yet been leased or if the unit has not been configured.
Max. 32 digits
VoIP Status
Description
Value Range
Indicates the current VoIP status of each line (reference only).
• Registered: The unit has been registered to the SIP server, and the line can be used.
• Registering: The unit is being registered to the SIP server, and the line cannot be used.
• Blank: The line has not been leased, the unit has not been configured yet, or a SIP authentication failure has occurred.
Note
• Immediately after starting up the unit, the phone numbers of the lines will be displayed, but the status of the line may not be displayed because the unit is still being registered to the SIP server. To display the status, wait about 30 to 60 seconds, and then click [Refresh] to obtain updated status information.
4.3 Network
This section provides detailed descriptions about all the settings classified under the [Network] tab.
66 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
4.3.1 Basic Network Settings
4.3.1 Basic Network Settings
This screen allows you to change basic network settings such as whether to use a DHCP server, and the IP address of the unit.
Note
• Changes to the settings on this screen are applied when the message "Complete" appears after clicking [Save] . Because the IP address of the unit will probably be changed if you change these settings, you will not be able to continue using the Web user interface. To continue configuring the unit from the Web user interface, log in to the Web user interface again after confirming the newly assigned IP address of the unit using the phone user interface. In addition, if the IP address of the PC from which you try to access the Web user interface has been changed, close the Web port once by selecting Off for Embedded Web
on the unit (→ see Opening/Closing the Web Port in
1.1.6.3 Before Accessing the Web User Interface
).
4.3.1.1 IP Addressing Mode
IP Addressing Mode
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Selects the IP addressing mode.
• IPv4
• IPv6
• IPv4&IPv6
IPv4
4.3.1.2 IPv4
Connection Mode
Description Selects the IP address setting mode for IPv4.
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 67
4.3.1 Basic Network Settings
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
DHCP Host Name
Description
• DHCP
• Static
DHCP
Value Range
Specifies the host name to option12 in DHCPv4 or option15 in
DHCPv6.
Note
• This setting is available only when [Connection Mode] is set to [DHCP] .
Max. 64 characters
Note
• If "{MODEL}" is included in this parameter, it will be replaced with the unit's model name.
{MODEL}
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
IP Address
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Subnet Mask
Description
Specifies the IP address for IPv4.
Note
• This setting is available only when [Connection Mode] is set to [Static] .
Max. 15 characters n.n.n.n [n=0–255]
Not stored.
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Specifies the subnet mask for IPv4.
Note
• This setting is available only when [Connection Mode] is set to [Static] .
Max. 15 characters n.n.n.n [n=0–255]
Not stored.
68 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
4.3.1 Basic Network Settings
Default Gateway
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Auto DNS via DHCP
Description
Value Range
Specifies the default gateway for IPv4.
Note
• This setting is available only when [Connection Mode] is set to [Static] .
Max. 15 characters n.n.n.n [n=0–255]
Not stored.
Selects whether to enable or disable the DNS server obtained by
DHCPv4.
Note
• This setting is available only when [Connection Mode] is set to [DHCP] .
• Yes: Use DNS obtained by DHCPv4
• No: Not use (use static DNS)
Yes
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
DNS1
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
DNS2
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
4.3.1.3 IPv6
Connection Mode
Description
Specifies the IP address of primary DNS server for IPv4.
Max. 15 characters n.n.n.n [n=0–255]
Not stored.
Specifies the IP address of secondary DNS server for IPv4.
Max. 15 characters n.n.n.n [n=0–255]
Not stored.
Selects the IP address setting mode for IPv6.
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 69
4.3.1 Basic Network Settings
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
IP Address
Description
• DHCP
• Static
• Stateless Autoconfiguration
DHCP
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Prefix
Description
Specifies the IP address for IPv6.
Note
• This setting is available only when [Connection Mode] is set to [Static] .
Max. 39 characters n:n:n:n:n:n:n:n [n=0-FFFF, abbreviation available]
Not stored.
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Default Gateway
Description
Specifies the prefix for IPv6.
Note
• This setting is available only when [Connection Mode] is set to [Static] .
0–128
64
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Specifies the default gateway for IPv6.
Note
• This setting is available only when [Connection Mode] is set to [Static] .
Max. 39 characters n:n:n:n:n:n:n:n [n=0-FFFF, abbreviation available]
Not stored.
70 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
4.3.2 Ethernet Port Settings
Auto DNS via DHCP
Description
Value Range
Selects whether to enable or disable the DNS server obtained by
DHCPv6.
Note
• This setting is available only when [Connection Mode] is set to [DHCP] .
• Yes: Use DNS obtained by DHCPv6
• No: Not use (use static DNS)
Yes
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
DNS1
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Specifies the IP address of primary DNS server for IPv6.
Max. 39 characters n:n:n:n:n:n:n:n [n=0-FFFF, abbreviation available]
Not stored.
DNS2
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Specifies the IP address of secondary DNS server for IPv6.
Max. 39 characters n:n:n:n:n:n:n:n [n=0-FFFF, abbreviation available]
Not stored.
4.3.2 Ethernet Port Settings
This screen allows you to change the connection mode of the Ethernet ports, LLDP and the VLAN settings.
Note
• When you change the settings on this screen and click [Save] , after the message "Complete" has been displayed, the unit will restart automatically with the new settings applied. If a unit is on a call when "Complete" has been displayed, the unit will restart after the unit returns to idle.
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 71
4.3.2 Ethernet Port Settings
4.3.2.1 Link Speed/Duplex Mode
LAN Port
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Selects the connection mode (link speed and duplex mode) of the
LAN port.
• Auto Negotiation
• 100Mbps/Full Duplex
• 100Mbps/Half Duplex
• 10Mbps/Full Duplex
• 10Mbps/Half Duplex
Auto Negotiation
PC Port
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Selects the connection mode (link speed and duplex mode) of the PC port.
• Auto Negotiation
• 100Mbps/Full Duplex
• 100Mbps/Half Duplex
• 10Mbps/Full Duplex
• 10Mbps/Half Duplex
Auto Negotiation
72 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
4.3.2 Ethernet Port Settings
4.3.2.2 LLDP
Enable LLDP
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Packet Interval
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
PC VLAN ID
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
PC Priority
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
4.3.2.3 CDP
Enable CDP
Description
Selects whether to enable or disable the LLDP-MED feature.
Note
• You should specify " Yes " for only one of " Enable LLDP ", or
" Enable VLAN ".
• If " Yes " is specified for two or more of the parameters above, the settings are prioritized as follows: " Enable VLAN " >
" Enable LLDP ". Therefore, if " Yes " is specified for both
" Enable VLAN " and " Enable LLDP ", the VLAN-related settings are used.
• Yes
• No
Yes
Specifies the interval, in seconds, between sending each LLDP frame.
1–3600
30
Specifies the VLAN ID for the PC when LLDP is on.
0–4094
0
Specifies the VLAN Priority for the PC when LLDP is on.
0–7
0
Selects whether to enable the CDP feature.
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 73
4.3.2 Ethernet Port Settings
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Packet Interval
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
4.3.2.4 VLAN
Enable VLAN
Description
• Yes
• No
No
Specifies the interval, in seconds, between sending CDP frames.
1-3600
30
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
IP Phone VLAN ID
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
IP Phone Priority
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Selects whether to use the VLAN feature to perform VoIP communication securely.
Note
• You should specify " Yes " for only one of " Enable LLDP ", or
" Enable VLAN ".
• If " Yes " is specified for two or more of the parameters above, the settings are prioritized as follows: " Enable VLAN " >
" Enable LLDP ". Therefore, if " Yes " is specified for both
" Enable VLAN " and " Enable LLDP ", the VLAN-related settings are used.
• Yes
• No
No
Specifies the VLAN ID for the IP Phone.
0–4094
2
Selects the priority for the IP Phone.
0–7
7
74 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
4.3.3 HTTP Client Settings
PC VLAN ID
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
PC Priority
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Specifies the VLAN ID for the PC.
0–4094
1
Selects the priority for the PC.
0–7
0
4.3.3 HTTP Client Settings
This screen allows you to change the HTTP client settings for the unit in order to access the HTTP server of your phone system and download configuration files.
4.3.3.1 HTTP Client
HTTP Version
Description Selects which version of the HTTP protocol to use for HTTP communication.
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 75
4.3.3 HTTP Client Settings
Value Range • HTTP/1.0
• HTTP/1.1
Note
• For this unit, it is strongly recommended that you select [HTTP/
1.0] . However, if the HTTP server does not function well with
HTTP/1.0, try changing the setting [HTTP/1.1] .
HTTP/1.0
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
HTTP User Agent
Description
Value Range
Specifies the text string to send as the user agent in the header of
HTTP requests.
Max. 64 characters
Note
• If "{mac}" is included in this parameter, it will be replaced with the unit’s MAC address in lower-case.
• If "{MAC}" is included in this parameter, it will be replaced with the unit’s MAC address in upper-case.
• If "{MODEL}" is included in this parameter, it will be replaced with the unit’s model name.
• If "{fwver}" is included in this parameter, it will be replaced with the firmware version of the unit.
Panasonic_{MODEL}/{fwver} ({mac})
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Authentication ID
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Authentication Password
Description
Specifies the ID for the User account. If set, this name must be entered to access the Web user interface at the User access level.
Max. 128 characters
Not stored.
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Specifies the password for the User account. If set, this password must be entered to access the Web user interface at the User access level.
Max. 128 characters
Not stored.
76 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
4.3.4 STUN Settings
4.3.3.2 Proxy Server
Enable Proxy
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Proxy Server Address
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Selects whether to enable or disable the HTTP proxy feature.
• Yes
• No
No
Specifies the IP address or FQDN of the proxy server.
Max. 256 characters
Not stored.
Proxy Server Port
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Specifies the port number of the proxy server.
1–65535
8080
4.3.4 STUN Settings
This screen allows you to change the STUN Settings.
4.3.4.1 STUN
STUN: Simple Traversal of UDP through NATs
Server Address
Description Specifies the host name or IP address of the STUN server for the
CPE to send Binding Requests.
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 77
4.3.5 Multicast Paging Settings
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Port
Description
Max. 256 characters
Not stored.
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Specifies the port number of the STUN server for the CPE to send
Binding Requests.
1–65535
3478
Binding Interval
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Specifies the interval of the sending binding request.
60–86400
300
4.3.5 Multicast Paging Settings
This screen allows you to change the Multicast Paging Settings for each channel Group.
78 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
4.3.5 Multicast Paging Settings
4.3.5.1 Multicast Paging
IPv4 Address (Group 1–5)
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Specifies the address for multi-cast paging for each channel group.
{Priority: Group 5 > Group 4 > Group 3, Group2, Group1 (depending on the configuration)}
224.0.0.0–239.255.255.255
Not stored.
IPv6 Address (Group 1–5)
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Port (Group 1–5)
Description
Specifies the IPv6 address for multi-cast paging for each channel group. {Priority: Group 5 > Group 4 > Group 3, Group2, Group1
(depending on the configuration)}
FF00::/8
Not stored.
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Priority (Group 1–3)
Description
Specifies the port number for multi-cast paging for each channel group.
0–65535
0: Disable
0
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Label (Group 1–5)
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Selects the priority of the low priority channel group.
The priority of multi-cast paging group1-3 is lower than the talking.
Priority 4 is higher than Priority 5.
4, 5
5
Specifies a label for each channel group.
Max. 24 characters
Not stored.
Enable Transmission (Group 1–5)
Description Selects the sending multi-cast paging.
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 79
4.3.6 LDAP Settings
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
• Yes
• No
No
4.3.6 LDAP Settings
This screen allows you to change the LDAP Settings.
4.3.6.1 LDAP
Enable LDAP
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Server Address
Description
Selects whether to enable or disable the LDAP service.
• Yes
• No
No
Specifies the server host of LDAP.
80 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
4.3.6 LDAP Settings
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Port
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
User ID
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Password
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Max Hits
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Name Filter
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Max. 256 characters
Note
• The LDAP server address should start with "ldap://" or
"ldaps://".
Not stored.
Specifies the port of server.
1–65535
389
Specifies the authentication ID required to access the LDAP server.
Max. 128 characters
Not stored.
Specifies the authentication password required to access the LDAP server.
Max. 128 characters
Not stored.
Specifies the maximum number of search results to be returned by the LDAP server.
20–500
20
Specifies the name filter which is the search criteria for name look up.
Max. 256 characters
(|(cn=%)(sn=%))
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 81
4.3.7 Xtended Service Settings
Number Filter
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Name Attributes
Description
Specifies the number filter which is the search criteria for number look up.
Max. 256 characters
(|(telephoneNumber=%)(mobile =%)(homePhone =%))
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Number Attributes
Description
Specifies the name attributes of each record which are to be returned in the LDAP search result.
Max. 256 characters cn,sn
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Specifies the number attributes of each record which are to be returned in the LDAP search result.
Max. 256 characters telephoneNumber,mobile,homePhone
Distinguished Name(Base DN)
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Specifies the entry information on the screen.
Max. 256 characters
Not stored.
Configuration File Reference
Enable DNS SRV lookup
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Selects whether to request the DNS server to translate domain names into IP addresses using the SRV record.
• Yes
• No
No
4.3.7 Xtended Service Settings
This screen allows you to change the Xtended Service Settings.
82 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
4.3.7 Xtended Service Settings
4.3.7.1 Xtended Service
Enable Xtended Service
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Selects whether to enable or disable the Xsi service.
• Yes
• No
No
Server Address
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Port
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Protocol
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Specifies the IP address or FQDN of the Xsi server.
Max. 256 characters
Not stored.
Specifies the port of the Xsi server.
1–65535
80
Selects the type of the Xsi server.
HTTP, HTTPS
HTTP
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 83
4.3.7 Xtended Service Settings
SIP Credentials
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Selects whether to enable or disable the XSI SIP Credentials feature.
• Yes
• No
No
4.3.7.2 Xtended Service Settings [Line 1]–[Line n]
Note
Line n: The number of lines available varies depending on the phone being used.
Note
This menu appears for KX-HDV330/KX-HDV430.
For KX-HDV130/KX-HDV230, this Line 1 - Line n setting dialog appears on previous Xtended Service
Settings menu.
User ID
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Specifies the authentication ID required to access the Xsi server.
Max. 128 characters
Not stored.
Password
Description Specifies the authentication password required to access the Xsi server.
84 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
4.3.7 Xtended Service Settings
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Enable Phonebook
Description
Value Range
Max. 128 characters
Not stored.
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Phonebook Type
Description
Value Range
Selects whether to enable or disable the Xsi phonebook service.
• Yes
• No
No
Selects the type of Xsi phonebook.
• Group
• GroupCommon
• Enterprise
• EnterpriseCommon
• Personal
Group
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Group
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
GroupCommon
Description
Specifies whether to enable or disable the "Group" type for Xsi phonebooks.
• Yes
• No
Note
• This setting is available only when
"BSD_MULTI_TYPE_ENABLE" is set to "Y".
No
Specifies whether to enable or disable the "GroupCommon" type for
Xsi phonebooks.
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 85
4.3.7 Xtended Service Settings
Value Range • Yes
• No
Note
• This setting is available only when
"BSD_MULTI_TYPE_ENABLE" is set to "Y".
No
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Enterprise
Description
Value Range
Specifies whether to enable or disable the "Enterprise" type for Xsi phonebooks.
• Yes
• No
Note
• This setting is available only when
"BSD_MULTI_TYPE_ENABLE" is set to "Y".
No
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
EnterpriseCommon
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Personal
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Specifies whether to enable or disable the "EnterpriseCommon" type for Xsi phonebooks.
• Yes
• No
Note
• This setting is available only when
"BSD_MULTI_TYPE_ENABLE" is set to "Y".
No
Specifies whether to enable or disable the "Personal" type for Xsi phonebooks.
• Yes
• No
Note
• This setting is available only when
"BSD_MULTI_TYPE_ENABLE" is set to "Y".
No
86 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
4.3.8 UC Settings
Configuration File Reference
Enable Call Log
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Selects whether to enable or disable the Xsi call log service.
• Yes
• No
No
Enable Visual Voice Mail (For KX-HDV330/KX-HDV430)
Description
Value Range
Selects whether to enable or disable the Visual Voice Mail feature of the selected line.
• Yes
• No
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
No
XSI_VISUAL_VM_ENABLE_n (For KX-HDV330/KX-HDV430)
4.3.8 UC Settings
This screen allows you to change the UC Settings.
4.3.8.1 Presence Feature
Enable UC
Description Selects whether to enable the UC service.
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 87
4.3.9 XML Application Settings
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Server Address
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Local XMPP Port
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
User ID
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Password
Description
• Yes
• No
No
Specifies the IP address or FQDN of the XMPP server.
Max. 256 characters
Not stored.
Specifies the local XMPP port.
1–65535
5222
Specifies the authentication ID required to access the UC server.
Max. 128 characters
Not stored.
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Specifies the authentication password required to access the UC server.
Max. 128 characters
Not stored.
4.3.9 XML Application Settings
This screen allows you to configure the various URLs used with the XML application feature.
88 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
4.3.9 XML Application Settings
4.3.9.1 XML Application
Enable XMLAPP
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Selects whether to enable or disable the XML application feature.
• Yes
• No
No
User ID
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Specifies the authentication ID required to access the XML application server.
Max. 128 characters
Not stored.
Password
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Specifies the authentication password used to access the XML application server.
Max. 128 characters
Not stored.
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 89
4.3.9 XML Application Settings
Local XML Port
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Bootup URL
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Initial URL
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Incoming Call URL
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Talking URL
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Making Call URL
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Specifies the local HTTP port for XML application.
1–65535
6666
Specifies the URL that is accessed when the unit starts up, to check for XML data.
Max. 256 characters
Not stored.
Specifies the URL that is accessed when the application is started from the unit’s menu, to check for XML data.
Max. 256 characters
Not stored.
Specifies the URL that is accessed when the unit receives a call, to check for XML data.
Max. 256 characters
Not stored.
Specifies the URL that is accessed when the unit is on a call, to check for XML data.
Max. 256 characters
Not stored.
Specifies the URL that is accessed when the unit makes a call, to check for XML data.
Max. 256 characters
Not stored.
90 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
4.3.9 XML Application Settings
Call Log URL
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Idling URL
Description
Specifies the URL that is accessed when the call log is accessed, to check for XML data.
Max. 256 characters
Not stored.
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Enable FF Key
Description
Specifies the URL that is accessed when the unit is idle, to check for
XML data.
Max. 256 characters
Not stored.
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Specifies whether to enable the XML application or operate the telephone normally, when the corresponding button is pressed.
• Yes
• No
No
4.3.9.2 Shortcut Key Settings (For KX-HDV130/KX-HDV230)
Soft Key A (Left)
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Specifies whether to enable the XML application or operate the telephone normally, when the corresponding button is pressed during standby mode.
• Yes
• No
No
XML_INITIATE_KEY_SOFT1 (For KX-HDV130/KX-HDV230)
Soft Key B (Center)
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Specifies whether to enable the XML application or operate the telephone normally, when the corresponding button is pressed during standby mode.
• Yes
• No
No
XML_INITIATE_KEY_SOFT2 (For KX-HDV130/KX-HDV230)
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 91
4.3.9 XML Application Settings
Soft Key C (Right)
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Specifies whether to enable the XML application or operate the telephone normally, when the corresponding button is pressed during standby mode.
• Yes
• No
No
XML_INITIATE_KEY_SOFT3 (For KX-HDV130/KX-HDV230)
4.3.9.3 XML Phonebook
LDAP URL
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Specifies the URL that is accessed when the phonebook is accessed, to check for XML data.
Max. 256 characters
Not stored.
User ID
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Password
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Max Hits
Description
Specifies the authentication ID required to access the LDAP server.
Max. 128 characters
Not stored.
Specifies the authentication password used to access the LDAP server.
Max. 128 characters
Not stored.
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Specifies the maximum number of search results to be returned by the LDAP server.
20–500
20
92 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
4.3.10 ACD Settings [Line 1]–[Line n]
4.3.10 ACD Settings [Line 1]–[Line n]
Note
Line n: The number of lines available varies depending on the phone being used.
Enable ACD
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Selects whether to enable the ACD.
• Yes
• No
No
4.3.11 Call Center Settings [Line 1]–[Line n]
Note
Line n: The number of lines available varies depending on the phone being used.
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 93
4.3.11 Call Center Settings [Line 1]–[Line n]
Enable Call Center
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Disposition Code
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Customer Originated Trace
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Selects whether to add menu items for Call Center.
• Yes
• No
No
Selects whether to enable the Disposition Code.
• Yes
• No
No
Selects whether to enable the Customer Originated Trace.
• Yes
• No
No
CC_CUSTOMER_ORG_TRACE_ENABLE_n
94 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
4.3.11 Call Center Settings [Line 1]–[Line n]
Hoteling Event
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
- User ID
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
- Password
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Status Event
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Selects whether to enable the Hoteling Event.
• Yes
• No
No
Specifies the authentication ID required to access the Hoteling service.
Max. 32 characters
Not stored.
Specifies the authentication password required to access the Hoteling service.
Max. 128 characters
Not stored.
Selects whether to enable the Status Event.
• Yes
• No
No
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 95
4.3.12 TWAMP Settings
4.3.12 TWAMP Settings
Enable TWAMP
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Control Port
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Test Port
Description
Selects whether to enable the TWAMP server function.
• Yes
• No
No
Specifies the port for the TWAMP control session.
1-65535
862
Specifies the port for the TWAMP test session.
96 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
4.4 System
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Wait Time for Control
Description
1-65535
9000
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Specifies the time, in seconds, for the TWAMP server to wait for incoming packets for maintaining the session.
1-65535
900
Wait Time for Reflector
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Specifies the time, in seconds, for the TWAMP reflector to wait for incoming packets for maintaining the session.
1-65535
900
4.4 System
This section provides detailed descriptions about all the settings classified under the [System] tab.
4.4.1 Language Settings
This screen allows you to select the language used for the Web user interface. The language setting is only applicable when you log in to the Web user interface as User.
Note
• If you change the language while logged in to the Web user interface with the User account, the language will be changed after the message "Complete" is displayed. If you are logged in with the
Administrator account, the language will be changed when a user logs in to the Web user interface as
User.
• The language used for the Web user interface for the Administrator account is always English.
• The language used for the unit remains unchanged even if the language for the Web user interface is changed.
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 97
4.4.1 Language Settings
4.4.1.1 Selectable Language
IP Phone
Description Specifies the selectable language on the unit.
Up to 10 languages separated by commas can be registered. (e.g.,
"en,es,fr,de,it,nl,pt")
98 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
4.4.1 Language Settings
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Web Language
Description
• en: English
• es: Spanish
• fr: French
• de: German
• it: Italian
• da: Danish
• nl: Dutch
• sv: Swedish
• fi: Finnish
• el: Greek
• hu: Hungarian
• pt: Portuguese
• pl: Polish
• sk: Slovakian
• cs: Czech
• sh: Croatian
• ru: Russian
• uk: Ukrainian
• tr: Turkish
• no: Norwegian
• ro: Romanian
• ct: Custom
• kk: Kazakh
• me: Montenegrin
Depends on the country or area.
Specifies the selectable language on the Web.
Up to 10 languages separated by commas can be registered. (e.g.,
"en,es,fr,de,it,nl,pt")
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 99
4.4.1 Language Settings
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
• en: English
• es: Spanish
• fr: French
• de: German
• it: Italian
• nl: Dutch
• el: Greek
• hu: Hungarian
• pt: Portuguese
• pl: Polish
• sk: Slovakian
• cs: Czech
• sh: Croatian
• ru: Russian
• uk: Ukrainian
• tr: Turkish
• ro: Romanian
• ct: Custom
• kk: Kazakh
• me: Montenegrin
Depends on the country or area.
4.4.1.2 Language Settings
IP Phone
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Selects the default language on the unit.
You can select a language from the languages set in IP Phone in
.
en, es, fr, de, it, da, nl, sv, fi, el, hu, pt, pl, sk, cs, sh, ru, uk, tr, no, ro,
ct, kk, me → see IP Phone in 4.4.1.1 Selectable Language
en
Web Language
Description
Value Range
Selects the default language on the web.
You can select a language from the languages set in Web Language
in 4.4.1.1 Selectable Language
.
en, es, fr, de, it, nl, el, hu, pt, pl, sk, cs, sh, ru, uk, tr, ro, ct, kk, me → see
100 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
4.4.2 User Password Settings
Default Value
Configuration File Reference en
4.4.2 User Password Settings
This screen allows you to change the password used to authenticate the User account when logging in to the Web user interface.
Note
• For security reasons, the characters entered for the password are masked by special characters, which differ depending on the Web browser.
• After you change the user password, the next time you access the Web user interface, the authentication dialog box appears. Three consecutive login failures will result in an error
("401Unauthorized"). This restriction only applies the first time you attempt to log in after changing the password. In all other circumstances, an error occurs after 3 unsuccessful login attempts.
4.4.2.1 User Password
Current Password
Description
Value Range
Default Value
New Password
Description
Specifies the current password to use to authenticate the User account when logging in to the Web user interface.
6–64 characters (except !, ", #, $, %, &, ', (, ), @, *, +, ,, /, :, ;, <, =,
>, ?, [, ], ^, `, {, |, }, ~, \ and space)
Not stored.
Specifies the new password to use to authenticate the User account when logging in to the Web user interface.
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 101
4.4.3 Admin Password Settings
Value Range
Default Value
6–64 characters (except !, ", #, $, %, &, ', (, ), @, *, +, ,, /, :, ;, <, =,
>, ?, [, ], ^, `, {, |, }, ~, \ and space)
Note
• A hyphen (-) cannot be used as the first character.
Not stored.
Note
• When a user logs in to the Web user interface for the first time, after clicking OK on the authentication dialog box, the [Initial
User Password Settings] screen is displayed automatically to make the user set a password.
Configuration File Reference
Confirm New Password
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Specifies the same password that you entered in [New Password] for confirmation.
6–64 characters (except !, ", #, $, %, &, ', (, ), @, *, +, ,, /, :, ;, <, =,
>, ?, [, ], ^, `, {, |, }, ~, \ and space)
Not stored.
4.4.3 Admin Password Settings
This screen allows you to change the password used to authenticate the Administrator account when logging in to the Web user interface.
Note
• For security reasons, the characters entered for the password are masked by special characters, which differ depending on the Web browser.
• After you change the administrator password, the next time you access the Web user interface, the authentication dialog box appears. Three consecutive login failures will result in an error
("401Unauthorized"). This restriction only applies the first time you attempt to log in after changing the password. In all other circumstances, an error occurs after 3 unsuccessful login attempts.
102 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
4.4.4 Time Adjust Settings
4.4.3.1 Admin Password
Current Password
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Specifies the current password to use to authenticate the
Administrator account when logging in to the Web user interface.
6–64 characters (except !, ", #, $, %, &, ', (, ), @, *, +, ,, /, :, ;, <, =,
>, ?, [, ], ^, `, {, |, }, ~, \ and space) adminpass
New Password
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Specifies the new password to use to authenticate the Administrator account when logging in to the Web user interface.
6–64 characters (except !, ", #, $, %, &, ', (, ), @, *, +, ,, /, :, ;, <, =,
>, ?, [, ], ^, `, {, |, }, ~, \ and space)
Note
• A hyphen (-) cannot be used as the first character.
Not stored.
Confirm New Password
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Specifies the same password that you entered in [New Password] for confirmation.
6–64 characters (except !, ", #, $, %, &, ', (, ), @, *, +, ,, /, :, ;, <, =,
>, ?, [, ], ^, `, {, |, }, ~, \ and space)
Not stored.
4.4.4 Time Adjust Settings
This screen allows you to enable automatic clock adjustment using an NTP server and configure the settings for DST (Daylight Saving Time), also known as Summer Time.
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 103
4.4.4 Time Adjust Settings
4.4.4.1 Synchronization (Synchronisation)
Server Address
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Specifies the IP address or FQDN of NTP server.
Max. 256 characters
Not stored.
Synchronization Interval (Synchronisation Interval)
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Specifies the interval, in seconds, between synchronizations with the
NTP server.
10–86400
43200
4.4.4.2 Time Zone
Time Zone
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Selects your time zone.
GMT -12:00–GMT +13:00
GMT
104 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
4.4.4 Time Adjust Settings
4.4.4.3 Daylight Saving Time (Summer Time)
Enable DST (Enable Summer Time)
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Selects whether to enable Daylight Saving Time (Summer Time).
• Yes
• No
No
DST Offset (Summer Time Offset)
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Specifies the amount of time, in minutes, to change the time when
"DST_ENABLE" is set to "Y".
0–720 (min)
60
4.4.4.4 Start Day and Time of DST (Start Day and Time of Summer
Time)
Month
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Selects the month in which DST (Summer Time) starts.
• January
• February
• March
• April
• May
• June
• July
• August
• September
• October
• November
• December
March
Day of Week
Using the 2 following settings, specify on which day of the selected month DST (Summer Time) starts. For example, to specify the second Sunday, select [Second] and [Sunday] .
Description Selects the number of the week on which DST (Summer Time) starts.
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 105
4.4.4 Time Adjust Settings
Value Range • First
• Second
• Third
• Fourth
• Last
Second
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Description
Value Range
Selects the day of the week on which DST (Summer Time) starts.
• Sunday
• Monday
• Tuesday
• Wednesday
• Thursday
• Friday
• Saturday
Sunday
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Time
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Specifies the start time of DST (Summer Time) in minutes after 12:00
AM.
0–1439 (min)
120
4.4.4.5 End Day and Time of DST (End Day and Time of Summer
Time)
Month
Description Selects the month in which DST (Summer Time) ends.
106 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
4.4.4 Time Adjust Settings
Value Range • January
• February
• March
• April
• May
• June
• July
• August
• September
• October
• November
• December
November
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Day of Week
Using the 2 following settings, specify on which day of the selected month DST (Summer Time) ends. For example, to specify the second Sunday, select [Second] and [Sunday] .
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Selects the number of the week on which DST (Summer Time) ends.
• First
• Second
• Third
• Fourth
• Last
First
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Selects the day of the week on which DST (Summer Time) ends.
• Sunday
• Monday
• Tuesday
• Wednesday
• Thursday
• Friday
• Saturday
Sunday
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 107
4.4.5 Advanced Settings
Time
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Specifies the end time of DST (Summer Time) in minutes after 12:00
AM.
0–1439 (min)
120
4.4.5 Advanced Settings
This screen allows you to change the Soft Key function settings.
4.4.5.1 Soft Key during IDLE Status (For KX-HDV130/KX-HDV230)
Soft Key A (Left)
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Selects soft key (A) during IDLE state.
• Phonebook
• Menu
• Outgoing Call Log
• Incoming Call Log
• Redial
• Page (Used when performing Multicast Paging)
Phonebook
IDLE_SOFT_KEY_A (For KX-HDV130/KX-HDV230)
108 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
4.4.5 Advanced Settings
Soft Key B (Center)
Description
Value Range
Selects soft key (B) during IDLE state.
• Phonebook
• Menu
• Outgoing Call Log
• Incoming Call Log
• Redial
• Page (Used when performing Multicast Paging)
Menu
IDLE_SOFT_KEY_B (For KX-HDV130/KX-HDV230)
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Soft Key C (Right)
Description
Value Range
Selects soft key (C) during IDLE state.
• Phonebook
• Menu
• Outgoing Call Log
• Incoming Call Log
• Redial
• Page (Used when performing Multicast Paging)
Outgoing Call Log
IDLE_SOFT_KEY_C (For KX-HDV130/KX-HDV230)
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
4.4.5.2 IP Phone
Enable Admin Ability
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Enable IP Phone Lock
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Selects whether to enable admin rights for the unit.
• Yes
• No
Yes
Selects whether to enable locking the unit.
• Yes
• No
No
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 109
4.4.5 Advanced Settings
Password for Unlocking
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Specifies the password for unlocking the unit.
Null, 4 digits (0–9)
Not stored.
Missed Call Notification - Message
Description Selects whether to display 'Missed Calls' on the screen in standby mode.
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Note
• This setting is available only when
"NOTIFICATION_MENU_ENABLE" is set to "Y".
• Yes
• No
Yes
Missed Call Notification - LED
Description Selects whether the LED is used to indicate a missed call.
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Note
• This setting is available only when
"NOTIFICATION_MENU_ENABLE" is set to "Y".
• Yes
• No
Yes
Voice Message Notification - Message
Description Selects whether to display 'Voice MSG' on the screen in standby mode.
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Note
• This setting is available only when
"NOTIFICATION_MENU_ENABLE" is set to "Y".
• Yes
• No
Yes
110 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
4.4.5 Advanced Settings
Voice Message Notification - LED
Description Selects whether the LED is used to indicate a new voice message.
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Note
• This setting is available only when
"NOTIFICATION_MENU_ENABLE" is set to "Y".
• Yes
• No
Yes
Voice Message Notification - Alarm
Description Selects whether an alarm sound is used to indicate a new voice message.
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Note
• This setting is available only when
"NOTIFICATION_MENU_ENABLE" is set to "Y".
• Yes
• No
Yes
Network Camera Notification - Message (For KX-HDV430 ）
Description Selects whether to display the Network Camera message icon on the screen.
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Note
• This setting is available only when
"NOTIFICATION_MENU_ENABLE" is set to "Y".
• Yes
• No
Yes
NOTIFY_NETWORKCAMERA_ENABLE (For KX-HDV430)
Network Camera Notification - LED (For KX-HDV430 ）
Description Selects whether the LED is used to indicate a Network Camera alert.
Value Range
Note
• This setting is available only when
"NOTIFICATION_MENU_ENABLE" is set to "Y".
• Yes
• No
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 111
4.4.6 Import Display File (For KX-HDV330/KX-HDV430)
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Yes
NOTIFY_NETWORKCAMERA_LED_ENABLE (For KX-HDV430)
Network Camera Notification - Alarm (For KX-HDV430 ）
Description Selects whether an alarm sound is used to indicate a Network
Camera alert.
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Note
• This setting is available only when
"NOTIFICATION_MENU_ENABLE" is set to "Y".
• Yes
• No
Yes
NOTIFY_NETWORKCAMERA_ALARM_ENABLE (For KX-HDV430)
4.4.6 Import Display File (For KX-HDV330/KX-HDV430)
This screen allows you to specify the file of the screen saver to import.
4.4.6.1 Import Display File
File name
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Specifies the file of the screen saver to import.
Max. 384 characters
Not stored.
4.4.7 Wait Time (For KX-HDV330/KX-HDV430)
This screen allows you to specify the time to wait for the screen saver to display.
112 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
4.4.8 Communication Camera (For KX-HDV430)
4.4.7.1 Wait Time
Wait Time
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Specifies the time, in seconds, to wait for the screen saver to display.
0, 10, 30, 60, 180, 300 (sec) [0:off]
0
4.4.8 Communication Camera (For KX-HDV430)
This screen allows you to change the Communication Camera settings.
4.4.8.1 Communication Camera Settings [No. 1]–[No. 16]
Phone Number
Description
Value Range
Specifies the phone number of each Communication Camera.
Max. 32 characters (except &, ", ', :, ;, <, >)
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 113
4.5 VoIP
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Name
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Ringtone [ 1 - 32 ]
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Not stored.
Specifies the name of each Communication Camera.
Max. 24 characters
Not stored.
Specifies the ringtone of each Communication Camera.
1–32 (10: doorbell)
10
4.5 VoIP
This section provides detailed descriptions about all the settings classified under the [VoIP] tab.
4.5.1 SIP Settings
This screen allows you to change the SIP settings that are common to all lines.
4.5.1.1 User Agent
User Agent
Description Specifies the text string to send as the user agent in the headers of
SIP messages.
114 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
4.5.1 SIP Settings
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Max. 64 characters
Note
• If "{mac}" is included in this field, it will be replaced with the unit’s MAC address in lower-case.
• If "{MAC}" is included in this field, it will be replaced with the unit’s MAC address in upper-case.
• If "{MODEL}" is included in this field, it will be replaced with the unit’s model name.
• If "{fwver}" is included in this field, it will be replaced with the firmware version of the unit.
• If "{sipver}" is included in this parameter, it will be replaced with the SIP software version of the unit.
Panasonic-{MODEL}/{fwver} ({mac})
4.5.1.2 NAT Identity
Enable Rport (RFC 3581)
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Selects whether to add the 'rport' parameter to the top Via header field value of requests generated.
• Yes
• No
No
Enable Port Punching for SIP
Description
Value Range
Specifies the interval, in seconds, between transmissions of the Keep
Alive packet in order to maintain the NAT binding information for SIP packet.
0, 10–300
0: Disable
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
0
Enable Port Punching for RTP
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Specifies the interval, in seconds, between transmissions of the Keep
Alive packet in order to maintain the NAT binding information for RTP packet.
0, 10–300
0: Disable
0
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 115
4.5.2 SIP Settings [Line 1]–[Line n]
4.5.2 SIP Settings [Line 1]–[Line n]
Note
Line n: The number of lines available varies depending on the phone being used.
This screen allows you to change the SIP settings that are specific to each line.
4.5.2.1 Basic
Phone Number
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Registrar Server Address
Description
Value Range
Specifies the phone number to use as the user ID required for registration to the SIP registrar server.
Note
• When registering using a user ID that is not a phone number, you should use the [SIP URI] setting.
Max. 32 characters
Not stored.
Specifies the IP address or FQDN of the SIP registrar server.
Max. 256 characters
116 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
4.5.2 SIP Settings [Line 1]–[Line n]
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Registrar Server Port
Description
Not stored.
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Proxy Server Address
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Proxy Server Port
Description
Specifies the port number to use for communication with the SIP registrar server.
1–65535
5060
Specifies the IP address or FQDN of the SIP proxy server.
Max. 256 characters
Not stored.
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Specifies the port number to use for communication with the SIP proxy server.
1–65535
5060
Presence Server Address
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Presence Server Port
Description
Specifies the IP address or FQDN of the SIP presence server.
Max. 256 characters
Not stored.
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Specifies the port number to use for communication with the SIP presence server.
1–65535
5060
Outbound Proxy Server Address
Description
Value Range
Specifies the IP address or FQDN of the SIP outbound proxy server.
Max. 256 characters
Default Value Not stored.
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 117
4.5.2 SIP Settings [Line 1]–[Line n]
Configuration File Reference
Outbound Proxy Server Port
Description
Value Range
Specifies the port number to use for communication with the SIP outbound proxy server.
1–65535
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
5060
Service Domain
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Specifies the domain name provided by your phone system dealer/ service provider. The domain name is the part of the SIP URI that comes after the "@" symbol.
Max. 256 characters
Not stored.
Authentication ID
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Authentication Password
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Specifies the authentication ID required to access the SIP server.
Max. 128 characters
Not stored.
Specifies the authentication password used to access the SIP server.
Max. 128 characters
Not stored.
4.5.2.2 Advanced
SIP Packet QoS (DSCP)
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Enable DNS SRV lookup
Description
Specifies the DSCP (Differentiated Services Code Point) level of
DiffServ applied to SIP packets.
0–63
0
Selects whether to request the DNS server to translate domain names into IP addresses using the SRV record.
118 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
4.5.2 SIP Settings [Line 1]–[Line n]
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
SRV lookup Prefix for UDP
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
SRV lookup Prefix for TCP
Description
• Yes
• No
Note
• If you select [Yes] , the unit will perform a DNS SRV lookup for a SIP registrar server, SIP proxy server, SIP outbound proxy server, or SIP presence server. If you select [No] , the unit will not perform a DNS SRV lookup for a SIP registrar server, SIP proxy server, SIP outbound proxy server, or SIP presence server.
Yes
Specifies a prefix to add to the domain name when performing a DNS
SRV lookup using UDP.
Note
• This setting is available only when [Enable DNS SRV lookup] is set to [Yes] .
Max. 32 characters
_sip._udp.
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
SRV lookup Prefix for TLS
Description
Specifies a prefix to add to the domain name when performing a DNS
SRV lookup using TCP.
Note
• This setting is available only when [Enable DNS SRV lookup] is set to [Yes] .
Max. 32 characters
_sip._tcp.
Value Range
Default Value
Specifies a prefix to add to the domain name when performing a DNS
SRV lookup using TLS.
Note
• This setting is available only when [Enable DNS SRV lookup] is set to [Yes] .
Max. 32 characters
_sips._tls.
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 119
4.5.2 SIP Settings [Line 1]–[Line n]
Configuration File Reference
Local SIP Port
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
SIP URI
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
T1 Timer
Description
Specifies the source port number used by the unit for SIP communication.
1024–49151
5060 (for Line 1)
5070 (for Line 2)
5080 (for Line 3)
5090 (for Line 4)
5100 (for Line 5)
5110 (for Line 6)
5120 (for Line 7)
5130 (for Line 8)
5140 (for Line 9)
5150 (for Line 10)
5160 (for Line 11)
5170 (for Line 12)
5180 (for Line 13)
5190 (for Line 14)
5200 (for Line 15)
5210 (for Line 16)
Note
KX-HDV130 Line 1-2
KX-HDV230 Line 1-6
KX-HDV330 Line 1-12
KX-HDV430 Line 1-16
Specifies the unique ID used by the SIP registrar server, which consists of "sip:", a user part, the "@" symbol, and a host part, for example, "sip:[email protected]", "2405551111_1".
Note
• When registering using a user ID that is not a phone number, you should use this setting.
• In a SIP URI, the user part ("user" in the example above) can contain up to 63 characters, and the host part ("example.com" in the example above) can contain up to 316 characters.
Max. 384 characters
Not stored.
Specifies the default interval, in milliseconds, between transmissions of SIP messages.
120 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
4.5.2 SIP Settings [Line 1]–[Line n]
Value Range • 250
• 500
• 1000
• 2000
• 4000
500
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
T2 Timer
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Specifies the maximum interval, in seconds, between transmissions of SIP messages.
• 2
• 4
• 8
• 16
• 32
4
REGISTER Expires Timer
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Specifies the length of time, in seconds, that the registration remains valid. This value is set in the "Expires" header of the REGISTER request.
1–4294967295
3600
Enable Session Timer (RFC 4028)
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Specifies the length of time, in seconds, that the unit waits before terminating SIP sessions when no reply to repeated requests is received.
0, 60–65535
0
Session Timer Method
Description
Value Range
Selects the refreshing method of SIP sessions.
• INVITE
• UPDATE
• INVITE/UPDATE
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 121
4.5.2 SIP Settings [Line 1]–[Line n]
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
INVITE
Enable 100rel (RFC 3262)
Description
Value Range
Specifies whether to add the option tag 100rel to the "Supported" header of the INVITE message.
• Yes
• No
Note
• If you select [Yes] , the Reliability of Provisional Responses function will be enabled. The option tag 100rel will be added to the "Supported" header of the INVITE message and to the
"Require" header of the "1xx" provisional message. If you select [No] , the option tag 100rel will not be used.
Yes
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Enable SSAF (SIP Source Address Filter)
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Selects whether to enable SSAF for the SIP servers (registrar server, proxy server, and presence server).
• Yes
• No
No
Enable c=0.0.0.0 Hold (RFC 2543)
Description
Value Range
Selects whether to enable the RFC 2543 Call Hold feature on this line.
• Yes
• No
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Note
• If you select [Yes] , the "c=0.0.0.0" syntax will be set in SDP when sending a re-INVITE message to hold the call. If you select [No] , the "c=x.x.x.x" syntax will be set in SDP.
Yes
Transport Protocol
Description Selects which transport layer protocol to use for sending SIP packets.
122 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
TLS Mode
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
• UDP
• TCP
• TLS
UDP
Select the secure SIP protocol.
• SIPS
• SIP-TLS
SIPS
4.5.3 VoIP Settings
This screen allows you to change the VoIP settings that are common to all lines.
4.5.3 VoIP Settings
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 123
4.5.3 VoIP Settings
4.5.3.1 RTP
RTP Packet Time
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Selects the interval, in milliseconds, between transmissions of RTP packets.
• 20
• 30
• 40
• 60
20
Minimum RTP Port Number
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Specifies the lowest port number that the unit will use for RTP packets.
1024–59598 (even number only)
16000
Maximum RTP Port Number
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Specifies the highest port number that the unit will use for RTP packets.
1424–59998 (even number only)
20000
Telephone-event Payload Type
Description Specifies the RFC 2833 payload type for DTMF tones.
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Note
• This setting is available only when [DTMF Type] is set to
[RFC2833] .
96–127
101
4.5.3.2 Voice Quality Report
Server Address
Description
Value Range
Specifies the IP address or FQDN of the collector server.
Max. 256 characters
124 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
4.5.3 VoIP Settings
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Not stored.
Port
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Enable PUBLISH
Description
Value Range
Specifies the port of the collector server.
1–65535
5060
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Selects the sending type of the VQ report using PUBLISH.
• Disable
• End of Session Report Using PUBLISH
• Interval report Using PUBLISH
• Alert Report Using PUBLISH
Disable
Alert Report Trigger
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Selects the trigger to notify the VQ report.
• Warning
• Critical
Warning
Threshold MOS-LQ (Critical)
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Specifies the criteria (critical) to send the VQ report when the MOSQ occurs.
0–40
0
Threshold MOS-LQ (Warning)
Description
Value Range
Specifies the criteria (warning) to send the VQ report when the
MOSQ occurs.
0–40
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
0
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 125
4.5.4 VoIP Settings [Line 1]–[Line n]
Threshold Delay (Critical)
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Threshold Delay (Warning)
Description
Specifies the criteria (critical) to send the VQ report when a delay occurs.
0–2000
0
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Specifies the criteria (warning) to send the VQ report when a delay occurs.
0–2000
0
4.5.4 VoIP Settings [Line 1]–[Line n]
Note
Line n: The number of lines available varies depending on the phone being used.
This screen allows you to change the VoIP settings that are specific to each line.
126 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
4.5.4 VoIP Settings [Line 1]–[Line n]
4.5.4.1 Basic
G.722 Enable
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
G.722 Priority
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Selects whether to enable the G.722 codec for voice data transmission.
• Yes
• No
Yes
Specifies the numerical order usage priority for the G.722 codec.
1–255
1
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 127
4.5.4 VoIP Settings [Line 1]–[Line n]
PCMA Enable
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
PCMA Priority
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
G.729A Enable
Description
Value Range
Selects whether to enable the PCMA codec for voice data transmission.
• Yes
• No
Yes
Specifies the numerical order usage priority for the PCMA codec.
1–255
1
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
G.729A Priority
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
PCMU Enable
Description
Value Range
Selects whether to enable the G.729A codec for voice data transmission.
• Yes
• No
Yes
Specifies the numerical order usage priority for the G.729A codec.
1–255
1
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
PCMU Priority
Description
Value Range
Selects whether to enable the PCMU codec for voice data transmission.
• Yes
• No
Yes
Specifies the numerical order usage priority for the PCMU codec.
1–255
128 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
4.5.4 VoIP Settings [Line 1]–[Line n]
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
DTMF Type
Description
Value Range
1
Selects the method for transmitting DTMF (Dual Tone Multi-
Frequency) tones.
• RFC2833
• Inband
• SIP INFO
Note
• RFC2833 refers to Outband DTMF.
• Inband refers to Inband DTMF.
RFC2833
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
4.5.4.2 Advanced
RTP Packet QoS (DSCP)
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
RTCP Packet QoS (DSCP)
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Enable RTCP
Description
Value Range
Specifies the DSCP level of DiffServ applied to RTP packets.
0–63
0
Specifies the DSCP level of DiffServ applied to RTCP/RTCP-XR packets.
0–63
0
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Enable RTCP-XR
Description
Selects whether to enable or disable RTCP.
• Yes
• No
No
Selects whether to enable or disable RTCP-XR.
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 129
4.5.4 VoIP Settings [Line 1]–[Line n]
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
RTCP&RTCP-XR Interval
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
• Yes
• No
No
Specifies the interval, in seconds, between RTCP/RTCP-XR packets.
5–65535
5
SRTP Mode
Description
Value Range
Selects the mode of SRTP feature.
• 0: SRTP
• 1: RTP/SRTP
• 2: Panasonic Original
• 3: SRTP/RTP
Note
• 0: SRTP
Use only SRTP for outgoing and incoming calls.
• 1: RTP/SRTP
Use only RTP for outgoing calls, and RTP or SRTP for incoming calls.
• 2: Panasonic Original
Use RTP or SRTP for both outgoing and incoming calls.
This value is valid only when the unit is connected to a
Panasonic PBX.
"SRTP_MIX_TRANSFER_ENABLE_n" must also be set to "Y".
• 3: SRTP/RTP
If you are using "RTP/AVP" and append "a=crypto", and the response message includes "a=crypto", the conversation will be established with SRTP. If "a=crypto" is not included, the conversation will be established with RTP.
1: RTP/SRTP
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Enable Mixed SRTP & RTP by Conference
Description
Value Range
Selects whether to allow conferences where each participant can use either SRTP or RTP.
• Yes
• No
Default Value No
130 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
4.6 Telephone
Configuration File Reference
Enable Mixed SRTP & RTP by Transfer
Description
Value Range
Selects whether to allow call transfers between a user who is using
SRTP and a user who is using RTP.
• Yes
• No
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
No
4.6 Telephone
This section provides detailed descriptions about all the settings classified under the [Telephone] tab.
4.6.1 Call Control
This screen allows you to configure various call features that are common to all lines.
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 131
4.6.1 Call Control
4.6.1.1 Call Control
Send SUBSCRIBE to Voice Mail Server
Description Selects whether to send the SUBSCRIBE request to a voice mail server.
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Note
• Your phone system must support voice mail.
• Yes
• No
No
Conference Server URI
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
First-digit Timeout
Description
Specifies the URI for a conference server, which consists of "sip:", a user part, the "@" symbol, and a host part, for example,
"sip:[email protected]".
Note
• Availability depends on your phone system.
Max. 256 characters
Not stored.
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Inter-digit Timeout
Description
Specifies the length of time, in seconds, within which the first digits of a dial number must be dialed.
1–600 (s)
30
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Timer for Dial Plan
Description
Specifies the length of time, in seconds, within which subsequent digits of a dial number must be dialed.
1–15 (s)
5
Value Range
Specifies the length of time, in seconds, that the unit waits when a "T" or "t" has been entered in the dial plan.
1–15 (s)
132 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
4.6.1 Call Control
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Enable # Key as delimiter
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
International Call Prefix
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Country Calling Code
Description
5
Selects whether the # key is treated as a regular dialed digit or a delimiter, when dialed as or after the second digit.
• Yes: # is treated as the end of dialing delimiter.
• No: # is treated as a regular dialed digit.
Yes
Specifies the number to be shown in the place of the first "+" symbol when the phone number for incoming international calls contains "+".
Max. 8 characters (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Not stored.
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
National Access Code
Description
Specifies the country/area calling code to be used for comparative purposes when dialing a number from the incoming call log that contains a "+" symbol.
Max. 8 characters (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Not stored.
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Default Line for Outgoing
Description
When dialing a number from the incoming call log that contains a "+" symbol and the country calling code matches, the country calling code is removed and the national access code is added.
Max. 8 characters (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Not stored.
Selects the line used to make an outgoing call when no line is specified in the dialing operation.
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 133
4.6.1 Call Control
Value Range • Line 1
• Line 2
• Line 3
• Line 4
• Line 5
• Line 6
• Line 7
• Line 8
• Line 9
• Line 10
• Line 11
• Line 12
• Line 13
• Line 14
• Line 15
• Line 16
Note
KX-HDV130 Line 1-2
KX-HDV230 Line 1-6
KX-HDV330 Line 1-12
KX-HDV430 Line 1-16
Line 1
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Call Park Number
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Enable Call Park Key
Description
Value Range
Specifies the call parking number.
0–4 digits (0–9, *, #)
Not stored.
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Park Retrieve Number
Description
Selects whether to display "Call Park" in the Call Parking Func menu.
• Yes
• No
No
Specifies the call park retrieve number.
134 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
4.6.1 Call Control
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
0–4 digits (0–9, *, #)
Not stored.
Park Retrieve Soft Key (For KX-HDV130/KX-HDV230)
Description Selects whether to have soft key for the call park retrieving.
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Note
• This feature is available only when [Enable Call Park
Notification] is set to [Yes] , and [Park Retrieve Number] is set (see
Enable Call Park Notification ,
• Not Use
• Soft Key A (Left)
• Soft Key B (Center)
• Soft Key C (Right)
Not Use
IDLE_SOFT_KEY_PARK_RETRIEVING (For KX-HDV130/
Directed Call Pickup
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Specifies the feature number assigned to a BLF for performing call pickup.
0–4 digits (0–9, *, #)
Not stored.
Group Call Pickup
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Barge in
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Private Hold
Description
Specifies the feature number for performing "Group Pickup".
0–4 digits (0–9, *, #)
Not stored.
Specifies the feature number for performing barging in.
0–4 digits (0–9, *, #)
Not stored.
Selects whether to enable or disable "Private Hold".
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 135
4.6.2 Call Control [Line 1]–[Line n]
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
• Yes
• No
No
4.6.1.2 Emergency Call Phone Numbers
1–5
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Specifies the phone numbers used for making emergency calls. A user can dial any of the specified phone numbers at any time regardless of any restrictions imposed on the unit. A maximum of 5 phone numbers can be specified.
Max. 32 characters (except &, ", ', :, ;, <, >)
Not stored.
4.6.1.3 Call Rejection Phone Numbers
1–30
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Specifies the phone numbers to reject incoming calls from. A maximum of 30 phone numbers can be specified.
Max. 32 characters (except &, ", ', :, ;, <, >)
Not stored.
4.6.2 Call Control [Line 1]–[Line n]
Note
Line n: The number of lines available varies depending on the phone being used.
This screen allows you to configure various call features that are specific to each line.
136 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
4.6.2 Call Control [Line 1]–[Line n]
4.6.2.1 Call Features
Display Name
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Voice Mail Access Number
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Enable Anonymous Call
Description
Specifies the name to display as the caller on the other party’s phone when you make a call.
Max. 24 characters
Note
• You can use Unicode characters for this setting.
Not stored.
Specifies the phone number used to access the voice mail server.
Note
• Your phone system must support voice mail.
Max. 32 characters
Not stored.
Selects whether to make calls without transmitting the phone number to the called party.
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 137
4.6.2 Call Control [Line 1]–[Line n]
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
• Yes
• No
No
Enable Block Anonymous Call
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Selects whether to accept or reject the incoming call without the called party’s phone number.
• Yes
• No
No
Enable Do Not Disturb
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Selects whether to reject the all incoming calls.
• Yes
• No
No
Enable Call Waiting
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Selects whether to enable Call Waiting.
• Yes
• No
Yes
Enable Call Forwarding Always
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Selects whether to forward all incoming calls to a specified destination.
• Yes
• No
No
Forwarding Number (Always)
Description Specifies the phone number of the destination to forward all incoming calls to.
Value Range
Default Value
Max. 32 characters
Not stored.
138 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
4.6.2 Call Control [Line 1]–[Line n]
Enable Call Forwarding Busy
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Selects whether to forward incoming calls to a specified destination when the line is in use.
• Yes
• No
No
Forwarding Number (Busy)
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Specifies the phone number of the destination to forward calls to when the line is in use.
Max. 32 characters
Not stored.
Enable Call Forwarding No Answer
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Selects whether to forward incoming calls to a specified destination when a call is not answered after it has rung a specified number of times.
• Yes
• No
No
Forwarding Number (No Answer)
Description Specifies the phone number of the destination to forward calls to when a call is not answered after it has rung a specified number of times.
Value Range
Default Value
Max. 32 characters
Not stored.
Ring Counts (No Answer)
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Specifies the number of times that an incoming call rings until the call is forwarded.
0, 2–20
3
Enable Shared Call
Description Selects whether to enable the Shared Call feature of the SIP server, which is used to share one line among the units.
Note
• Availability depends on your phone system.
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 139
4.6.2 Call Control [Line 1]–[Line n]
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
• Yes
• No
Note
• If you select [Yes] , the SIP server will control the line by using a shared-call signaling method. If you select [No] , the SIP server will control the line by using a standard signaling method.
No
Enable Key Synchronization (Enable Key Synchronisation)
Description Selects whether to synchronize the Do Not Disturb and Call Forward settings.
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Note
• Even if you select [Yes] , this feature may not function properly if your phone system does not support it. Before you configure this setting, consult your phone system dealer/service provider.
• Yes
• No
No
Enable Call Park Notification
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Selects whether to respond to call park notifications from the server.
• Yes
• No
No
CALLPARK_NOTIFICATION_ENABLE_n
Enable Click to Call
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Selects whether to enable Click to Dial/Answer/Hold functions.
• Yes
• No
No
Enable Executive Setting (For KX-HDV330/KX-HDV430)
Description Selects whether to enable or disable the Executive Call Filtering feature of the selected line.
140 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
4.6.2 Call Control [Line 1]–[Line n]
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
• Yes
• No
No
BS_EXECUTIVE_SETTING_ENABLE_n (For KX-HDV330/
Enable Assistant Setting (For KX-HDV330/KX-HDV430)
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Selects whether to enable the Executive-Assistant Call Filtering feature and the Executive-Assistant Divert feature of the selected line.
• Yes
• No
No
BS_ASSISTANT_SETTING_ENABLE_n (For KX-HDV330/
MoH Server URI
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Specifies MoH server URI for each line.
Max. 384 characters
Not stored.
Resource List URI
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Specifies the URI for the resource list, which consists of "sip:", a user part, the "@" symbol, and a host part.
Max. 256 characters
Not stored.
4.6.2.2 Dial Plan
Dial Plan (max 1000 columns)
Description
Value Range
Specifies a dial format, such as specific phone numbers, that control which numbers can be dialed or how to handle the call when making a call. For details, see
Max. 1000 characters
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Not stored.
Call Even If Dial Plan Does Not Match
Description Selects whether to make a call even if the dialed number does not match any of the dial formats specified in [Dial Plan] .
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 141
4.6.3 Hotline Settings
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
4.6.3 Hotline Settings
• Yes
• No
Note
• If you select [Yes] , calls will be made even if the dialed number does not match the dial formats specified in [Dial Plan] (i.e., dial plan filtering is disabled). If you select [No] , calls will not be made if the dialed number does not match one of the dial formats specified in [Dial Plan] (i.e., dial plan filtering is enabled).
Yes
4.6.3.1 Hotline
Enable
Description
Value Range
142 Administrator Guide
Selects whether to enable or disable the Hot line feature.
• Yes
• No
Document Version: 2017-07
4.6.4 Program Key (No. 1–2) (For KX-HDV130)
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Hotline Number
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Hotline Delay
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
No
Specifies the Hot line number.
Max. 32 characters
Not stored.
Specifies a time after off hook for Hot line.
0–10 (s)
2
4.6.4 Program Key (No. 1–2) (For KX-HDV130)
Type
Description
Value Range
Document Version: 2017-07
Selected a particular Facility Action for the flexible button. No facility action will be taken for the button if the string is empty or invalid.
• One Touch Dial
• BLF
• Line
• ACD
• Wrap Up
• Call Forward
• Group Call Pickup
Administrator Guide 143
4.6.5 Flexible Key Settings (No. 1–24) (For KX-HDV230/KX-HDV330/KX-HDV430)
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Parameter
Description
Not stored.
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Specifies an optional argument associated with the specified Facility
Action for the flexible button.
Max. 32 characters
Not stored.
4.6.5 Flexible Key Settings (No. 1–24) (For KX-HDV230/
KX-HDV330/KX-HDV430)
4.6.5.1 Flexible Key Settings
Type
Description Selects the feature to be assigned to each flexible key.
144 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
4.6.5 Flexible Key Settings (No. 1–24) (For KX-HDV230/KX-HDV330/KX-HDV430)
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Parameter
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Label Name
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
• One Touch Dial
• BLF
• Line
• ACD
• Wrap Up
• Line Status
• Call Forward
• Phonebook
• Call History
• Simultaneous Ring
• Hoteling (Hospitality)
• Transfer
• Blind Transfer
• Conference
• Directed Call Pickup
• Call Park
• Call Park Retrieve
• Group Call Pickup
• Network Camera (For KX-HDV430)
• Presence
• My Phone
Not stored.
Specifies the necessary values for the features assigned to flexible keys.
Max. 128 characters
Not stored.
Specifies the message to be displayed on the screen when the flexible key is pressed.
Max. 20 characters
Not stored.
FLEX_BUTTON_LABELx (For KX-HDV230/KX-HDV330/
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 145
4.6.6 Tone Settings
4.6.6 Tone Settings
This screen allows you to configure the dual-tone frequencies and ringtone patterns of each tone.
4.6.6.1 Dial Tone
Tone Frequencies
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Specifies the dual-tone frequencies, in hertz, of dial tones using 2 whole numbers separated by a comma.
0, 200–2000 (0: No tone)
Note
• If the value for this setting is "350,440", the unit will use a mixed signal of a 350 Hz tone and a 440 Hz tone.
350,440
146 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
4.6.6 Tone Settings
Tone Timings
Description
Value Range
Specifies the pattern, in milliseconds, of dial tones using up to 10 whole numbers (off 1, on 1, off 2, on 2…) separated by commas.
Note
• The unit will not play the tone for the duration of the first value, play it for the duration of the second value, stop it for the duration of the third value, play it again for the duration of the fourth value, and so on. The whole sequence will then repeat.
For example, if the value for this setting is "100,100,100,0", the unit will not play the tone for 100 ms, play it for 100 ms, stop it for 100 ms, and then play it continuously.
• It is recommended that you set a value of 60 milliseconds or more for the first value (off 1).
0–16000 (0: Infinite time)
Note
• Avoid setting 1–50 for any of the values.
60,0
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
4.6.6.2 Busy Tone
Tone Frequencies
Description
Value Range
Specifies the dual-tone frequencies, in hertz, of busy tones using 2 whole numbers separated by a comma.
0, 200–2000 (0: No tone)
Note
• If the value for this setting is "480,620", the unit will use a mixed signal of a 480 Hz tone and a 620 Hz tone.
480,620
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Tone Timings
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Specifies the pattern, in milliseconds, of busy tones using up to 10 whole numbers (off 1, on 1, off 2, on 2…) separated by commas.
0–16000 (0: Infinite time)
Note
• Avoid setting 1–50 for any of the values.
60,500,440
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 147
4.6.6 Tone Settings
4.6.6.3 Ringing Tone
Tone Frequencies
Description
Value Range
Specifies the dual-tone frequencies, in hertz, of ringback tones using
2 whole numbers separated by a comma.
0, 200–2000 (0: No tone)
Note
• If the value for this setting is "440,480", the unit will use a mixed signal of a 440 Hz tone and a 480 Hz tone.
440,480
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Tone Timings
Description
Value Range
Specifies the pattern, in milliseconds, of ringback tones using up to
10 whole numbers (off 1, on 1, off 2, on 2…) separated by commas.
Note
• It is recommended that you set a value of 60 milliseconds or more for the first value (off 1).
0–16000 (0: Infinite time)
Note
• Avoid setting 1–50 for any of the values.
60,2000,3940
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
4.6.6.4 Stutter Tone
Tone Frequencies
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Specifies the dual-tone frequencies, in hertz, of stutter dial tones to notify that a voice mail is waiting, using 2 whole numbers separated by a comma.
0, 200–2000 (0: No tone)
Note
• If the value for this setting is "350,440", the unit will use a mixed signal of a 350 Hz tone and a 440 Hz tone.
350,440
148 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
4.6.6 Tone Settings
Tone Timings
Description
Value Range
Specifies the pattern, in milliseconds, of stutter dial tones to notify that a voice mail is waiting, using up to 22 whole numbers (off 1, on 1, off 2, on 2…) separated by commas.
Note
• It is recommended that you set a value of 560 milliseconds or more for the first value (off 1).
0–16000 (0: Infinite time)
Note
• Avoid setting 1–50 for any of the values.
560,100,100,100,100,100,100,100,100,100,100,100,100,100,100,10
0,100,100,100,100,100,0
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
4.6.6.5 Reorder Tone
Tone Frequencies
Description
Value Range
Specifies the dual-tone frequencies, in hertz, of reorder tones using 2 whole numbers separated by a comma.
0, 200–2000 (0: No tone)
Note
• If the value for this setting is "480,620", the unit will use a mixed signal of a 480 Hz tone and a 620 Hz tone.
480,620
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Tone Timings
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Specifies the pattern, in milliseconds, of reorder tones using up to 10 whole numbers (off 1, on 1, off 2, on 2…) separated by commas.
Note
• It is recommended that you set a value of 60 milliseconds or more for the first value (off 1).
0–16000 (0: Infinite time)
60,250,190
Note
• Avoid setting 1–50 for any of the values.
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 149
4.6.7 Import Phonebook
4.6.7 Import Phonebook
This screen allows you to import phonebook data from a PC to the specified unit. For details, see
.
Note
• If the existing phonebook data has an entry with the same name and phone number as an imported entry, the imported entry is not added as a new entry.
• When you begin transferring the phonebook data, the "Now Processing File Data" screen is displayed, and the screen is periodically reloaded. Depending on your Web browser, the screen might not reload automatically, and you will need to click the text "HERE" before the timer expires in order for the import operation to function properly.
4.6.7.1 Import Phonebook
File Name
Description Specifies the path of the TSV (Tab-separated Value) file to import from the PC.
150 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
4.6.8 Export Phonebook
Value Range
Default Value
No limitation
Note
• There are no limitations for the field entry. However, it is recommended that paths of less than 256 characters be used: longer paths may cause longer data transfer times and result in an internal error.
Not stored.
4.6.8 Export Phonebook
This screen allows you to save the phonebook data stored in the unit as a TSV file on a PC. For details, see
.
Note
• When you begin transferring the phonebook data, the "Now Processing File Data" screen is displayed, and the screen is periodically reloaded. Click the text "HERE" in the message to display the [Export Phonebook] screen again. If you do not, the "Now Processing File Data" screen remains displayed even if the export is complete. Depending on your Web browser, the screen might not reload automatically, and you will need to click the text "HERE" before the timer expires in order for the export operation to function properly.
• Depending on the security settings of your Web browser, pop-up menus might be blocked at the time of export. The security warning window may be displayed on another screen even if the Pop-up
Blocker settings are set to enable, and the file may not be exported successfully. In this case, try the export operation again or disable the Pop-up Blocker feature of your Web browser.
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 151
4.6.9 Video Call Settings (For KX-HDV430)
4.6.8.1 Export Phonebook
Export Phonebook
Click [Export] button to export the phonebook from this unit.
4.6.9 Video Call Settings (For KX-HDV430)
This screen allows you to change the Video Call settings.
152 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
4.6.9 Video Call Settings (For KX-HDV430)
4.6.9.1 Default Call Mode
Default Call Mode
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Selects the default call type when you make a call by going off hook, etc.
• Voice
• Video
Voice
4.6.9.2 Screen Mode
Screen Mode
Description
Value Range
Selects the mode for the video screen.
• Normal
• Split
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 153
4.6.9 Video Call Settings (For KX-HDV430)
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
4.6.9.3 Send Image
Send Image at Start
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
4.6.9.4 Rate Settings
Bit Rate
Description
Value Range
Normal
Selects whether the video is automatically sent when you start a video call.
• Yes
• No
Yes
Selects the bit rate for the video when you make a video call.
• 128
• 256
• 384
• 512
• 768
• 1024
• 2048
2048
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Bit Rate Use
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Frame Rate
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Selects whether the specified bit rate is treated as the maximum bit rate or a fixed bit rate.
• Maximum
• Fixed
Maximum
Selects the frame rate for the video when you make a video call.
• 15
• 30
30
154 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
4.6.10 DSS Console (For KX-HDV230/KX-HDV330/KX-HDV430)
Configuration File Reference
Image Size
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Selects the size for video images when you make a video call.
• QCIF
• QVGA
• CIF
• HVGAW
• VGA
HVGAW
4.6.10 DSS Console (For KX-HDV230/KX-HDV330/KX-HDV430)
This screen allows you to configure various features for each DSS console key. Each DSS console supports
40 keys. DSS console 1 uses keys 1-40, DSS console 2 uses keys 41-80, etc.
4.6.10.1 DSS 1-5 Key (No. 1–200)
Type
Description Selects the feature to be assigned to each DSS console key.
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 155
4.6.10 DSS Console (For KX-HDV230/KX-HDV330/KX-HDV430)
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Parameter
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Label Name
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
• One Touch Dial
• BLF
• Line
• ACD
• Wrap Up
• Line Status
• Call Forward
• Phonebook
• Call History
• Simultaneous Ring
• Hoteling (Hospitality)
• Transfer
• Blind Transfer
• Conference
• Directed Call Pickup
• Call Park
• Call Park Retrieve
• Group Call Pickup
• Network Camera (For KX-HDV430)
• Presence
• My Phone
Not stored.
Specifies the necessary values for the features assigned to DSS console keys.
Max. 128 characters
Not stored.
Specifies the message to be displayed on the screen when the DSS console key is pressed.
Max. 20 characters
Not stored.
156 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
4.7 Maintenance
4.7 Maintenance
This section provides detailed descriptions about all the settings classified under the [Maintenance] tab.
4.7.1 Provisioning Maintenance
This screen allows you to change the provisioning setup to download the configuration files from the provisioning server of your phone system.
4.7.1.1 Provisioning Maintenance
Standard File URL
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Specifies the URL of the standard configuration file, which is used when every unit needs different settings.
Max. 384 characters
Note
• For details about the formats, see
.
Not stored.
Product File URL
Description
Value Range
Specifies the URL of the product configuration file, which is used when all units with the same model number need the same settings.
Max. 384 characters
Note
• For details about the formats, see
.
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 157
4.7.1 Provisioning Maintenance
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Master File URL
Description
Not stored.
Value Range
Specifies the URL of the master configuration file, which is used when all units need the same settings.
Max. 384 characters
Note
•
For details about the formats, see 2.1.3 Server Address
Not stored.
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Cyclic Auto Resync
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Resync Interval
Description
Selects whether the unit periodically checks for updates of configuration files.
• Yes
• No
No
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Time Resync
Description
Specifies the interval, in minutes, between periodic checks for updates of the configuration files.
1–40320
10080
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Specifies the time (hour:minute) that the unit checks for updates of configuration files.
00:00–23:59
Not stored.
Header Value for Resync Event
Description Specifies the value of the "Event" header sent from the SIP server to the unit so that the unit can access the configuration files on the provisioning server.
Value Range
Default Value
Max. 15 characters check-sync
158 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
Configuration File Reference
4.7.2 Firmware Maintenance
This screen allows you to perform firmware updates automatically.
4.7.2 Firmware Maintenance
4.7.2.1 Firmware Maintenance
Enable Firmware Update
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Selects whether to perform firmware updates when the unit detects a newer version of firmware.
Note
• Manual firmware updates from the Web user interface (→ see
4.7.3 Upgrade Firmware (For KX-HDV130/KX-HDV230) ) can
be performed regardless of this setting.
• Firmware updates using TR-069 can be performed regardless of this setting.
• Yes
• No
Yes
Firmware File URL
Description Specifies the URI where the firmware file is stored.
Note
• This setting is available only when [Enable Firmware Update] is set to [Yes] .
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 159
4.7.3 Upgrade Firmware (For KX-HDV130/KX-HDV230)
Value Range Max. 384 characters
Note
• If "{fwver}" is included in this parameter, it will be replaced with the value specified in [Firmware Version] . For details about
the formats, see 2.1.3 Server Address Formats
.
Not stored.
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Firmware Version (For KX-HDV330/KX-HDV430)
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Configuration File Reference
Specifies the new firmware version of the unit.
6 characters xx.xxx [x=0–9]
Not stored.
4.7.3 Upgrade Firmware (For KX-HDV130/KX-HDV230)
This screen allows you to download the Upgrade Firmware data from the HTTP server.
You can upgrade the firmware manually, irrespective of the [Enable Firmware Update] setting.
Note
• After the firmware has been successfully updated, the unit will restart automatically.
4.7.3.1 Upgrade Firmware
Firmware File URL (For KX-HDV130)
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Specifies the URI where the firmware file is stored.
Max. 384 characters
Not stored.
160 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
4.7.4 Export Logging File
File Name (For KX-HDV230)
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Specifies the path of the firmware file to be imported.
No limitation
Note
• There are no limitations for the field entry. However, it is recommended that paths of less than 256 characters be used: longer paths may cause longer data transfer times and result in an internal error.
Not stored.
4.7.4 Export Logging File
This screen allows you to specify the Logging File to export when logging.
4.7.4.1 Export Logging File
Logging File Type
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Selects the Logging File Type setting.
• Power Down
• Event
• SIP Packet
Note
• The line break code for the log file is <LF>.
• If a file is exported when Power Down is selected, the saved file is power.log.
• If a file is exported when Event is selected, the saved file is event_log.txt.
• If a file is exported when SIP Packet is selected, the saved file is sip_trace_log.txt.
Power Down
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 161
4.7.5 Reset to Defaults
4.7.5 Reset to Defaults
This screen allows you to reset the carrier default settings made through the Web user interface to their default values by clicking [Reset to Carrier Defaults] . After you click this button, a dialog box is displayed, asking whether you want to reset the settings. Click OK to reset, or Cancel not to.
Notice
• After resetting the settings, the unit will restart even if it is being accessed through the phone user interface, or on calls.
Note
• You can specify carrier default using configuration parameter extensions. Those parameters will be
reset to the specified carrier default values (see Parameter Extensions ).
4.7.6 Restart
This screen allows you to restart the unit by clicking [Restart] . After you click this button, a dialog box is displayed, asking whether you want to restart the unit. Click OK to perform a restart, or Cancel not to.
Notice
• The unit will restart even if it is being accessed through the phone user interface, or on calls.
162 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
Section 5
Configuration File Programming
This section provides information about the configuration parameters used in the configuration files.
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 163
5.1 Configuration File Parameter List
5.1 Configuration File Parameter List
The following tables show all the parameters that can be programmed using configuration file programming.
For details about each parameter, see the reference pages listed.
For details about configuration file specifications, see 2.4 Configuration File Specifications .
System Settings
FACTORY_RESET_ENABLE
BUTTON_LOCATION_SETTING
SYS_HOME_MENU_ICONx
FWD_DND_MENU_ENABLE
BLOCK_CID_MENU_ENABLE
BLOCK_ANONY_MENU_ENABLE
Parameter Name
ANONY_CALL_MENU_ENABLE
AUTO_INPUT_KEY_TIME
START_DIAL_POUND_KEY
TIME_ZONE_SET_ENABLE
DISCLOSE_FUNCTION_ENABLE
VM_FUNCTION_ENABLE
DISPLAY_CALL_KEY_ENABLE
LCD_SCREEN_TIMEOUT
DSS_LCD_ACTIVATION
CALL_SETTINGS_MENU_ENABLE
ECO_MODE_MENU_ENABLE
NOTIFICATION_MENU_ENABLE
NOTIFY_MISSEDCALL_LED_ENABLE *1
NOTIFY_VOICEMAIL_LED_ENABLE
NOTIFY_VOICEMAIL_ALARM_ENABLE *1
NOTIFY_NETWORKCAMERA_ENABLE *1
NOTIFY_NETWORKCAMERA_LED_ENABLE
page 192 page 192 page 192 page 192 page 192
page 193 page 193 page 193 page 193
Ref.
page 189 page 189 page 189 page 189
page 190 page 190 page 190 page 190 page 190
page 191 page 191 page 191 page 191 page 191
164 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
Parameter Name
NOTIFY_NETWORKCAMERA_ALARM_ENABLE *1
NOTIFICATION_ALARM_TYPE
CODEC_VAD_CNG_ENABLE
BOOTLOG_SERVER_URI
DISPLAY_DIVERSION_ENABLE
ERROR_AUTO_REBOOT_TIME
HOME_DISPLAY_TYPE
FUNCTION_DISPLAY_TYPE
FOCUS_OPERATION_ENABLE
INCOMING_DISPLAY_ENABLE
DISPLAY_AUTO_CHANGE_ENABLE
NOTIFY_FUNC_KEY_ENABLE
NOTIFY_DSS_KEY_ENABLE
IDLE_SOFT_KEY_1
IDLE_SOFT_KEY_2
IDLE_SOFT_KEY_3
IDLE_SOFT_KEY_4
FORWARD_INCOMING_SOFTKEY_ENABLE
SHARED_LINE_ICON_ENABLE
TALKING_SOFT_KEY_1
TALKING_SOFT_KEY_2
TALKING_SOFT_KEY_3
TALKING_SOFT_KEY_4
DELAY_RING_TIME_n
OFF_HOOK_MONITOR_ENABLE
PRIVATE_HOLD_ENABLE
CONF_OWNER_OUT_ENABLE
PCAP_ENABLE
PCAP_REMOTE_ID
PCAP_REMOTE_PASS
PCAP_REMOTE_PORT
DTMF_OUT_ENABLE
CANCEL_OPERATION_MODE
Document Version: 2017-07
5.1 Configuration File Parameter List
Ref.
page 196 page 196 page 196 page 196 page 196
page 197 page 197 page 197 page 197 page 197
page 206 page 206 page 206 page 206 page 206
Administrator Guide 165
5.1 Configuration File Parameter List
Basic Network Settings
IP_ADDR_MODE
STATIC_GATEWAY
DHCP_DNS_ENABLE
DHCP_VENDOR_CLASS
STATIC_IP_ADDRESS_IPV6
USER_DNS2_ADDR_IPV6
Parameter Name
Ethernet Port Settings
Parameter Name
PHY_MODE_PC
VLAN_PRI_IP_PHONE
VLAN_ID_PC
VLAN_EGTAG_PC_ENABLE
LLDP_ENABLE
LLDP_INTERVAL
CDP_ENABLE
166 Administrator Guide
Ref.
page 213 page 213 page 213 page 213 page 213
page 214 page 214 page 214 page 214
Ref.
page 210 page 210 page 210 page 210
page 211 page 211 page 211 page 211
Document Version: 2017-07
Parameter Name
Pre-Provisioning Settings
Parameter Name
SIPPNP_PROV_ENABLE
OPTION66_ENABLE
OPTION159_PROV_ENABLE
OPTION160_PROV_ENABLE
DHCPV6_OPTION17_PROV_ENABLE
Provisioning Settings
Parameter Name
CFG_STANDARD_FILE_PATH
CFG_CYCLIC_INTVL
CFG_RTRY_INTVL
CFG_RESYNC_ACTION
CFG_FILE_KEY2
CFG_FILE_KEY3
CFG_FILE_KEY_LENGTH
CFG_ROOT_CERTIFICATE_PATH
CFG_CLIENT_CERT_PATH
CFG_PKEY_PATH
HTTP_SSL_VERIFY
CFG_RESYNC_DURATION
CFG_BOOTUP_DURATION_ENABLE
Firmware Update Settings
Parameter Name
FIRM_FILE_PATH
FIRM_VERSION
Document Version: 2017-07
5.1 Configuration File Parameter List
Ref.
Ref.
Ref.
page 218 page 218 page 218 page 218
page 219 page 219 page 219 page 219
Ref.
Administrator Guide 167
5.1 Configuration File Parameter List
Parameter Name
FWDL_RANDOM_DURATION
HTTP Settings
Parameter Name
HTTP_VER
HTTP_PROXY_ENABLE
HTTP_PROXY_ID
HTTP_PROXY_PASS
HTTPD/WEB Settings
Parameter Name
HTTPD_LISTEN_PORT
HTTPD_PORTOPEN_AUTO
HTTPD_PORTCLOSE_TM
USER_ID
USER_PASS
ADMIN_ID
TR-069 Settings
Parameter Name
ACS_URL
ACS_USER_ID
ACS_PASS
PERIODIC_INFORM_ENABLE
PERIODIC_INFORM_INTERVAL
PERIODIC_INFORM_TIME
CON_REQ_USER_ID
CON_REQ_PASS
ANNEX_G_STUN_ENABLE
ANNEX_G_STUN_SERV_ADDR
168 Administrator Guide
Ref.
Ref.
page 224 page 224 page 224 page 224 page 224
Ref.
Ref.
Document Version: 2017-07
Parameter Name
ANNEX_G_STUN_SERV_PORT
ANNEX_G_STUN_USER_ID
ANNEX_G_STUN_PASS
ANNEX_G_STUN_MAX_KEEP_ALIVE
ANNEX_G_STUN_MIN_KEEP_ALIVE
UDP_CON_REQ_ADDR_NOTIFY_LIMIT
DEVICE_PROVISIONING_CODE
TR069_REGISTERING
TR069_REGISTERED
XML Settings
XMLAPP_ENABLE
XMLAPP_LDAP_URL
XMLAPP_NPB_SEARCH_TIMER
XMLAPP_LDAP_MAXRECORD
XML_ERROR_INFORMATION
Parameter Name
XMLAPP_INITIAL_URL
XMLAPP_CALLLOG_URL
XML_INITIATE_KEY_SOFT2
XML_SOFT_KEY_NAMEx
XMLAPP_URL_SOFT_KEYx
Document Version: 2017-07
5.1 Configuration File Parameter List
Ref.
page 231 page 231 page 231 page 231 page 231
page 234 page 234 page 234 page 234
page 235 page 235 page 235 page 235 page 235
Ref.
page 232 page 232 page 232 page 232
page 233 page 233 page 233 page 233 page 233
Administrator Guide 169
5.1 Configuration File Parameter List
XMLAPP_URL_FLEX_BUTTONx
XMLAPP_STATUSBAR_ENABLE
Parameter Name
SYS_HOME_MENU_XML_NAMEx
SYS_HOME_MENU_XML_URLx
SYS_HOME_MENU_XML_ICONx
XML_PHONEBOOK_URL
XML_PHONEBOOK_CYCLIC_INTVL
XML_CURSOR_SKIP_ENABLE
XMLAPP_URL_REDIAL_KEY
XMLAPP_RCV_IP_ADDRESSx
XSI Settings
Parameter Name
XSI_SERVER_PORT
XSI_PHONEBOOK_ENABLE_n
XSI_PHONEBOOK_CYCLIC_INTVL
XSI_PHONEBOOK_RESYNC_DURATION
XSI_VISUAL_VM_ENABLE_n
BSD_MULTI_TYPE_ENABLE
BSD_GROUP_ENABLE_n
BSD_GROUPCOM_ENABLE_n
BSD_ENTERPRISE_ENABLE_n
BSD_ENTERPRISECOM_ENABLE_n
BSD_PERSONAL_ENABLE_n
170 Administrator Guide
Ref.
page 237 page 237 page 237 page 237
page 238 page 238 page 238 page 238 page 238
page 242 page 242 page 242 page 242
Ref.
page 240 page 240 page 240 page 240 page 240
Document Version: 2017-07
XMPP (UC-ONE) Settings
Parameter Name
UC_ENABLE
XMPP_PORT
XMPP_TLS_VERIFY
XMPP_ROOT_CERT_PATH
XMPP_CLIENT_CERT_PATH
XMPP_PKEY_PATH
UC_DNSSRV_ENA
UC_TCP_SRV_PREFIX
UC_USERID_CASE_SENSITIVE
PRESENCE_MYPHONE_STATUS
PRESENCE_INVISIBLE_ENABLE
LDAP Settings
Parameter Name
LDAP_DNSSRV_ENABLE
LDAP_MAXRECORD
LDAP_NUMB_SEARCH_TIMER
LDAP_NAME_SEARCH_TIMER
LDAP_NAME_FILTER
LDAP_NUMB_ATTRIBUTE
LDAP_BASEDN
LDAP_SSL_VERIFY
LDAP_ROOT_CERT_PATH
LDAP_CLIENT_CERT_PATH
Document Version: 2017-07
5.1 Configuration File Parameter List
page 249 page 249 page 249 page 249 page 249
Ref.
page 247 page 247 page 247 page 247 page 247
Ref.
page 244 page 244 page 244 page 244 page 244
page 245 page 245 page 245 page 245 page 245
Administrator Guide 171
5.1 Configuration File Parameter List
Parameter Name
LDAP_PKEY_PATH
LDAP_DISPLAY_FORMAT
Call Center Settings
Parameter Name
CALL_CENTER_ENABLE_n
ACD_LOGIN_CONDITION_n
ACD_LOGOUT_CONDITION_n
CC_DISPOSITION_CODE_ENABLE_n
CC_CUSTOMER_ORG_TRACE_ENABLE_n *2
HOTELING_PASSWORD_n
UC_HOTELING_MODE
UC_FLEXIBLESEATING_UNLOCKPIN
SNMP Settings
Parameter Name
SNMP_ENABLE
SNMP_TRUST_IP
SNMP_TRUST_PORT
SNMP_RO_COMMUNITY_STRING
SNMP_SECURITY_TYPE
SNMP_SECURITY_USER
SNMP_AUTH_TYPE
SNMP_AUTH_PASSWORD
SNMP_ENCRYPT_TYPE
SNMP_ENCRYPT_PASSWORD
Multicast Paging Settings
Parameter Name
MPAGE_IPV6_ADDRm
172 Administrator Guide
Ref.
Ref.
page 251 page 251 page 251 page 251 page 251
page 252 page 252 page 252 page 252
Ref.
page 253 page 253 page 253 page 253
page 254 page 254 page 254 page 254 page 254
Ref.
Document Version: 2017-07
Parameter Name
MPAGE_LABELm
MPAGE_CODEC
MPAGE_SP_VOL_EMERGENCY
MPAGE_SP_VOL_PRIORITY
MPAGE_DND_ENABLE
MPAGE_FUNCKEY_ENABLE
NTP Settings
Parameter Name
TIME_SYNC_INTVL
Time Settings
Parameter Name
LOCAL_TIME_ZONE_POSIX
DST_OFFSET
DST_START_TIME
DST_STOP_DAY_OF_WEEK
Network Phonebook (Common)
Parameter Name
ONLY_NPB_ENABLE
NETWORK_SEARCH_ENABLE
NW_PHONEBOOK_ADVANCED_SERACH
Document Version: 2017-07
5.1 Configuration File Parameter List
Ref.
page 256 page 256 page 256 page 256 page 256
Ref.
Ref.
Ref.
Administrator Guide 173
5.1 Configuration File Parameter List
Language Settings
AVAILABLE_LANGUAGE
LANGUAGE_PATHx
LANGUAGE_VERx
WEB_LANGUAGE
WEB_LANGUAGE_PATHx
WEB_LANGUAGE_VERx
Parameter Name
NAT Settings
Parameter Name
STUN_SERV_PORT
STUN_2NDSERV_ADDR
STUN_2NDSERV_PORT
SIP_ADD_RPORT
EXTERNAL_RTP_PORTx
SIP Settings
Parameter Name
SIP_USER_AGENT
SIP_RGSTR_ADDR_n
SIP_PRSNC_ADDR_n
SIP_OUTPROXY_PORT_n
174 Administrator Guide
Ref.
page 264 page 264 page 264 page 264 page 264
Ref.
page 266 page 266 page 266 page 266 page 266
Ref.
page 268 page 268 page 268 page 268
page 269 page 269 page 269 page 269
Document Version: 2017-07
SIP_DNSSRV_ENA_NAPTR_n
SIP_SVCDOMAIN_n
SIP_AUTHID_n
DSCP_SIP_n
REG_EXPIRE_TIME_n
REG_INTERVAL_RATE_n
REG_RTX_INTVL_n
USE_DEL_REG_OPEN_n
USE_DEL_REG_CLOSE_n
SIP_SESSION_TIME_n
SIP_TIMER_T4_n
SIP_TIMER_B_n
SIP_TIMER_D_n
SIP_TIMER_F_n
SIP_TIMER_H_n
SIP_TIMER_J_n
SIP_100REL_ENABLE_n
SIP_18X_RTX_INTVL_n
SIP_SUBS_EXPIRE_n
SUB_INTERVAL_RATE_n
SUB_RTX_INTVL_n
SIP_P_PREFERRED_ID_n
SIP_PRIVACY_n
ADD_USER_PHONE_n
SIP_ANM_DISPNAME_n
SIP_ANM_USERNAME_n
Parameter Name
Document Version: 2017-07
5.1 Configuration File Parameter List
Ref.
page 273 page 273 page 273 page 273
page 274 page 274 page 274 page 274
page 276 page 276 page 276 page 276 page 276
page 277 page 277 page 277 page 277
Administrator Guide 175
5.1 Configuration File Parameter List
Parameter Name
SIP_ANM_HOSTNAME_n
SIP_DETECT_SSAF_n
SIP_RCV_DET_HEADER_n
SIP_RCV_DET_REQURI_n
SIP_CONTACT_ON_ACK_n
VOICE_MESSAGE_AVAILABLE
SIP_INVITE_EXPIRE_n
SIP_FOVR_NORSP_n
SIP_FOVR_MAX_n
SIP_FOVR_MODE_n
SIP_FOVR_DURATION_n
SIP_ADD_ROUTE_n
SIP_REQURI_PORT_n
ADD_EXPIRES_HEADER_n
ADD_TRANSPORT_UDP_n
SIP_ADD_DIVERSION_n
TRANSFER_RECALL_TIM
SIGNAL_COMPRESSION_n
MAX_BREADTH_n
MUTIPART_BOUNDARY_DELIMITTER_n
RINGTONE_183_180_ENABLE_n
SIP_403_REG_SUB_RTX_n
SIP_FORK_MODE_n
AKA_AUTHENTICATION_ENABLE_n
SIP_HOLD_ATTRIBUTE_n
SDP_USER_ID_n
HOLD_SOUND_PATH_n
KEEP_EARLYMEDIA_n
RFC3327_SUPPORT_PATH
RFC4244_SUPPORT_HISTORY
RFC3319_SUPPORT_JOIN
RFC6947_DRAFT08_ALTC
RFC5627_SUPPORT_GRUU_n
176 Administrator Guide
Ref.
page 284 page 284 page 284 page 284 page 284
page 285 page 285 page 285 page 285
page 281 page 281 page 281 page 281
page 282 page 282 page 282 page 282
page 287 page 287 page 287 page 287 page 287
Document Version: 2017-07
Parameter Name
ESCAPECODE_CONVERSION
SIP_REPLACE_ENABLE_n
SIP_REFRESHER_n
ENH_FOVR_ENABLE_n
ENH_FOVR_RANDOM_TIMER_n
ENH_FOVR_RANDOM_MAX_TIME_n
ENH_FOVR_RANDOM_MIN_TIME_n
SIP_INC_INVITE_RTP_MODE_n
SIP_183_TALK_ENABLE
SEND_180_ALERT_ENABLE
INVITE_403_REGSEND_ENABLE_n
ENH_FOVR_408_ENABLE_n
ESCAPECODE_CONVERSION_RFC3986
SIP-TLS Settings
Parameter Name
SIP_TLS_MODE_n
SIP_TLS_RECONNECT_n
SIP_TLS_VERIFY_n
SIP_TLS_ROOT_CERT_PATH
SIP_TLS_CLIENT_CERT_PATH
SIP_TLS_PKEY_PATH
SIP_TLS_RANDOM_PORT
CODEC Settings
Parameter Name
CODEC_G729_PARAM_n
CODEC_PRIORITYx_n
CODEC_G711_REQ
DTMF Settings
Parameter Name
Document Version: 2017-07
5.1 Configuration File Parameter List
Ref.
page 289 page 289 page 289 page 289
page 290 page 290 page 290 page 290
Ref.
page 292 page 292 page 292 page 292
page 293 page 293 page 293 page 293
Ref.
Ref.
Administrator Guide 177
5.1 Configuration File Parameter List
Parameter Name
OUTBANDDTMF_VOL
INBANDDTMF_VOL
DTMF_SIGNAL_LEN
DTMF_INTDIGIT_TIM
RTP/RTCP/RTCP-XR Settings
Parameter Name
MAX_DELAY_n
MIN_DELAY_n
NOM_DELAY_n
RTP_PTIME
RTCP_SEND_BY_SDP_n
RTP_CLOSE_ENABLE_n
RTCPXR_ENABLE_n
SRTP Settings
Parameter Name
SRTP_MIX_CONFERENCE_ENABLE_n *2
SRTP_MIX_TRANSFER_ENABLE_n
SRTP_HELD_CALL_RTP_ENABLE
SRTP_CALL_MODE_ENABLE
DISPLAY_SRTP_CALL_ENABLE
SRTP_VIDEO_CALL_SDP_ENABLE_n
VQ Report by PUBLISH
Parameter Name
VQREPORT_COLLECTOR_ADDRESS
178 Administrator Guide
Ref.
page 301 page 301 page 301 page 301
Ref.
Ref.
Ref.
page 298 page 298 page 298 page 298
Document Version: 2017-07
Parameter Name
ALERT_REPORT_MOSQ_CRITICAL
ALERT_REPORT_DELAY_CRITICAL *2
VQREPORT_SIGNAL_COMPRESSION
VQREPORT_SEND_OPT_CODEC_ENABLE
VQREPORT_SEND_OPT_NW_CHANGE uaCSTA Settings
Parameter Name
UACSTA_ENABLE_n
UACSTA_UNIQUE_ID
CSTA_PORT
CSTA_PRXY_ADDR
CSTA_PRXY_PORT
CSTA_RGSTR_ADDR
CSTA_RGSTR_PORT
CSTA_REG_EXPIRE_TIME
CSTA_TRANSPORT
CSTA_RGSTR_AUTHID
CSTA_RGSTR_PASS
Telephone Settings
Parameter Name
POWER_ON_DISPLAY_LOGO_PATH
POUND_KEY_DELIMITER_ENABLE
DISPLAY_NAME_REPLACE
NUMBER_MATCHING_LOWER_DIGIT
NUMBER_MATCHING_UPPER_DIGIT
FLASH_RECALL_TERMINATE
FLASHHOOK_CONTENT_TYPE
Document Version: 2017-07
5.1 Configuration File Parameter List
Ref.
page 303 page 303 page 303 page 303 page 303
Ref.
page 305 page 305 page 305 page 305 page 305 page 305
Ref.
page 307 page 307 page 307 page 307 page 307
page 308 page 308 page 308 page 308
Administrator Guide 179
5.1 Configuration File Parameter List
Parameter Name
NUM_PLAN_PARK_RETRIEVING
IDLE_SOFT_KEY_PARK_RETRIEVING *2
HOLD_RECALL_TIM
HOLD_TRANSFER_OPERATION
ONHOOK_TRANSFER_ENABLE
ONHOOK_HOLD_TRNS_ENABLE
BLIND_TRANSFER_ENABLE
PAUSE_INPUT_ENABLE
NUM_PLAN_PICKUP_DIRECT
DISP_NUM_PHONEBOOK_ENABLE
CNIP_FROM_ENABLE
IDLE_DISPLAY_TYPE
CNIP_CALL_PAI_ENABLE
SOFT_KEY_LABELx
SOFT_KEY_QUICK_DIALx
BLF_DISPLAY_OFF_OUTGOING
SPLIT_HOLD_TRNS_ENABLE
NUM_PLAN_PICKUP_GROUP
PB_QUICK_SEARCH_ENABLE
CALLPARK_METHOD
CALL_PARK_PROG_KEY_MODE
SUBS_CALLPARK_AREA_ENABLE
RINGER_VOLUME_LEVEL
RINGER_VOL_OPERATION_ENABLE
Flexible Key Settings
Parameter Name
FLEX_BUTTON_LABELx
180 Administrator Guide
Ref.
page 309 page 309 page 309 page 309
page 310 page 310 page 310 page 310 page 310
page 311 page 311 page 311 page 311 page 311
page 312 page 312 page 312 page 312
page 313 page 313 page 313 page 313 page 313
page 314 page 314 page 314 page 314 page 314
Ref.
Document Version: 2017-07
Parameter Name
FLEX_BUTTON_QUICK_DIALx
LONG_PRESS_KEY_SETTING_ENABLE
DSS Key Settings
Parameter Name
DSS_BUTTON_FACILITY_ACTx
DSS_BUTTON_QUICK_DIALx
Tone Settings
Parameter Name
OUTSIDE_DIAL_TONE_FRQ
OUTSIDE_DIAL_TONE_GAIN
OUTSIDE_DIAL_TONE_RPT
OUTSIDE_DIAL_TONE_TIMING
CONFIRMATION_TONE5_FRQ
CONFIRMATION_TONE5_GAIN
REORDER_TONE_ENABLE
TONE_LEN_DISCONNECT
DIAL_TONE1_GAIN
DIAL_TONE1_RPT
DIAL_TONE1_TIMING
DIAL_TONE2_FRQ
DIAL_TONE2_GAIN
DIAL_TONE2_RPT
DIAL_TONE2_TIMING
DIAL_TONE4_FRQ
DIAL_TONE4_GAIN
DIAL_TONE4_RPT
DIAL_TONE4_TIMING
BUSY_TONE_GAIN
BUSY_TONE_RPT
BUSY_TONE_TIMING
Document Version: 2017-07
5.1 Configuration File Parameter List
Ref.
Ref.
page 321 page 321 page 321 page 321 page 321
page 322 page 322 page 322 page 322
Ref.
page 319 page 319 page 319 page 319 page 319 page 319
Administrator Guide 181
5.1 Configuration File Parameter List
Parameter Name
REORDER_TONE_GAIN
REORDER_TONE_RPT
RINGBACK_TONE_GAIN
RINGBACK_TONE_RPT
RINGBACK_TONE_TIMING
HOLD_ALARM_FRQ
HOLD_ALARM_GAIN
CW_TONE1_FRQ
CW_TONE1_GAIN
HOLD_TONE_FRQ
HOLD_TONE_GAIN
BELL_CORE_PATTERN1_TIMING
BELL_CORE_PATTERN2_TIMING
BELL_CORE_PATTERN3_TIMING
BELL_CORE_PATTERN4_TIMING
BELL_CORE_PATTERN5_TIMING
KEY_PAD_TONE
Call Control Settings
Parameter Name
BLOCK_ANONYMOUS_CALL_ENABLE_n
DISPLAY_NAME_n
VM_SUBSCRIBE_SPECIFIC_n
DISPLAY_VM_WITH_NUMBER
182 Administrator Guide
Ref.
page 329 page 329 page 329 page 329 page 329
page 330 page 330 page 330 page 330
Ref.
page 324 page 324 page 324 page 324 page 324
page 325 page 325 page 325 page 325
page 326 page 326 page 326 page 326 page 326
page 327 page 327 page 327 page 327
Document Version: 2017-07
Parameter Name
DIAL_PLAN_NOT_MATCH_ENABLE_n *2
DIALPLAN_REPLACE_LOG_ENABLE
DIALPLAN_MEMORY_DIAL_ENABLE
NATIONAL_ACCESS_CODE
IDLE_SOFT_KEY_C
CLICKTO_ENABLE_n
SIGNALING_AUTO_ANS_ENABLE_n
CALLPARK_NOTIFICATION_ENABLE_n *2
SHARED_STOP_LINE_SEIZE
FWD_SYNCHRO_FORCE_DISABLE_n
BS_EXECUTIVE_SETTING_ENABLE_n *2
BS_ASSISTANT_SETTING_ENABLE_n
FWD_DND_CONTROL_ENABLE
FWD_DND_SYNCHRO_MODE
FWD_DND_MISSEDLOG_ENABLE
HOLD_AND_CALL_ENABLE
AUTO_CALL_HOLD
SIP_RESPONSE_CODE_DND
SIP_RESPONSE_CODE_CALL_REJECT
RETURN_VOL_SET_DEFAULT_ENABLE
CONFERENCE_SERVER_URI
CONF_SERVER_HOLD_ENABLE
Document Version: 2017-07
5.1 Configuration File Parameter List
Ref.
page 332 page 332 page 332 page 332 page 332
page 335 page 335 page 335 page 335
page 337 page 337 page 337 page 337
page 338 page 338 page 338 page 338 page 338
page 339 page 339 page 339 page 339 page 339
Administrator Guide 183
5.1 Configuration File Parameter List
Parameter Name
TALKING_SOFT_KEY_A
TALKING_SOFT_KEY_B
TALKING_SOFT_KEY_C
AUTO_ANS_OPER_ENABLE
AUTO_ANS_DELAY
RETRIVE_TRANS_HOLD_OPER_CHANGE
REMOVE_PREFIX_ENABLE
Video Communication Settings
Parameter Name
DEFAULT_CALL_MODE
VIDEO_BIT_RATE
H264_PAYLOAD
Network Camera Settings
Parameter Name
NWCAMERA_PORTx
NWCAMERA_PAGING_PHONE_NAMEx *3
NWCAMERA_PAGING_PHONE_NUMBERx
NWCAMERA_LINK_PHONEm_NUMBERx *3
NWCAMERA_STREAMx
184 Administrator Guide
Ref.
Ref.
page 347 page 347 page 347 page 347
Ref.
page 343 page 343 page 343 page 343
Document Version: 2017-07
Parameter Name
NWCAMERA_ALARM_NOTIFICATION *3
NWCAMERA_ALARM_DISARM_TIME
NWCAMERA_AUTO_CLOSE_ENABLE
NWCAMERA_OPEN_RECEIVE_CALL
Communication Camera Settings
Parameter Name
COMM_CAMERA_NUMBERx
COMM_CAMERA_RINGTONE_SETTINGx *1
DTMF_CONTROL_UP_CAMERAx
DTMF_CONTROL_DOWN_CAMERAx
DTMF_CONTROL_LEFT_CAMERAx
DTMF_CONTROL_RIGHT_CAMERAx
DTMF_CONTROL_OPEN_CAMERAx
DTMF_CONTROL_ZOOMUP_CAMERAx
DTMF_CONTROL_ZOOMDOWN_CAMERAx
DTMF_CONTROL_VOICE_CAMERAx
Logging Settings
Parameter Name
SYSLOG_ADDR
SYSLOG_PORT
LOGGING_LEVEL_DNS
LOGGING_LEVEL_NW1
LOGGING_LEVEL_FILE
LOGGING_LEVEL_SIP
LOGGING_LEVEL_TR069
LOGGING_LEVEL_STUN
LOGGING_LEVEL_NW2
LOGGING_LEVEL_CFGPARSE
SYSLOG_OUT_START
Document Version: 2017-07
5.1 Configuration File Parameter List
Ref.
Ref.
page 350 page 350 page 350 page 350
page 351 page 351 page 351 page 351
Ref.
page 352 page 352 page 352 page 352
page 353 page 353 page 353 page 353 page 353 page 353
Administrator Guide 185
5.2 General Information on the Configuration Files
TWAMP Settings
Parameter Name
TWAMP_ENABLE
TWAMP_REFLECTOR_WAIT_TIME
TWAMP_PADDING_ZERO
Ref.
page 354 page 354 page 354 page 354
*1
*2
*3
This setting can also be configured through other programming methods (phone user interface programming or Web user interface programming).
This setting can also be configured through the Web user interface.
This setting can also be configured through the Phone user interface programming.
5.2 General Information on the Configuration Files
5.2.1 Configuration File Parameters
The information on each parameter that can be written in a configuration file is shown in the tables below.
The information includes parameter name (as the title of the table), value format, description, permitted value range, default value of each parameter, phone user interface reference, and Web user interface reference.
Parameter Name
This is the system-predefined parameter name and cannot be changed.
Note
• Certain parameter names end with " _n ". This signifies that these settings can be made to each line individually. The number of lines available varies depending on the phone being used, as follows:
– KX-HDV130: 1–2
– KX-HDV230: 1–6
– KX-HDV330: 1–12
– KX-HDV430: 1–16
Examples of setting the line (phone number) for accessing a voice mail server.
Parameter Name Examples are as follows :
KX-HDV130: VM_NUMBER_1, VM_NUMBER_2
KX-HDV230: VM_NUMBER_1, VM_NUMBER_2, ..., VM_NUMBER_6
KX-HDV330: VM_NUMBER_1, VM_NUMBER_2, ..., VM_NUMBER_12
KX-HDV430: VM_NUMBER_1, VM_NUMBER_2, ..., VM_NUMBER_16
Value Format
Each parameter value is categorized into Integer, Boolean, or String. Some parameters require a composite form such as "Comma-separated Integer" or "Comma-separated String".
• Integer : a numerical value, described as a sequence of numerical characters, optionally preceded by a
"-" (minus)
An empty string is not allowed.
• Boolean : " Y " or " N "
186 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
5.2.2 Characters Available for String Values
• String : sequence of alphanumerical characters
For details about available characters, see
5.2.2 Characters Available for String Values
.
• Comma-separated Integer : a list of integers, separated by commas
No space characters are allowed.
• Comma-separated String : a list of strings, separated by commas
No space characters are allowed.
• IPADDR : IPv4 address format.
• IPADDR-V6 : IPv6 address format (can be abbreviated).
Description
Describes the details of the parameter.
Value Range
Indicates the permitted value range of the parameter.
Default Value
Indicates the factory default value of the parameter.
Actual default values may vary depending on your phone system dealer/service provider.
Phone User Interface Reference
Provides the reference page of the corresponding parameter in phone user interface programming.
Web User Interface Reference
Provides the reference page of the corresponding parameter in Web user interface programming.
5.2.2 Characters Available for String Values
Unless noted otherwise in "Value Range", only ASCII characters can be used for parameter values. Unicode characters can also be used in some parameter values.
Available ASCII characters are shown on a white background in the following table:
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 187
5.3 System Settings
5.3 System Settings
5.3.1 System Settings
FACTORY_RESET_ENABLE
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
BOOLEAN
Specifies whether to enable or disable the operation of factory default and carrier default.
• Y : Enable factory reset operation
• N : Disable
Y
BUTTON_LOCATION_SETTING (For KX-HDV230/KX-HDV330/KX-HDV430)
Value Format INTEGER
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Specifies the order (normal or reverse) of flexible keys and DSS keys.
• 0: Normal
• 1: Reverse
0
SYS_HOME_MENU_ICONx (For KX-HDV330/KX-HDV430)
Value Format INTEGER
Description
Value Range x=1–20
Specifies an arrangement of the icons on the Home menu.
0: Original position
1: None
2: Function
3: Phonebook
4: Call History
5: Voice Message
6: FWD/DND
7: Application
8: Basic Settings
9: System Settings
10: Advanced Settings
11: Line Status
12: Presence
13: Call Center/Call Centre
14: Paging
15: Network Camera (For KX-HDV430)
16: Comm. Camera (For KX-HDV430)
17: XML shortcut1
18: XML shortcut2
19: XML shortcut3
20: XML shortcut4
21: XML shortcut5
22: XML shortcut6
188 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
5.3.1 System Settings
Default Value 0
Location numbers (x=1–20) of the icons on the Home menu.
Page 1 Page 2 Page 3
FWD_DND_MENU_ENABLE
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
BOOLEAN
Specifies whether the "FWD/DND" setting is displayed in MENU and the Web user interface.
• Y : Displayed
• N : Not displayed
Y
BLOCK_CID_MENU_ENABLE
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
BOOLEAN
Specifies whether to enable displaying the "Block Caller ID" setting on the phone screen and in the Web user interface.
• Y : Enable
• N : Disable
Y
BLOCK_ANONY_MENU_ENABLE
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
BOOLEAN
Specifies whether the "Block Anonymous" setting is displayed in
MENU and the Web user interface.
• Y : Displayed
• N : Not displayed
Y
ANONY_CALL_MENU_ENABLE
Value Format
Description
Value Range
BOOLEAN
Specifies whether the "Anonymous Call" setting is displayed in MENU and the Web user interface.
• Y : Displayed
• N : Not displayed
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 189
5.3.1 System Settings
Default Value
AUTO_INPUT_KEY_TIME
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Y
INTEGER
Specifies the number of seconds after which the cursor automatically moves to the next position during character input.
0–3
[0: off]
0 Default Value
START_DIAL_POUND_KEY
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
BOOLEAN
Specifies whether to send the dialed number when the '#' key is pressed during pre-dialing.
• Y : Enable dialing by using '#'
• N : Disable
N
TIME_ZONE_SET_ENABLE
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
BOOLEAN
Specifies whether the "Time Zone" setting is displayed in MENU and the Web user interface.
• Y : Displayed
• N : Not displayed
N
DISCLOSE_FUNCTION_ENABLE (For KX-HDV130/KX-HDV230)
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
BOOLEAN
Specifies whether to disclose functions and some keys for HOTEL telephone.
• Y : Enable to disclose
• N : Disable
Y
VM_FUNCTION_ENABLE (For KX-HDV130/KX-HDV230)
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
BOOLEAN
Specifies whether to enable or disable the Voice Mail function.
• Y : Enable Voice Mail function
• N : Disable
Y
190 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
5.3.1 System Settings
DISPLAY_CALL_KEY_ENABLE
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Specifies whether call information is displayed on Line and BLF program/DSS keys.
• Y : Displayed
• N : Not displayed
N
LCD_SCREEN_TIMEOUT (For KX-HDV330/KX-HDV430)
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
INTEGER
Specifies the length of time before the LCD backlight turns off when the unit is idle.
• 0: 30 sec
• 1: 1 min
• 2: 5 min
• 3: 10 min
• 4: 30 min
• 5: 60 min
• 6: 120 min
• 7: 180 min
• 8: 300 min
• 9: Always On
1
LCD_ACTIVE_LEVEL (For KX-HDV330/KX-HDV430)
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
INTEGER
Specifies the backlight level of the LCD when it is active.
0–8
8
LCD_INACTIVE_LEVEL (For KX-HDV330/KX-HDV430)
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
INTEGER
Specifies the backlight level of the LCD when it is inactive.
• 0: Off
• 1: Low
0
DSS_LCD_ACTIVATION (For KX-HDV330/KX-HDV430)
Value Format INTEGER
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 191
5.3.1 System Settings
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Specifies the activation of the backlight of DSS units' LCD.
• 0: Off
• 1: On
• 2: Auto
2
DSS_LCD_BACKLIGHT (For KX-HDV330/KX-HDV430)
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
INTEGER
Specifies the backlight level of DSS units' LCD.
1–6
6
DSS_LCD_CONTRAST (For KX-HDV330/KX-HDV430)
Value Format INTEGER
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Specifies the contrast level of DSS units' LCD.
1–6
3
CALL_SETTINGS_MENU_ENABLE
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
BOOLEAN
Specifies whether the "Call Settings" setting is displayed in MENU and the Web user interface.
• Y : Displayed
• N : Not displayed
Y
ECO_MODE_MENU_ENABLE
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
BOOLEAN
Specifies whether the "ECO Mode" setting is displayed under MENU.
• Y : Enable displaying the ECO Mode function under MENU.
• N : Disable
Y
NOTIFICATION_MENU_ENABLE
Value Format
Description
Value Range
BOOLEAN
Specifies whether to display the notification settings under MENU.
• Y : Display the notification settings
• N : Do not display
Default Value Y
192 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
5.3.1 System Settings
NOTIFY_MISSEDCALL_ENABLE
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether to display 'Missed Calls' on the screen in standby mode.
Note
• This setting is available only when
"NOTIFICATION_MENU_ENABLE" is set to "Y".
Value Range • Y : Enable displaying 'Missed Calls' in standby mode.
• N : Disable
Default Value Y
Web User Interface Reference
Missed Call Notification - Message
NOTIFY_MISSEDCALL_LED_ENABLE
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether the LED is used to indicate a missed call
Note
• This setting is available only when
"NOTIFICATION_MENU_ENABLE" is set to "Y".
Value Range • Y : Enable LED indication for a missed call.
• N : Disable
Default Value Y
Web User Interface Reference
Missed Call Notification - LED
NOTIFY_VOICEMAIL_ENABLE
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether to display 'Voice MSG' on the screen in standby mode.
Note
• This setting is available only when
"NOTIFICATION_MENU_ENABLE" is set to "Y".
Value Range • Y : Enable displaying 'Voice MSG' in standby mode.
• N : Disable
Default Value Y
Web User Interface Reference
Voice Message Notification - Message
NOTIFY_VOICEMAIL_LED_ENABLE
Value Format BOOLEAN
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 193
5.3.1 System Settings
Description Specifies whether the LED is used to indicate a missed call
Note
• This setting is available only when
"NOTIFICATION_MENU_ENABLE" is set to "Y".
Value Range • Y : Enable LED indication for a missed call.
• N : Disable
Default Value Y
Web User Interface Reference
Voice Message Notification - LED
NOTIFY_VOICEMAIL_ALARM_ENABLE
Value Format
Description
BOOLEAN
Specifies whether an alarm sound is used to indicate a new voice message.
Value Range
Note
• This setting is available only when
"NOTIFICATION_MENU_ENABLE" is set to "Y".
• Y : Enable alarms sound for voice messages.
• N : Disable
Default Value Y
Web User Interface Reference
Voice Message Notification - Alarm
NOTIFY_NETWORKCAMERA_ENABLE (For KX-HDV430)
Value Format
Description
BOOLEAN
Specifies whether to display the Network Camera message icon on the screen.
Note
• This setting is available only when
"NOTIFICATION_MENU_ENABLE" is set to "Y".
Value Range • Y : Enable displaying the icon.
• N : Disable
Default Value Y
Web User Interface Reference
Network Camera Notification - Message (For KX-HDV430 ）
NOTIFY_NETWORKCAMERA_LED_ENABLE (For KX-HDV430)
Value Format BOOLEAN
194 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
5.3.1 System Settings
Description Specifies whether the LED is used to indicate a Network Camera alert.
Note
• This setting is available only when
"NOTIFICATION_MENU_ENABLE" is set to "Y".
Value Range • Y : Enable LED indication for Network Camera alerts.
• N : Disable
Default Value Y
Web User Interface Reference
Network Camera Notification - LED (For KX-HDV430 ）
NOTIFY_NETWORKCAMERA_ALARM_ENABLE (For KX-HDV430)
Value Format
Description
BOOLEAN
Specifies whether an alarm sound is used to indicate a Network
Camera alert.
Value Range
Note
• This setting is available only when
"NOTIFICATION_MENU_ENABLE" is set to "Y".
• Y : Enable alarms for Network Camera alerts.
• N : Disable
Default Value Y
Web User Interface Reference
Network Camera Notification - Alarm (For KX-HDV430 ）
NOTIFICATION_ALARM_TYPE
Value Format
Description
INTEGER
Specifies whether a voice mail alarm notification is used only the first time or every time.
Value Range
Default Value
Note
• This setting is available only when
"NOTIFICATION_MENU_ENABLE" is set to "Y".
• 0 : First time only
• 1 : Every time
0
CODEC_VAD_CNG_ENABLE
Value Format
Description
Value Range
BOOLEAN
Specifies whether to enable the VAD and CNG functions.
(VAD: Voice Activity Detector, CNG: Comfort Noise Generator)
• Y : Enable the VAD and CNG functions
• N : Disable
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 195
5.3.1 System Settings
Default Value N
BOOTLOG_SERVER_URI
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
STRING
Specifies the URI for a boot logging server.
Max. 256 characters
Empty string
DISPLAY_DIVERSION_ENABLE
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
BOOLEAN
Specifies whether the "Diversion" call information is displayed when receiving an incoming call.
• Y : Enable displaying the "Diversion" information
• N : Disable
N
ERROR_AUTO_REBOOT_TIME
Value Format INTEGER
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Specifies the amount of time, in hours, until the unit automatically reboots when the SIP registration has been removed for all accounts.
0, 1-72
(0: Disable)
0
HOME_DISPLAY_TYPE (For KX-HDV330/KX-HDV430)
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
INTEGER
Specifies the startup standby display.
• 0: Normal display 1
• 1: Normal display 2
• 2: Line display
• 3: Combined display
0
FUNCTION_DISPLAY_TYPE (For KX-HDV330/KX-HDV430)
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
INTEGER
Specifies the number and layout of the function key pages.
• 0: 8 items x 3 pages
• 1: 12 items x 2 pages
0
196 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
5.3.1 System Settings
FOCUS_OPERATION_ENABLE (For KX-HDV330/KX-HDV430)
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Specifies whether to change the focus or seize the line when you tap a line on the line display or combined display.
• Y : Change the focus
• N : Seize the line
N
INCOMING_DISPLAY_ENABLE (For KX-HDV330/KX-HDV430)
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
BOOLEAN
Specifies whether to enable displaying the details screen for incoming calls on the line display and combined display when there is an incoming call.
• Y : Enable the detail screen for incoming calls
• N : Disable
Y
DISPLAY_AUTO_CHANGE_ENABLE (For KX-HDV330/KX-HDV430)
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
BOOLEAN
Specifies whether to enable switching automatically to the line display or combined display when there are 2 or more active calls.
• Y : Enable automatic switching
• N : Disable
Y
NOTIFY_FUNC_KEY_ENABLE (For KX-HDV230/KX-HDV330/KX-HDV430)
Value Format
Description
Value Range
BOOLEAN
Specifies whether to enable notification of changes in the state of the function keys.
• Y : Enable notification
• N : Disable
Default Value Y
NOTIFY_DSS_KEY_ENABLE (For KX-HDV230/KX-HDV330/KX-HDV430)
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
BOOLEAN
Specifies whether to enable notification of changes in the state of the
DSS keys.
• Y : Enable notification
• N : Disable
Y
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 197
5.3.1 System Settings
IDLE_SOFT_KEY_1 (For KX-HDV330/KX-HDV430)
Value Format INTEGER
Description
Value Range
Specifies the function of soft key 1 on the line display or combined display in standby mode.
• 1: Call
• 2: Phonebook
• 3: Call History
• 4: Function
• 5: Park (Used when performing Park Retrieve)
• 6: ACD
• 7: Call Center/Call Centre
• 8: My Phone
• 9: Presence
• 10: FWD/DND
• 11: Paging
• 12: Group Pickup
• 13: Basic Settings
• 14: System Settings
• 15: Advanced Settings
• 16: Application
• 17: Network Camera (For KX-HDV430)
• 18: Comm. Camera (For KX-HDV430)
Default Value
Note
The following features are applied to the soft key only when the corresponding parameters are enabled. Otherwise, the soft key will remain in its original setting.
– Park: CALLPARK_NOTIFICATION_ENABLE_n
– ACD: ACD_ENABLE_n
– Call Center/Call Centre: CALL_CENTER_ENABLE_n
– My Phone: UC_ENABLE
– Presence: UC_ENABLE
– Paging: MPAGE_FUNCKEY_ENABLE
– Application: XMLAPP_ENABLE
1
IDLE_SOFT_KEY_2 (For KX-HDV330/KX-HDV430)
Value Format
Description
INTEGER
Specifies the function of soft key 2 on the line display or combined display in standby mode.
198 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
5.3.1 System Settings
Value Range • 1: Call
• 2: Phonebook
• 3: Call History
• 4: Function
• 5: Park (Used when performing Park Retrieve)
• 6: ACD
• 7: Call Center/Call Centre
• 8: My Phone
• 9: Presence
• 10: FWD/DND
• 11: Paging
• 12: Group Pickup
• 13: Basic Settings
• 14: System Settings
• 15: Advanced Settings
• 16: Application
• 17: Network Camera (For KX-HDV430)
• 18: Comm. Camera (For KX-HDV430)
Note
The following features are applied to the soft key only when the corresponding parameters are enabled. Otherwise, the soft key will remain in its original setting.
– Park: CALLPARK_NOTIFICATION_ENABLE_n
– ACD: ACD_ENABLE_n
– Call Center/Call Centre: CALL_CENTER_ENABLE_n
– My Phone: UC_ENABLE
– Presence: UC_ENABLE
– Paging: MPAGE_FUNCKEY_ENABLE
– Application: XMLAPP_ENABLE
2 Default Value
IDLE_SOFT_KEY_3 (For KX-HDV330/KX-HDV430)
Value Format
Description
INTEGER
Specifies the function of soft key 3 on the line display or combined display in standby mode.
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 199
5.3.1 System Settings
Value Range • 1: Call
• 2: Phonebook
• 3: Call History
• 4: Function
• 5: Park (Used when performing Park Retrieve)
• 6: ACD
• 7: Call Center/Call Centre
• 8: My Phone
• 9: Presence
• 10: FWD/DND
• 11: Paging
• 12: Group Pickup
• 13: Basic Settings
• 14: System Settings
• 15: Advanced Settings
• 16: Application
• 17: Network Camera (For KX-HDV430)
• 18: Comm. Camera (For KX-HDV430)
Note
The following features are applied to the soft key only when the corresponding parameters are enabled. Otherwise, the soft key will remain in its original setting.
– Park: CALLPARK_NOTIFICATION_ENABLE_n
– ACD: ACD_ENABLE_n
– Call Center/Call Centre: CALL_CENTER_ENABLE_n
– My Phone: UC_ENABLE
– Presence: UC_ENABLE
– Paging: MPAGE_FUNCKEY_ENABLE
– Application: XMLAPP_ENABLE
3 Default Value
IDLE_SOFT_KEY_4 (For KX-HDV330/KX-HDV430)
Value Format
Description
INTEGER
Specifies the function of soft key 4 on the line display or combined display in standby mode.
200 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
5.3.1 System Settings
Value Range • 1: Call
• 2: Phonebook
• 3: Call History
• 4: Function
• 5: Park (Used when performing Park Retrieve)
• 6: ACD
• 7: Call Center/Call Centre
• 8: My Phone
• 9: Presence
• 10: FWD/DND
• 11: Paging
• 12: Group Pickup
• 13: Basic Settings
• 14: System Settings
• 15: Advanced Settings
• 16: Application
• 17: Network Camera (For KX-HDV430)
• 18: Comm. Camera (For KX-HDV430)
Note
The following features are applied to the soft key only when the corresponding parameters are enabled. Otherwise, the soft key will remain in its original setting.
– Park: CALLPARK_NOTIFICATION_ENABLE_n
– ACD: ACD_ENABLE_n
– Call Center/Call Centre: CALL_CENTER_ENABLE_n
– My Phone: UC_ENABLE
– Presence: UC_ENABLE
– Paging: MPAGE_FUNCKEY_ENABLE
– Application: XMLAPP_ENABLE
4 Default Value
FORWARD_INCOMING_SOFTKEY_ENABLE (For KX-HDV330/KX-HDV430)
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
BOOLEAN
Specifies whether to display the "Call Forward" soft key on the line display or combined display when there is an incoming call and also
"Call Forward" is enabled.
• Y : Enable displaying the soft key
• N : Disable
Y
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 201
5.3.1 System Settings
SHARED_LINE_ICON_ENABLE (For KX-HDV330/KX-HDV430)
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Specifies whether to display an icon instead of the index number on shared lines on the line display or combined display.
• Y : Enable displaying the icon
• N : Disable
N
TALKING_SOFT_KEY_1 (For KX-HDV330/KX-HDV430)
Value Format
Description
Value Range
INTEGER
Specifies the function of soft key 1 while on a call on the line display or combined display.
• 0: Original
• 1: Off
• 2: Blind (Used when performing Blind Transfer)
• 3: Park (Used when performing Call Park)
• 4: Private Hold
• 5: Call Center/Call Centre
• 6: Phonebook
• 7: Call History
• 8: Function
• 9: Flash/Recall
• 10: Call (Video Call (For KX-HDV430) or Call)
Default Value
Note
The following features are applied to the soft key only when the corresponding parameters are enabled. Otherwise, the soft key will remain in its original setting.
– Blind: BLIND_TRANSFER_ENABLE
– Park: CALLPARK_KEY_ENABLE
– Private Hold: PRIVATE_HOLD_ENABLE
0
TALKING_SOFT_KEY_2 (For KX-HDV330/KX-HDV430)
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the function of soft key 2 while on a call on the line display or combined display.
202 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
5.3.1 System Settings
Value Range • 0: Original
• 1: Off
• 2: Blind (Used when performing Blind Transfer)
• 3: Park (Used when performing Call Park)
• 4: Private Hold
• 5: Call Center/Call Centre
• 6: Phonebook
• 7: Call History
• 8: Function
• 9: Flash/Recall
• 10: Call (Video Call (For KX-HDV430) or Call)
Note
The following features are applied to the soft key only when the corresponding parameters are enabled. Otherwise, the soft key will remain in its original setting.
– Blind: BLIND_TRANSFER_ENABLE
– Park: CALLPARK_KEY_ENABLE
– Private Hold: PRIVATE_HOLD_ENABLE
0 Default Value
TALKING_SOFT_KEY_3 (For KX-HDV330/KX-HDV430)
Value Format
Description
INTEGER
Specifies the function of soft key 3 while on a call on the line display or combined display.
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 203
5.3.1 System Settings
Value Range • 0: Original
• 1: Off
• 2: Blind (Used when performing Blind Transfer)
• 3: Park (Used when performing Call Park)
• 4: Private Hold
• 5: Call Center/Call Centre
• 6: Phonebook
• 7: Call History
• 8: Function
• 9: Flash/Recall
• 10: Call (Video Call (For KX-HDV430) or Call)
Note
The following features are applied to the soft key only when the corresponding parameters are enabled. Otherwise, the soft key will remain in its original setting.
– Blind: BLIND_TRANSFER_ENABLE
– Park: CALLPARK_KEY_ENABLE
– Private Hold: PRIVATE_HOLD_ENABLE
0 Default Value
TALKING_SOFT_KEY_4 (For KX-HDV330/KX-HDV430)
Value Format
Description
INTEGER
Specifies the function of soft key 4 while on a call on the line display or combined display.
204 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
5.3.1 System Settings
Value Range
Default Value
• 0: Original
• 1: Off
• 2: Blind (Used when performing Blind Transfer)
• 3: Park (Used when performing Call Park)
• 4: Private Hold
• 5: Call Center/Call Centre
• 6: Phonebook
• 7: Call History
• 8: Function
• 9: Flash/Recall
• 10: Call (Video Call (For KX-HDV430) or Call)
Note
The following features are applied to the soft key only when the corresponding parameters are enabled. Otherwise, the soft key will remain in its original setting.
– Blind: BLIND_TRANSFER_ENABLE
– Park: CALLPARK_KEY_ENABLE
– Private Hold: PRIVATE_HOLD_ENABLE
0
DELAY_RING_TIME_n
Parameter Name Example
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
PRIVATE_HOLD_ENABLE
Value Format
Description
For details about parameter names end with "_n", see
5.2.1 Configuration File Parameters
INTEGER
Specifies the length of time, in seconds, until the unit rings.
0–30
0: Disable
0
OFF_HOOK_MONITOR_ENABLE
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
BOOLEAN
Specifies whether to enable or disable the Off-hook Monitor function.
• Y : Enable Off-hook Monitor
• N : Disable
Y
BOOLEAN
Specifies whether to enable or disable "Private Hold".
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 205
5.3.1 System Settings
Value Range • Y : Enable private hold
• N : Disable
Default Value N
Web User Interface Reference
CONF_OWNER_OUT_ENABLE
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
BOOLEAN
Specifies whether to allow the remaining two parties in a three-party conference to continue the conversation if the conference originator leaves the conference call (Unattended Conference).
• Y : Enable Unattended Conference
• N : Disable
N
PCAP_ENABLE
Value Format
Description
Value Range
BOOLEAN
Specifies whether to enable or disable packet capturing using the
Wireshark utility (PCAP Remote).
• Y : Enable PCAP Remote
• N : Disable
N Default Value
PCAP_REMOTE_ID
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
PCAP_REMOTE_PASS
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
PCAP_REMOTE_PORT
Value Format
Description
STRING
Specifies the ID of the IP phone whose packets will be captured using the Wireshark utility (PCAP Remote).
1–16 characters
Empty string
STRING
Specifies the password of the IP phone whose packets will be captured using the Wireshark utility (PCAP Remote).
0, 6–64 characters
Empty string
INTEGER
Specifies the port of the IP phone to use for capturing packets using the Wireshark utility (PCAP Remote).
206 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
5.3.2 Basic Network Settings
Value Range
Default Value
1–65535
2002
DTMF_OUT_ENABLE
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
BOOLEAN
Specifies whether received outband DTMF signals are output audibly.
• Y : Enable audible outband DTMF
• N : Disable
Y
CANCEL_OPERATION_MODE
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
INTEGER
Specifies the operation of the [ / CANCEL ] button when a line is in use.
0: Cancel the current operation
1: Return to standby mode
0
5.3.2 Basic Network Settings
IP_ADDR_MODE
Value Format
Description
Value Range
INTEGER
Specifies the IP addressing mode.
• 0: IPv4
• 1: IPv6
• 2: IPv4&IPv6
Default Value 0
Web User Interface Reference
CONNECTION_TYPE
Value Format
Description
INTEGER
Specifies whether to assign the IP address automatically (DHCP) or manually (static) for IPv4.
Value Range • 0: Static
• 1: DHCP
Default Value 1
Web User Interface Reference
STATIC_IP_ADDRESS
Value Format IPADDR
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 207
5.3.2 Basic Network Settings
Description Specifies the IP address for the unit for IPv4.
Note
• This setting is available only when "CONNECTION_TYPE" is set to "0".
• When you specify this parameter, you must specify
"STATIC_SUBNET" together in a configuration file.
Value Range Max. 15 characters n.n.n.n [n=0–255]
Default Value Empty string
Web User Interface Reference
STATIC_SUBNET
Value Format
Description
IPADDR
Specifies the subnet mask for IPv4.
Note
• This setting is available only when "CONNECTION_TYPE" is set to "0".
• When you specify this parameter, you must specify
"STATIC_IP_ADDRESS" together in a configuration file.
Value Range Max. 15 characters n.n.n.n [n=0–255]
Default Value Empty string
Web User Interface Reference
STATIC_GATEWAY
Value Format
Description
IPADDR
Specifies the IP address of the default gateway for the IPv4 network where the unit is connected.
Value Range
Default Value
Note
• This setting is available only when "CONNECTION_TYPE" is set to "0".
• When you specify this parameter, you must specify
"STATIC_IP_ADDRESS" and "STATIC_SUBNET " together in a configuration file.
Max. 15 characters n.n.n.n [n=0–255]
Empty string
Web User Interface Reference
USER_DNS1_ADDR
Value Format IPADDR
208 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
5.3.2 Basic Network Settings
Description Specifies the IP address of the primary DNS server for IPv4.
Note
• This setting is available only when "CONNECTION_TYPE" is set to "0".
Value Range Max. 15 characters n.n.n.n [n=0–255]
Default Value Empty string
Web User Interface Reference
USER_DNS2_ADDR
Value Format
Description
IPADDR
Specifies the IP address of the secondary DNS server for IPv4.
Note
• This setting is available only when "CONNECTION_TYPE" is set to "0".
Value Range Max. 15 characters n.n.n.n [n=0–255]
Default Value Empty string
Web User Interface Reference
DHCP_DNS_ENABLE
Value Format
Description
BOOLEAN
Specifies whether to enable or disable using the DNS server obtained by DHCPv4.
Value Range
Note
• This setting is available only when "CONNECTION_TYPE" is set to "1".
• Y : Not use (use static DNS)
• N : Use DNS obtained by DHCPv4
Default Value N
Web User Interface Reference
DHCP_HOST_NAME
Value Format
Description
STRING
Specifies the host name to option12 in DHCPv4 or option15 in
DHCPv6.
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 209
5.3.2 Basic Network Settings
Value Range Max. 64 characters
Note
• If "{MODEL}" is included in this parameter, it will be replaced with the unit’s model name.
Default Value {MODEL}
Web User Interface Reference
DHCP_VENDOR_CLASS
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
STRING
Specifies the vendor class to option60 in DHCPv4 or option16 in
DHCPv6.
Max. 64 characters
Panasonic
CONNECTION_TYPE_IPV6
Value Format INTEGER
Description
Value Range
Specifies the IP address setting mode for IPv6.
• 0: Static
• 1: DHCP
• 2: Stateless Autoconfiguration
Default Value 1
Web User Interface Reference
STATIC_IP_ADDRESS_IPV6
Value Format IPADDR-V6
Description
Value Range
Specifies the IP address for IPv6.
Max. 39 characters n:n:n:n:n:n:n:n [n=0-FFFF, abbreviation available]
Default Value Empty string
Web User Interface Reference
PREFIX_IPV6
Value Format
Description
Value Range
INTEGER
Specifies the prefix for IPv6.
0–128
Default Value 64
Web User Interface Reference
210 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
5.3.3 Ethernet Port Settings
STATIC_GATEWAY_IPV6
Value Format IPADDR-V6
Description
Value Range
Specifies the default gateway for IPv6.
Max. 39 characters n:n:n:n:n:n:n:n [n=0-FFFF, abbreviation available]
Default Value Empty string
Web User Interface Reference
USER_DNS1_ADDR_IPV6
Value Format
Description
Value Range
IPADDR-V6
Specifies the IP address of primary DNS server for IPv6.
Max. 39 characters n:n:n:n:n:n:n:n [n=0-FFFF, abbreviation available]
Default Value Empty string
Web User Interface Reference
USER_DNS2_ADDR_IPV6
Value Format
Description
Value Range
IPADDR-V6
Specifies the IP address of secondary DNS server for IPv6.
Max. 39 characters n:n:n:n:n:n:n:n [n=0-FFFF, abbreviation available]
Default Value Empty string
Web User Interface Reference
DHCP_DNS_ENABLE_IPV6
Value Format
Description
BOOLEAN
Specifies whether to enable or disable using the DNS server obtained by DHCPv6.
Value Range • Y : Not use (use static DNS)
• N : Use DNS obtained by DHCPv6
Default Value N
Web User Interface Reference
5.3.3 Ethernet Port Settings
PHY_MODE_LAN
Value Format
Description
INTEGER
Specifies the link speed and duplex mode of the LAN port.
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 211
5.3.3 Ethernet Port Settings
Value Range • 1: Auto
• 2: 100Mbps/Full Duplex
• 3: 100Mbps/Half Duplex
• 4: 10Mbps/Full Duplex
• 5: 10Mbps/Half Duplex
Default Value 1
Web User Interface Reference
PHY_MODE_PC
Value Format
Description
Value Range
INTEGER
Specifies the link speed and duplex mode of the PC port.
• 1: Auto
• 2: 100Mbps/Full Duplex
• 3: 100Mbps/Half Duplex
• 4: 10Mbps/Full Duplex
• 5: 10Mbps/Half Duplex
Default Value 1
Web User Interface Reference
VLAN_ENABLE
Value Format
Description
BOOLEAN
Specifies whether to use the VLAN feature to perform VoIP communication securely.
Note
• You should specify " Y " for only one of " LLDP_ENABLE " or
" VLAN_ENABLE ".
If " Y " is specified for two or more of the parameters above, the settings are prioritized as follows: " VLAN_ENABLE " >
" LLDP_ENABLE ". Therefore, if " Y " is specified for both
" VLAN_ENABLE " and " LLDP_ENABLE ", the VLAN-related settings are used.
Value Range • Y : Enable
• N : Disable
Default Value N
Web User Interface Reference
VLAN_ID_IP_PHONE
Value Format
Description
Value Range
INTEGER
Specifies the VLAN ID for this unit.
0–4094
212 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
5.3.3 Ethernet Port Settings
Default Value 2
Web User Interface Reference
VLAN_PRI_IP_PHONE
Value Format INTEGER
Description
Value Range
Specifies the priority number for the unit.
0–7
Default Value 7
Web User Interface Reference
VLAN_ID_PC
Value Format
Description
Value Range
INTEGER
Specifies the VLAN ID for the PC.
0–4094
Default Value 1
Web User Interface Reference
VLAN_PRI_PC
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
INTEGER
Specifies the priority number for the PC.
0–7
0
Web User Interface Reference
VLAN_EGTAG_PC_ENABLE
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
BOOLEAN
Specifies whether to enable removing tag information from packets to the PC port when VLAN is enabled.
• Y : Enable
• N : Disable
N
LLDP_ENABLE
Value Format BOOLEAN
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 213
5.3.3 Ethernet Port Settings
Description Specifies whether to enable or disable the LLDP-MED feature.
Note
• You should specify " Y " for only one of " LLDP_ENABLE ", or
" VLAN_ENABLE ". If " Y " is specified for two or more of the parameters above, the settings are prioritized as follows:
VLAN_ENABLE > LLDP_ENABLE . Therefore, if " Y " is specified for both " VLAN_ENABLE " and " LLDP_ENABLE ", the VLANrelated settings are used.
Value Range • Y : Enable LLDP-MED
• N : Disable
Default Value Y
Web User Interface Reference
LLDP_INTERVAL
Value Format
Description
INTEGER
Specifies the interval, in seconds, between sending each LLDP frame.
Value Range
Default Value
1–3600
30
Web User Interface Reference
LLDP_VLAN_ID_PC
Value Format
Description
INTEGER
Specifies the VLAN ID for the PC when LLDP is on.
Value Range
Default Value
0–4094
0
Web User Interface Reference
LLDP_VLAN_PRI_PC
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
INTEGER
Specifies the VLAN Priority for the PC when LLDP is on.
0–7
0
Web User Interface Reference
CDP_ENABLE
Value Format
Description
BOOLEAN
Specifies whether to enable the CDP feature.
214 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
5.3.4 Pre-Provisioning Settings
Value Range • Y : Enable CDP
• N : Disable
Default Value N
Web User Interface Reference
CDP_INTERVAL
Value Format
Description
INTEGER
Specifies the interval, in seconds, between sending each CDP frames.
Value Range
Default Value
1–3600
30
Web User Interface Reference
5.3.4 Pre-Provisioning Settings
SIPPNP_PROV_ENABLE
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
BOOLEAN
Specifies whether to enable or disable the SIP PNP provisioning.
• Y : Enable SIP PnP provisioning
• N : Disable
Y
OPTION66_ENABLE
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
BOOLEAN
Specifies whether to enable or disable the DHCP option 66 provisioning.
Note
• The unit will try to download configuration files through the
TFTP server, the IP address or FQDN of which is specified in the option number 66 field.
• Y : Enable DHCP option66 provisioning
• N : Disable
Y
OPTION159_PROV_ENABLE
Value Format
Description
Value Range
BOOLEAN
Specifies whether to enable or disable the DHCP option159 provisioning.
• Y : Enable DHCP option159 provisioning
• N : Disable
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 215
5.3.5 Provisioning Settings
Default Value Y
OPTION160_PROV_ENABLE
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
BOOLEAN
Specifies whether to enable or disable the DHCP option160 provisioning.
• Y : Enable DHCP option160 provisioning
• N : Disable
Y
DHCPV6_OPTION17_PROV_ENABLE
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
BOOLEAN
Specifies whether to enable or disable DHCPv6 option17 provisioning.
• Y : Enable DHCPv6 option17 provisioning
• N : Disable
Y
5.3.5 Provisioning Settings
CFG_STANDARD_FILE_PATH
Value Format
Description
STRING
Specifies the URL of the standard configuration file, which is used when every unit needs different settings.
Value Range Max. 384 characters
Note
• If this URL ends with "/" (slash), " Config{mac}.cfg
" is automatically added at the end of the URL. For example,
CFG_STANDARD_FILE_PATH ="http:// host/dir/" becomes
CFG_STANDARD_FILE_PATH ="http://host/dir/
Config{mac}.cfg
".
•
For details about the formats, see 2.1.3 Server Address
Default Value Empty string
Web User Interface Reference
CFG_PRODUCT_FILE_PATH
Value Format STRING
Description Specifies the URL of the product configuration file, which is used when all units with the same model number need the same settings.
216 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
5.3.5 Provisioning Settings
Value Range Max. 384 characters
Note
• If this URL ends with "/" (slash), " {MODEL}.cfg
" is automatically added at the end of the URL. For example,
CFG_PRODUCT_FILE_PATH ="http://host/ dir/" becomes
CFG_PRODUCT_FILE_PATH ="http:// host/dir/ {MODEL}.cfg
".
• For details about the formats, see
.
Default Value Empty string
Web User Interface Reference
CFG_MASTER_FILE_PATH
Value Format
Description
Value Range
STRING
Specifies the URL of the master configuration file, which is used when all units need the same settings.
Max. 384 characters
Note
• If this URL ends with "/" (slash), " sip.cfg
" is automatically added at the end of the URL. For example,
CFG_MASTER_FILE_PATH ="http://host/ dir/" becomes
CFG_MASTER_FILE_PATH ="http:// host/dir/ sip.cfg
".
• For details about the formats, see
.
Default Value Empty string
Web User Interface Reference
CFG_CYCLIC
Value Format
Description
BOOLEAN
Specifies whether the unit periodically checks for updates of configuration files.
Value Range • Y : Enable periodic synchronization
• N : Disable
Default Value N
Web User Interface Reference
CFG_CYCLIC_INTVL
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
INTEGER
Specifies the interval, in minutes, between periodic checks for updates of the configuration files.
1–40320
10080
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 217
5.3.5 Provisioning Settings
Web User Interface Reference
CFG_RESYNC_TIME
Value Format
Description
Value Range
STRING
Specifies the time (hour:minute) that the unit checks for updates of configuration files.
00:00–23:59
Note
• If the value for this setting is any valid value other than an empty string, the unit downloads the configuration files at the fixed time.
• If the value for this setting is an empty string, downloading the configuration files at the fixed time are disabled.
Default Value Empty string
Web User Interface Reference
CFG_RTRY_INTVL
Value Format
Description
INTEGER
Specifies the period of time, in minutes, that the unit will retry checking for an update of the configuration files after a configuration file access error has occurred.
Note
• This setting is available only when " CFG_CYCLIC " is set to " Y ".
1–1440
30
Value Range
Default Value
CFG_RESYNC_FROM_SIP
Value Format
Description
STRING
Specifies the value of the "Event" header sent from the SIP server to the unit so that the unit can access the configuration files on the provisioning server.
Value Range
Default Value
Max. 15 characters check-sync
Web User Interface Reference
CFG_RESYNC_ACTION
Value Format
Description
INTEGER
Specifies the value of the action after received resync NOTIFY.
218 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
5.3.5 Provisioning Settings
Value Range • 0: Provisioning
• 1: TR-069 Inform
• 2: Reboot
0 Default Value
CFG_FILE_KEY2
Value Format
Description
Value Range
STRING
Specifies the encryption key (password) used to decrypt configuration files.
Note
• If the extension of the configuration file is ".e2c", the configuration file will be decrypted using this key.
32 characters
Note
• If an empty string is set for this parameter, decryption with this value is disabled.
Empty string Default Value
CFG_FILE_KEY3
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
STRING
Specifies the encryption key (password) used to decrypt configuration files.
Note
• If the extension of the configuration file is ".e3c", the configuration file will be decrypted using this key.
32 characters
Note
• If an empty string is set for this parameter, decryption with this value is disabled.
Empty string
CFG_FILE_KEY_LENGTH
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
INTEGER
Specifies the key lengths in bits used to decrypt configuration files.
128,192, 256
192
CFG_ROOT_CERTIFICATE_PATH
Value Format STRING
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 219
5.3.5 Provisioning Settings
Description
Value Range
Default Value
CFG_CLIENT_CERT_PATH
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Specifies the URI where the root certificate is stored.
Note
• Changing this setting may require restarting the unit.
Max. 384 characters
Note
•
For details about the formats, see 2.1.3 Server Address
Empty string
STRING
Specifies the URI where the client certificate is stored.
Max. 384 characters
Note
•
For details about the formats, see 2.1.3 Server Address
Empty string Default Value
CFG_PKEY_PATH
Value Format
Description
Value Range
STRING
Specifies the URI where the private key is stored.
Max. 384 characters
Note
•
For details about the formats, see 2.1.3 Server Address
Empty string Default Value
HTTP_SSL_VERIFY
Value Format
Description
INTEGER
Specifies whether to enable the verification of the root certificate.
220 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
5.3.6 Firmware Update Settings
Value Range • 0: No verification of root certificate
• 1: Simple verification of root certificate
• 2: Precise verification of root certificate
Note
• If set to "0", the verification of the root certificate is disabled.
• If set to "1", the verification of the root certificate is enabled. In this case, the validity of the certificate’s date, certificate’s chain, and the confirmation of the root certificate will be verified.
• If set to "2", precise certificate verification is enabled. In this case, the validity of the server name will be verified in addition to the items verified when "1" is set.
• If the unit has not obtained the current time, verification will not be performed irrelevant of this setting. In order to perform verification it is necessary to first set up the NTP server.
0 Default Value
CFG_RESYNC_DURATION
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
INTEGER
Specifies, in minutes, a time range during which connected units can access the server. Units will download configuration files at a random time within this range.
0–1439
0
CFG_BOOTUP_DURATION_ENABLE
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
BOOLEAN
Specifies whether to enable "CFG_RESYNC_TIME" and
"CFG_RESYNC_DURATION" at startup.
• Y : Enable
• N : Disable
Y
5.3.6 Firmware Update Settings
FIRM_UPGRADE_ENABLE
Value Format BOOLEAN
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 221
5.3.6 Firmware Update Settings
Description Specifies whether to perform firmware updates when the unit detects a newer version of firmware.
Note
• Manual firmware updates from the Web user interface (→ see
4.7.3 Upgrade Firmware (For KX-HDV130/KX-HDV230) ) can
be performed regardless of this setting. (For KX-HDV130/
KX-HDV230)
• Firmware updates using TR-069 can be performed regardless of this setting.
Value Range • Y : Enable firmware updates
• N : Disable firmware updates
Default Value Y
Web User Interface Reference
FIRM_FILE_PATH
Value Format
Description
STRING
Specifies the URL where the firmware file is stored.
Note
• This setting is available only when " FIRM_UPGRADE_ENABLE " is set to " Y ".
Max. 384 characters Value Range
Note
• If "{fwver}" is included in this parameter, it will be replaced with the value specified in " FIRM_VERSION ".
For details about the formats, see 2.1.3 Server Address
Default Value Empty string
Web User Interface Reference
FIRM_VERSION
Value Format STRING
Description
Value Range
Specifies the firmware version of the unit.
Max. 32 characters
Default Value Empty string
Web User Interface Reference
Firmware Version (For KX-HDV330/KX-HDV430)
FWDL_RANDOM_DURATION
Value Format INTEGER
222 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
5.3.7 HTTP Settings
Description
Value Range
Default Value
HTTP_AUTH_ID
Value Format
Description
Specifies, in minutes, a time range during which connected units can access the server. Units will download the firmware file at a random time within this range.
0–1439
0
5.3.7 HTTP Settings
HTTP_VER
Value Format
Description
Value Range
INTEGER
Specifies which version of the HTTP protocol to use for HTTP communication.
• 1: Use HTTP/1.0
• 0: Use HTTP/1.1
Default Value
Note
• For this unit, it is strongly recommended that you specify "1" for this setting. However, if the HTTP server does not function well with HTTP/1.0, try changing the setting "0".
1
Web User Interface Reference
HTTP_USER_AGENT
Value Format
Description
Value Range
STRING
Specifies the text string to send as the user agent in the header of
HTTP requests.
Max. 64 characters
Note
• If "{mac}" is included in this parameter, it will be replaced with the unit’s MAC address in lower-case.
• If "{MAC}" is included in this parameter, it will be replaced with the unit’s MAC address in upper-case.
• If "{MODEL}" is included in this parameter, it will be replaced with the unit’s model name.
• If "{fwver}" is included in this parameter, it will be replaced with the firmware version of the unit.
Default Value Panasonic_{MODEL}/{fwver} ({mac})
Web User Interface Reference
STRING
Specifies the authentication ID required to access the HTTP server.
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 223
5.3.7 HTTP Settings
Value Range
Default Value
Max. 128 characters
Empty string
Web User Interface Reference
HTTP_AUTH_PASS
Value Format
Description
STRING
Specifies the authentication password required to access the HTTP server.
Value Range
Default Value
Max. 128 characters
Empty string
Web User Interface Reference
HTTP_PROXY_ENABLE
Value Format
Description
Value Range
BOOLEAN
Specifies whether to enable or disable the HTTP proxy feature.
• Y : Enable HTTP proxy connect
• N : Disable
Default Value N
Web User Interface Reference
HTTP_PROXY_ADDR
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
STRING
Specifies the IP address or FQDN of the proxy server.
Max. 256 characters
Empty string
Web User Interface Reference
HTTP_PROXY_PORT
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
INTEGER
Specifies the port of the proxy server.
1–65535
8080
Web User Interface Reference
HTTP_PROXY_ID
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
STRING
Specifies the user ID for connecting HTTP proxy.
Max. 128 characters
Empty string
224 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
5.3.8 HTTPD/WEB Settings
HTTP_PROXY_PASS
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
STRING
Specifies the password for connecting HTTP proxy.
Max. 128 characters
Empty string
5.3.8 HTTPD/WEB Settings
HTTPD_LISTEN_PORT
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
INTEGER
Specifies the port number of own HTTP server.
80, 1024–49151
80
HTTPD_PORTOPEN_AUTO
Value Format
Description
Value Range
BOOLEAN
Specifies whether the unit’s Web port is always open.
• Y : Web port is always open
• N : Web port is closed [can be opened temporarily through phone user interface programming]
Notice
• If you want to set to " Y ", please fully recognize the possibility of unauthorized access to the unit through the Web user interface and change this setting at your own risk. In addition, please take full security measures for connecting to an external network and control all passwords for logging in to the Web user interface.
N Default Value
HTTPD_PORTCLOSE_TM
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
USER_ID
Value Format
Description
INTEGER
Specifies port close time when keeping the no action.
1–1440
30
STRING
Specifies the account ID used to access the Web user interface with the User account.
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 225
5.3.8 HTTPD/WEB Settings
Value Range Max. 16 characters
(except !, ", #, $, %, &, ', (, ),@, *, +, ,, /, :, ;, <, =, >, ?, [, ], ^, `, {, |, },
~, \ and space)
Note
• An empty string is not allowed.
• A hyphen (-) cannot be used as the first character.
user Default Value
USER_PASS
Value Format
Description
Value Range
STRING
Specifies the password to use to authenticate the User account when logging in to the Web user interface.
6–64 characters
(except !, ", #, $, %, &, ', (, ), @,*, +, ,, /, :, ;, <, =, >, ?, [, ], ^, `, {, |, },
~, \ and space)
Note
• A hyphen (-) cannot be used as the first character.
Default Value Empty string (only before a user accesses the Web user interface for the first time)
Web User Interface Reference
ADMIN_ID
Value Format
Description
Value Range
STRING
Specifies the account ID used to access the Web user interface with the Admin account.
Max. 16 characters
(except !, ", #, $, %, &, ', (, ), @,*, +, ,, /, :, ;, <, =, >, ?, [, ], ^, `, {, |, },
~, \ and space)
Note
• An empty string is not allowed.
• A hyphen (-) cannot be used as the first character.
admin Default Value
ADMIN_PASS
Value Format
Description
STRING
Specifies the password to use to authenticate the Administrator account when logging in to the Web user interface.
226 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
5.3.9 TR-069 Settings
Value Range 6–64 characters
(except !, ", #, $, %, &, ', (, ),@, *, +, ,, /, :, ;, <, =, >, ?, [, ], ^, `, {, |, },
~, \ and space)
Note
• A hyphen (-) cannot be used as the first character.
Default Value adminpass
Web User Interface Reference
5.3.9 TR-069 Settings
ACS_URL
Value Format
Description
STRING
Specifies the URL of the Auto-Configuration Server for using TR-069.
Note
• This parameter must be in the form of a valid HTTP or HTTPS
URL, as defined in RFC 3986.
Max. 256 characters
Empty string
Value Range
Default Value
ACS_USER_ID
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
STRING
Specifies the user ID for the Auto-Configuration Server for using
TR-069.
Max. 256 characters (except ", &, ', :, <, >, and space)
Empty string
ACS_PASS
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
STRING
Specifies the user password for the Auto-Configuration Server for using TR-069.
Max. 256 characters (except ", &, ', :, <, >, and space)
Empty string
PERIODIC_INFORM_ENABLE
Value Format
Description
Value Range
BOOLEAN
Specifies whether or not the CPE (Customer Premises Equipment) must periodically send CPE information to the ACS (Auto-
Configuration Server) using the Inform method call.
• Y : Enable
• N : Disable
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 227
5.3.9 TR-069 Settings
Default Value N
PERIODIC_INFORM_INTERVAL
Value Format
Description
INTEGER
Specifies the interval length, in seconds, when the CPE must attempt to connect with the ACS and call the Inform method.
Value Range
Default Value
Note
• This setting is available only when
" PERIODIC_INFORM_ENABLE " is set to " Y ".
30–2419200
86400
PERIODIC_INFORM_TIME
Value Format
Description
Value Range
STRING
Specifies the time (UTC) to determine when the CPE will initiate the periodic Inform method calls.
Note
• Each Inform call must occur at this reference time plus or minus an integer multiple of the
" PERIODIC_INFORM_INTERVAL ". This
" PERIODIC_INFORM_TIME " parameter is used only to set the
"phase" of the periodic Informs. The actual value can be arbitrarily set far into the past or future.
For example, if " PERIODIC_INFORM_INTERVAL " is set to
86400 (one day) and if " PERIODIC_INFORM_TIME " is set to midnight on a certain day, then periodic Informs will occur every day at midnight, starting from the set date.
• If the time is set to "unknown time", the start time depends on the CPE’s settings. However, the
" PERIODIC_INFORM_INTERVAL " must still be adhered to.
If absolute time is not available to the CPE, its periodic Inform behavior must be the same as if the
" PERIODIC_INFORM_TIME " parameter was set to the
"unknown time".
• Time zones other than UTC are not supported.
4–32 characters date and time format
0001-01-01T00:00:00Z Default Value
CON_REQ_USER_ID
Value Format
Description
Value Range
STRING
Specifies the user name used to authenticate an ACS making a
Connection Request to the CPE.
Max. 256 characters
228 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
5.3.9 TR-069 Settings
Default Value
CON_REQ_PASS
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Empty string
STRING
Specifies the password used to authenticate an ACS making a
Connection Request to the CPE.
Note
• When the " CON_REQ_USER_ID " parameter is specified, an empty string for this parameter is not allowed.
Max. 256 characters
Empty string
ANNEX_G_STUN_ENABLE
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
BOOLEAN
Specifies whether or not the CPE can use STUN. This applies only to the use of STUN in association with the ACS to allow UDP
Connection Requests.
• Y : Enable
• N : Disable
N
ANNEX_G_STUN_SERV_ADDR
Value Format
Description
STRING
Specifies the host name or IP address of the STUN server for the
CPE to send Binding Requests.
Value Range
Default Value
Note
• This setting is available only when " ANNEX_G_STUN_ENABLE " is set to " Y ".
• If the value for this setting is an empty string and
" ANNEX_G_STUN_ENABLE " is set to " Y ", the CPE must use the address of the ACS extracted from the host portion of the ACS
URL.
Max. 256 characters
Empty string
ANNEX_G_STUN_SERV_PORT
Value Format INTEGER
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 229
5.3.9 TR-069 Settings
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Specifies the port number of the STUN server for the CPE to send
Binding Requests.
Note
• This setting is available only when " ANNEX_G_STUN_ENABLE " is set to " Y ".
1–65535
3478
ANNEX_G_STUN_USER_ID
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
ANNEX_G_STUN_PASS
Value Format
Description
STRING
Specifies the STUN user name to be used in Binding Requests (only if message integrity has been requested by the STUN server).
Note
• If the value for this setting is an empty string, the CPE must not send STUN Binding Requests with message integrity.
Max. 256 characters (except ", &, ', :, <, >, and space)
Empty string
Value Range
Default Value
STRING
Specifies the STUN password to be used in computing the
MESSAGE-INTEGRITY attribute used in Binding Requests (only if message integrity has been requested by the STUN server). When read, this parameter returns an empty string, regardless of the actual value.
Max. 256 characters (except ", &, ', :, <, >, and space)
Empty string
ANNEX_G_STUN_MAX_KEEP_ALIVE
Value Format
Description
INTEGER
Specifies the maximum period, in seconds, that STUN Binding
Requests must be sent by the CPE for the purpose of maintaining the binding in the Gateway. This applies specifically to Binding Requests sent from the UDP Connection Request address and port.
Value Range
Default Value
Note
• This setting is available only when " ANNEX_G_STUN_ENABLE " is set to " Y ".
1–3600
300
230 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
5.3.9 TR-069 Settings
ANNEX_G_STUN_MIN_KEEP_ALIVE
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the minimum period, in seconds, that STUN Binding
Requests can be sent by the CPE for the purpose of maintaining the binding in the Gateway. This limit applies only to Binding Requests sent from the UDP Connection Request address and port, and only those that do not contain the BINDING-CHANGE attribute.
Value Range
Default Value
Note
• This setting is available only when " ANNEX_G_STUN_ENABLE " is set to " Y ".
1–3600
30
UDP_CON_REQ_ADDR_NOTIFY_LIMIT
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
INTEGER
Specifies the minimum time, in seconds, between Active Notifications resulting from changes to the "UDPConnectionRequestAddress" (if
Active Notification is enabled).
0–65535
0
DEVICE_PROVISIONING_CODE
Value Format
Description
Value Range
STRING
Specifies the device provisioning code for use with TR-106 parameters.
Max. 64 characters
Default Value Empty string
TR069_REGISTERING
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
STRING
Specifies the line status that TR-069 outputs while the line is being registered.
Max.16 characters
Error
TR069_REGISTERED
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
STRING
Specifies the line status that TR-069 outputs when the line has been registered.
Max.16 characters
Registering
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 231
5.3.10 XML Settings
5.3.10 XML Settings
XMLAPP_ENABLE
Value Format
Description
Value Range
BOOLEAN
Specifies whether to enable the XML application feature.
• Y : Enable XML application
• N : Disable
Default Value N
Web User Interface Reference
XMLAPP_USERID
Value Format
Description
STRING
Specifies the authentication ID required to access the XML application server.
Value Range
Default Value
Max. 128 characters
Empty string
Web User Interface Reference
XMLAPP_USERPASS
Value Format
Description
STRING
Specifies the authentication password used to access the XML application server.
Value Range
Default Value
Max. 128 characters
Empty string
Web User Interface Reference
XMLAPP_LDAP_URL
Value Format
Description
STRING
Specifies the URL that is accessed when the phonebook is accessed, to check for XML data.
Value Range
Default Value
Max. 256 characters
Empty string
Web User Interface Reference
XMLAPP_LDAP_USERID
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
STRING
Specifies the authentication ID required to access the LDAP server.
Max. 128 characters
Empty string
232 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
5.3.10 XML Settings
Web User Interface Reference
XMLAPP_LDAP_USERPASS
Value Format
Description
STRING
Specifies the authentication password used to access the LDAP server.
Value Range
Default Value
Max. 128 characters
Empty string
Web User Interface Reference
XMLAPP_NPB_SEARCH_TIMER
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
INTEGER
Specifies the time which is for searching XML phonebook.
1–65535
30
XMLAPP_LDAP_MAXRECORD
Value Format
Description
INTEGER
Specifies the maximum number of search results to be returned by the LDAP server.
Value Range
Default Value
20–500
20
Web User Interface Reference
XML_HTTPD_PORT
Value Format
Description
INTEGER
Specifies the local HTTP port for XML application.
Value Range
Default Value
1–65535
6666
Web User Interface Reference
XML_ERROR_INFORMATION
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
BOOLEAN
Specifies whether to display an error information when an error occurs.
• Y : Error information is displayed
• N : Error information is not displayed
Y
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 233
5.3.10 XML Settings
XMLAPP_START_URL
Value Format STRING
Description Specifies the URL that is accessed when the unit starts up, to check for XML data.
Value Range
Default Value
Max. 256 characters
Empty string
Web User Interface Reference
XMLAPP_INITIAL_URL
Value Format
Description
STRING
Specifies the URL that is accessed when the application is started from the unit’s menu, to check for XML data.
Max. 256 characters Value Range
Default Value Empty string
Web User Interface Reference
XMLAPP_INCOMING_URL
Value Format
Description
STRING
Specifies the URL that is accessed when the unit receives a call, to check for XML data.
Value Range
Default Value
Max. 256 characters
Empty string
Web User Interface Reference
XMLAPP_TALKING_URL
Value Format
Description
STRING
Specifies the URL that is accessed when the unit is on a call, to check for XML data.
Value Range
Default Value
Max. 256 characters
Empty string
Web User Interface Reference
XMLAPP_MAKECALL_URL
Value Format
Description
STRING
Specifies the URL that is accessed when the unit makes a call, to check for XML data.
Value Range
Default Value
Max. 256 characters
Empty string
Web User Interface Reference
234 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
5.3.10 XML Settings
XMLAPP_CALLLOG_URL
Value Format STRING
Description Specifies the URL that is accessed when the call log is accessed, to check for XML data.
Value Range
Default Value
Max. 256 characters
Empty string
Web User Interface Reference
XMLAPP_IDLING_URL
Value Format
Description
STRING
Specifies the URL that is accessed when the unit is idle, to check for
XML data.
Max. 256 characters Value Range
Default Value Empty string
Web User Interface Reference
XML_INITIATE_KEY_SOFT1 (For KX-HDV130/KX-HDV230)
Value Format
Description
BOOLEAN
Specifies whether to enable the XML application or operate the telephone normally, when the corresponding button is pressed during standby mode.
Value Range • Y : Enable XML application
• N : Normal operation
Default Value N
Web User Interface Reference
XML_INITIATE_KEY_SOFT2 (For KX-HDV130/KX-HDV230)
Value Format
Description
BOOLEAN
Specifies whether to enable the XML application or operate the telephone normally, when the corresponding button is pressed during standby mode.
Value Range • Y : Enable XML application
• N : Normal operation
Default Value N
Web User Interface Reference
XML_INITIATE_KEY_SOFT3 (For KX-HDV130/KX-HDV230)
Value Format BOOLEAN
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 235
5.3.10 XML Settings
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Specifies whether to enable the XML application or operate the telephone normally, when the corresponding button is pressed during standby mode.
• Y : Enable XML application
• N : Normal operation
N
Web User Interface Reference
XMLAPP_FFKEY_ENABLE
Value Format
Description
BOOLEAN
Specifies whether to enable the XML application or operate the telephone normally, when the corresponding button is pressed.
Value Range • Y : XML Mode
• N : Normal Telephone Mode
Default Value N
Web User Interface Reference
XML_SOFT_KEY_NAMEx (For KX-HDV130/KX-HDV230)
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
STRING x=1 ‐ 3
Specifies the name of Soft Key A/B/C assigned to an XML application.
Max. 16 characters
XML
XMLAPP_URL_SOFT_KEYx (For KX-HDV130/KX-HDV230)
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
STRING x=1 ‐ 3
Specifies the URL that is accessed when the soft key A/B/C is pressed.
Max. 256 characters ("&" may also be used)
Empty string
XMLAPP_URL_FLEX_BUTTONx
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
STRING x=1 ‐ 2 — KX-HDV130 x=1 ‐ 24 — KX-HDV230/KX-HDV330/KX-HDV430
Specifies the URL that is accessed when the FFx key is pressed.
Max. 256 characters ("&" may also be used)
Empty string
236 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
5.3.10 XML Settings
XMLAPP_STATUSBAR_ENABLE (For KX-HDV330/KX-HDV430)
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Specifies whether to enable or disable the Status Bar XML application feature.
• Y : Enable the Status Bar XML application feature
• N : Disable
Y
SYS_HOME_MENU_XML_NAMEx (For KX-HDV330/KX-HDV430)
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
STRING x=1–6
Specifies the name of an icon for an XML feature on the Home menu.
Max. 24 characters x=1:Application 1 x=2:Application 2 x=3:Application 3 x=4:Application 4 x=5:Application 5 x=6:Application 6
SYS_HOME_MENU_XML_URLx (For KX-HDV330/KX-HDV430)
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
STRING x=1–6
Specifies the URL that is accessed by an XML feature on the Home menu.
Max. 256 characters ("&" may also be used.)
Empty string
SYS_HOME_MENU_XML_ICONx (For KX-HDV330/KX-HDV430)
Value Format
Description
Value Range
INTEGER x=1–6
Specifies feature of an icon on the Home menu.
1–35
Default Value 13
Icon Type
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 237
5.3.10 XML Settings
11 13 14 15 17 18 19 30 31 32
33 34 35
Note
• No.12, 16, 20–29: Blank
XML_PHONEBOOK_URL
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
STRING
Specifies the URL to download the XML phonebook file from.
Max.256 characters
Empty string
XML_PHONEBOOK_CYCLIC_INTVL
Value Format INTEGER
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Specifies the interval, in minutes, between periodic checks for updates to the XML phonebook. If this parameter is set to "0", the timing is the same as that for updating the configuration files.
0, 1–40320
0
XML_CURSOR_SKIP_ENABLE
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
BOOLEAN
Selects whether to skip displaying the cursor on line 1 (id=1) of the display on the XML menu.
• Y : Enable skipping the cursor display on line 1 (id=1)
• N : Disable
N
XMLAPP_URL_REDIAL_KEY
Value Format
Description
STRING
When the redial key is defined by an XML element, specifies the URL that is accessed when the [ / / REDIAL ] key is pressed.
Value Range
Default Value
Max. 256 characters
(The ampersand [&] character is available)
Empty string
XMLAPP_RCV_IP_ADDRESSx
Value Format IPADDR
238 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
5.3.11 XSI Settings
Description
Value Range
Default Value
X=1-20
Specifies the IP addresses from which XML (POST) may be received.
Note
• If no IP addresses are specified, XML (POST) can be received from any IP address
Max. 15 characters n.n.n.n [n=0-255]
Empty string
5.3.11 XSI Settings
XSI_ENABLE
Value Format
Description
Value Range
BOOLEAN
Specifies whether to enable or disable the Xsi service.
• Y : Enable Xsi service
• N : Disable
Default Value N
Web User Interface Reference
XSI_SERVER
Value Format STRING
Description
Value Range
Specifies the IP address or FQDN of the Xsi server.
Max. 256 characters
Default Value Empty string
Web User Interface Reference
XSI_SERVER_TYPE
Value Format
Description
Value Range
STRING
Specifies the type of the Xsi server.
• HTTP
• HTTPS
Default Value HTTP
Web User Interface Reference
XSI_SERVER_PORT
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
INTEGER
Specifies the port of the Xsi server.
1–65535
80
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 239
5.3.11 XSI Settings
Web User Interface Reference
XSI_USERID_n
For details about parameter names end with "_n", see 5.2.1 Configuration File Parameters
Value Format STRING
Description
Value Range
Specifies the authentication ID required to access the Xsi server.
Max. 128 characters
Default Value Empty string
Web User Interface Reference
XSI_PASSWORD_n
For details about parameter names end with "_n", see 5.2.1 Configuration File Parameters
Value Format STRING
Description Specifies the authentication password required to access the Xsi server.
Value Range
Default Value
Max. 128 characters
Empty string
Web User Interface Reference
XSI_PHONEBOOK_ENABLE_n
For details about parameter names end with "_n", see 5.2.1 Configuration File Parameters
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description
Value Range
Specifies whether to enable or disable the Xsi phonebook service.
• Y : Enable Xsi phonebook
• N : Disable
Default Value N
Web User Interface Reference
XSI_PHONEBOOK_CYCLIC_INTVL
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
INTEGER
Specifies the interval, in minutes, between periodic checks for updates of the Xsi Directory (Phonebook) files.
If this parameter is set to "0", the timing is the same as updating the configuration files.
0–40320
0
XSI_PHONEBOOK_RESYNC_DURATION
Value Format INTEGER
240 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
5.3.11 XSI Settings
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Specifies the time range, in minutes, during which connected units can access the server.
Xsi Directory (Phonebook) files will be downloaded at a random time within this range.
0–1439
0
XSI_PHONEBOOK_TYPE_n
For details about parameter names end with "_n", see 5.2.1 Configuration File Parameters
Value Format INTEGER
Description
Value Range
Specifies the type of Xsi phonebook.
1: Group
2: GroupCommon
3: Enterprise
4: EnterpriseCommon
5: Personal
Default Value 1
Web User Interface Reference
XSI_CALLLOG_ENABLE_n
For details about parameter names end with "_n", see 5.2.1 Configuration File Parameters
Value Format
Description
Value Range
BOOLEAN
Specifies whether to enable or disable the Xsi call log service.
• Y : Enable Xsi call log
• N : Disable
Default Value N
Web User Interface Reference
XSI_VISUAL_VM_ENABLE_n (For KX-HDV330/KX-HDV430)
For details about parameter names end with "_n", see 5.2.1 Configuration File Parameters
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description
Value Range
Specifies whether to enable or disable the Visual Voice Mail feature of the selected line.
• Y : Enable Visual Voice Mail
• N : Disable
Default Value N
Web User Interface Reference
Enable Visual Voice Mail (For KX-HDV330/KX-HDV430)
XSI_SIP_CREDENTIALS_ENABLE
Value Format BOOLEAN
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 241
5.3.11 XSI Settings
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Specifies whether to enable or disable the XSI SIP Credentials feature.
• Y : Enable XSI SIP Credentials
• N : Disable
N
Web User Interface Reference
BSD_MULTI_TYPE_ENABLE
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
BOOLEAN
Specifies whether you can select the type of Xsi phonebook.
• Y : Enable
• N : Disable
N
BSD_GROUP_ENABLE_n
For details about parameter names end with "_n", see 5.2.1 Configuration File Parameters
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description
Value Range
Specifies whether to enable or disable the "Group" type for Xsi phonebooks.
• Y : Enable
• N : Disable
Default Value N
Web User Interface Reference
BSD_GROUPCOM_ENABLE_n
For details about parameter names end with "_n", see 5.2.1 Configuration File Parameters
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether to enable or disable the "GroupCommon" type for
Xsi phonebooks.
Value Range • Y : Enable
• N : Disable
Default Value N
Web User Interface Reference
BSD_ENTERPRISE_ENABLE_n
For details about parameter names end with "_n", see 5.2.1 Configuration File Parameters
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether to enable or disable the "Enterprise" type for Xsi phonebooks.
242 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
5.3.12 XMPP (UC-ONE) Settings
Value Range • Y : Enable
• N : Disable
Default Value N
Web User Interface Reference
BSD_ENTERPRISECOM_ENABLE_n
For details about parameter names end with "_n", see 5.2.1 Configuration File Parameters
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether to enable or disable the "EnterpriseCommon" type for Xsi phonebooks.
Value Range • Y : Enable
• N : Disable
Default Value N
Web User Interface Reference
BSD_PERSONAL_ENABLE_n
For details about parameter names end with "_n", see 5.2.1 Configuration File Parameters
Value Format
Description
BOOLEAN
Specifies whether to enable or disable the "Personal" type for Xsi phonebooks.
Value Range • Y : Enable
• N : Disable
Default Value N
Web User Interface Reference
5.3.12 XMPP (UC-ONE) Settings
UC_ENABLE
Value Format
Description
Value Range
BOOLEAN
Specifies whether to enable the UC service.
• Y : Enable UC service
• N : Disable
Default Value N
Web User Interface Reference
UC_USERID
Value Format
Description
Value Range
STRING
Specifies the authentication ID required to access the UC server.
Max. 128 characters
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 243
5.3.12 XMPP (UC-ONE) Settings
Default Value Empty string
Web User Interface Reference
UC_PASSWORD
Value Format STRING
Description Specifies the authentication password required to access the UC server.
Value Range
Default Value
Max. 128 characters
Empty string
Web User Interface Reference
XMPP_SERVER
Value Format
Description
Value Range
STRING
Specifies the IP address or FQDN of the XMPP server.
Max. 256 characters
Default Value Empty string
Web User Interface Reference
XMPP_PORT
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
INTEGER
Specifies the local XMPP port.
1–65535
5222
Web User Interface Reference
XMPP_TLS_VERIFY
Value Format
Description
Value Range
INTEGER
Specifies whether to enable the verification of the root certificate.
0: No verification
1: Simple verification
2: Precise verification
0 Default Value
XMPP_ROOT_CERT_PATH
Value Format
Description
Value Range
STRING
Specifies the URI where the root certificate is stored.
Max. 384 characters
Note
• For details about the formats, see
244 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
5.3.12 XMPP (UC-ONE) Settings
Default Value Empty string
XMPP_CLIENT_CERT_PATH
Value Format
Description
Value Range
STRING
Specifies the URI where the client certificate is stored.
Max. 384 characters
Default Value
Note
• For details about the formats, see
.
Empty string
XMPP_PKEY_PATH
Value Format
Description
Value Range
STRING
Specifies the URI where the private key is stored.
Max. 384 characters
Note
• For details about the formats, see
.
Empty string Default Value
UC_DNSSRV_ENA
Value Format
Description
Value Range
BOOLEAN
Specifies whether to request the DNS server to translate domain names into IP addresses using the SRV record.
• Y : Enable DNS SRV lookup
• N : Disable
N Default Value
UC_TCP_SRV_PREFIX
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
STRING
Specifies a prefix to add to the domain name when performing a DNS
SRV lookup using TCP.
Max. 32 characters
_xmpp-client._tcp.
UC_USERID_CASE_SENSITIVE
Value Format
Description
BOOLEAN
Specifies whether the authentication ID is case-sensitive when accessing the UC server.
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 245
5.3.13 LDAP Settings
Value Range
Default Value
• Y : Enable
• N : Disable
N
PRESENCE_MYPHONE_STATUS
Value Format INTEGER
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Specifies the default status of "My Phone" when "Presence" starts up.
0-4
– 0: Available
– 1: Away
– 2: Busy
– 3: Offline
– 4: Invisible
0
PRESENCE_INVISIBLE_ENABLE
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Specifies which operation to use when the status of "My Phone" is set to "Invisible" using the phone.
• Y : Invisible
• N : Offline
N
5.3.13 LDAP Settings
LDAP_ENABLE
Value Format
Description
Value Range
BOOLEAN
Specifies whether to enable or disable the LDAP service.
• Y : Enable LDAP service
• N : Disable
Default Value N
Web User Interface Reference
LDAP_DNSSRV_ENABLE
Value Format
Description
Value Range
BOOLEAN
Specifies whether to request the DNS server to translate domain names into IP addresses using the SRV record.
• Y : Enable DNS SRV lookup
• N : Disable
246 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
5.3.13 LDAP Settings
Default Value N
Web User Interface Reference
LDAP_SERVER
Value Format
Description
Value Range
STRING
Specifies the server host of LDAP.
Max. 256 characters
Note
• The LDAP server address should start with "ldap://" or
"ldaps://".
Default Value Empty string
Web User Interface Reference
LDAP_SERVER_PORT
Value Format INTEGER
Description
Value Range
Specifies the port of the LDAP server.
1–65535
Default Value 389
Web User Interface Reference
LDAP_MAXRECORD
Value Format
Description
INTEGER
Specifies the maximum number of search results to be returned by the LDAP server.
20–500 Value Range
Default Value 20
Web User Interface Reference
LDAP_NUMB_SEARCH_TIMER
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
INTEGER
Specifies the timer for searching telephone number.
1–65535
30
LDAP_NAME_SEARCH_TIMER
Value Format INTEGER
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Specifies the timer for searching name.
1–65535
5
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 247
5.3.13 LDAP Settings
LDAP_USERID
Value Format STRING
Description
Value Range
Specifies the authentication ID required to access the LDAP server.
Max. 128 characters
Default Value Empty string
Web User Interface Reference
LDAP_PASSWORD
Value Format
Description
STRING
Specifies the authentication password required to access the LDAP server.
Max. 128 characters Value Range
Default Value Empty string
Web User Interface Reference
LDAP_NAME_FILTER
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
STRING
Specifies the name filter which is the search criteria for name look up.
Max. 256 characters
(|(cn=%)(sn=%))
Web User Interface Reference
LDAP_NUMB_FILTER
Value Format
Description
STRING
Specifies the number filter which is the search criteria for number look up.
Value Range
Default Value
Max. 256 characters
(|(telephoneNumber=%)(mobile=%)(homePhone=%))
Web User Interface Reference
LDAP_NAME_ATTRIBUTE
Value Format
Description
STRING
Specifies the name attributes of each record which are to be returned in the LDAP search result.
Value Range
Default Value
Max. 256 characters cn,sn
Web User Interface Reference
248 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
5.3.13 LDAP Settings
LDAP_NUMB_ATTRIBUTE
Value Format STRING
Description Specifies the number attributes of each record which are to be returned in the LDAP search result.
Value Range
Default Value
Max. 256 characters telephoneNumber,mobile,homePhone
Web User Interface Reference
LDAP_BASEDN
Value Format
Description
Value Range
STRING
Specifies the entry information on the screen.
Max. 256 characters
Default Value Empty string
Web User Interface Reference
LDAP_SSL_VERIFY
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
INTEGER
Specifies whether to enable the verification of the root certificate.
0: No verification
1: Simple verification
2: Precise verification
0
LDAP_ROOT_CERT_PATH
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
STRING
Specifies the URI where the root certificate is stored.
Max. 384 characters
Note
• For details about the formats, see
.
Empty string
LDAP_CLIENT_CERT_PATH
Value Format
Description
Value Range
STRING
Specifies the URI where the client certificate is stored.
Max. 384 characters
Note
• For details about the formats, see
.
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 249
5.3.14 Call Center Settings
Default Value
LDAP_PKEY_PATH
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Empty string
STRING
Specifies the URI where the private key is stored.
Max. 384 characters
Note
• For details about the formats, see
Empty string
LDAP_DISPLAY_FORMAT
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
STRING
Specifies the display name by using the attributes of each record returned in the LDAP search results.
Max. 256 characters (LDAP attributes) A unit uses the initial settings for the display if this setting is NULL.
Empty string
5.3.14 Call Center Settings
CALL_CENTER_ENABLE_n
For details about parameter names end with "_n", see 5.2.1 Configuration File Parameters
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description
Value Range
Specifies whether to add menu items for Call Center.
• Y : Enable
• N : Disable
Default Value N
Web User Interface Reference
ACD_ENABLE_n
For details about parameter names end with "_n", see 5.2.1 Configuration File Parameters
Value Format
Description
Value Range
BOOLEAN
Specifies whether to enable the ACD.
• Y : Enable
• N : Disable
Default Value N
Web User Interface Reference
250 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
5.3.14 Call Center Settings
ACD_LOGIN_CONDITION_n
For details about parameter names end with "_n", see 5.2.1 Configuration File Parameters
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
INTEGER
Specifies the ACD state when login to the ACD.
• 0 : Available
• 1 : Unavailable
0
ACD_LOGOUT_CONDITION_n
For details about parameter names end with "_n", see 5.2.1 Configuration File Parameters
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the ACD state when logout to the ACD.
Value Range
Default Value
• 0 : Continue
• 1 : Unavailable
1
CC_DISPOSITION_CODE_ENABLE_n
For details about parameter names end with "_n", see 5.2.1 Configuration File Parameters
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description
Value Range
Specifies whether to enable the Disposition Code.
• Y : Enable
• N : Disable
Default Value N
Web User Interface Reference
CC_CUSTOMER_ORG_TRACE_ENABLE_n
For details about parameter names end with "_n", see 5.2.1 Configuration File Parameters
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description
Value Range
Specifies whether to enable the Customer Originated Trace.
• Y : Enable
• N : Disable
Default Value N
Web User Interface Reference
CC_HOTELING_EVENT_n
For details about parameter names end with "_n", see 5.2.1 Configuration File Parameters
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether to enable the Hoteling Event.
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 251
5.3.14 Call Center Settings
Value Range • Y : Enable
• N : Disable
Default Value N
Web User Interface Reference
HOTELING_USERID_n
For details about parameter names end with "_n", see 5.2.1 Configuration File Parameters
Value Format STRING
Description Specifies the authentication ID required to access the Hoteling service.
Value Range
Default Value
Max. 32 characters
Empty string
Web User Interface Reference
HOTELING_PASSWORD_n
For details about parameter names end with "_n", see 5.2.1 Configuration File Parameters
Value Format
Description
STRING
Specifies the authentication password required to access the Hoteling service.
Value Range
Default Value
Max. 128 characters
Empty string
Web User Interface Reference
CC_STATUS_EVENT_ENABLE_n
For details about parameter names end with "_n", see 5.2.1 Configuration File Parameters
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description
Value Range
Specifies whether to enable the Status Event.
• Y : Enable
• N : Disable
Default Value N
Web User Interface Reference
UC_HOTELING_MODE
Value Format
Description
Value Range
INTEGER
Specifies the Flexible Seating mode. This service allows a guest to use the host's device as his own.
0: Hoteling not supported
1: Hoteling supported
2: Host
3: Guest
252 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
5.3.15 SNMP Settings
Default Value 0
UC_FLEXIBLESEATING_UNLOCKPIN
Value Format
Description
STRING
Specifies the unlock PIN for Flexible Seating.
Value Range
Default Value
4–10 digits
Empty string
5.3.15 SNMP Settings
Note
• Changing SNMP setting may require restarting the unit.
SNMP_ENABLE
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
BOOLEAN
Specifies whether to enable SNMP feature.
• Y : Enable SNMP
• N : Disable
N
SNMP_TRUST_IP
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
STRING
Specifies the IP address or FQDN of the trusted SNMP server.
Max. 256 characters
Empty string
SNMP_TRUST_PORT
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
INTEGER
Specifies the port of the trusted SNMP server.
1–65535
161
SNMP_RO_COMMUNITY_STRING
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
STRING
Specifies the community name for read-only.
Max. 32 characters
Empty string
SNMP_SECURITY_TYPE
Value Format INTEGER
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 253
5.3.15 SNMP Settings
Description
Value Range
Specifies the security type of SNMPv3.
0: noAuthNoPriv
1: AuthNoPriv
2: AuthPriv
0 Default Value
SNMP_SECURITY_USER
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
SNMP_AUTH_TYPE
Value Format
Description
Value Range
STRING
Specifies the security user ID for authentication and encryption of
SNMPv3.
Max. 32 characters
Empty string
INTEGER
Specifies the authentication type of SNMPv3.
0: MD5
1: SHA
0 Default Value
SNMP_AUTH_PASSWORD
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
STRING
Specifies the authentication password of SNMPv3.
0, 8–64 characters
Empty string
SNMP_ENCRYPT_TYPE
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
INTEGER
Specifies the encryption type of SNMPv3.
0: DES
1: AES
1
SNMP_ENCRYPT_PASSWORD
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
STRING
Specifies the encryption password of SNMPv3.
0, 8–64 characters
Empty string
254 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
5.3.16 Multicast Paging Settings
5.3.16 Multicast Paging Settings
MPAGE_ADDRm
Parameter Name Example
Value Format
MPAGE_ADDR1 , MPAGE_ADDR2 , …, MPAGE_ADDR5
IPADDR
Description Specifies the address for multi-cast paging for each channel group.
(m=1–5, the channel group) {Priority: 5 > 4 > 3, 2, 1 (depending on the configuration)}
Value Range
Default Value
224.0.0.0–239.255.255.255
Empty string
Web User Interface Reference
MPAGE_IPV6_ADDRm
Parameter Name Example
Value Format
MPAGE_IPV6_ADDR1 , MPAGE_IPV6_ADDR2 , …,
MPAGE_IPV6_ADDR5
IPADDR-V6
Description Specifies the IPv6 address for multi-cast paging for each channel group. (m=1–5, the channel group) {Priority: 5 > 4 > 3, 2, 1
(depending on the configuration)}
Value Range
Default Value
FF00::/8
Empty string
Web User Interface Reference
MPAGE_PORTm
Parameter Name Example
Value Format
MPAGE_PORT1 , MPAGE_PORT2 , …, MPAGE_PORT5
INTEGER
Description
Value Range
Specifies the port number for multi-cast paging for each channel group.(m=1–5, the channel group)
0–65535
(0: not used)
Default Value 0
Web User Interface Reference
MPAGE_PRIORITYm
Parameter Name Example
Value Format
Description
Value Range
MPAGE_PRIORITY1 , MPAGE_PRIORITY2 , MPAGE_PRIORITY3
INTEGER
Specifies the priority of the low priority channel group. (m=1–3)
The priority of multi-cast paging group1–3 is lower than the talking.
Priority 4 is higher than priority 5.
4,5
(Talk > 4 > 5)
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 255
5.3.16 Multicast Paging Settings
Default Value 5
Web User Interface Reference
MPAGE_LABELm
Parameter Name Example
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
MPAGE_LABEL1 , MPAGE_LABEL2 , …, MPAGE_LABEL5
STRING
Specifies a label for each channel group. (m=1–5, the channel group)
Max. 24 characters
Empty string
Web User Interface Reference
MPAGE_SEND_ENABLEm
Parameter Name Example
Value Format
Description
Value Range
MPAGE_SEND_ENABLE1 , MPAGE_SEND_ENABLE2 , …,
MPAGE_SEND_ENABLE5
BOOLEAN
Specifies the sending multi-cast paging. (m=1–5, the channel group)
• Y : Enable
• N : Disable
Default Value N
Web User Interface Reference
Enable Transmission (Group 1–5)
MPAGE_CODEC
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
INTEGER
Specifies the codec for multi-cast paging.
0 : "G722"
1 : "PCMA"
2 : –
3 : "G729A"
4 : "PCMU"
0
MPAGE_SP_VOL_EMERGENCY
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
INTEGER
Specifies the speaker level for new received multi-cast paging
(emergency channel).
0–8
0: No control
0
MPAGE_SP_VOL_PRIORITY
Value Format INTEGER
256 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
5.3.17 NTP Settings
Description
Value Range
Specifies the speaker level for new received multi-cast paging
(priority channel).
0–8
0: No control
0 Default Value
MPAGE_DND_ENABLE
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
MPAGE_FUNCKEY_ENABLE
Value Format
Description
Value Range
BOOLEAN
Specifies whether to enable or disable the multicast paging key in function menu.
• Y : Enable
• N : Disable
Default Value N
5.3.17 NTP Settings
NTP_ADDR
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
STRING
Specifies the IP address or FQDN of NTP server.
Max. 256 characters
Empty string
Web User Interface Reference
TIME_SYNC_INTVL
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
TIME_QUERY_INTVL
Value Format
BOOLEAN
Specifies the DND setting (on/off) for multi-cast paging.
• Y : Enable DND for Multi-cast paging
• N : Disable DND for Multi-cast paging
N
INTEGER
Specifies the interval, in seconds, to resynchronize after having detected no reply from the NTP server.
10–86400
60
INTEGER
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 257
5.3.18 Time Settings
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Specifies the interval, in seconds, between synchronizations with the
NTP server.
10–86400
43200
Web User Interface Reference
Synchronization Interval (Synchronisation Interval)
5.3.18 Time Settings
LOCAL_TIME_ZONE_POSIX
Value Format
Description
STRING
Specifies a IEEE 1003.1 (POSIX)-compliant local time zone definition
(e.g., "EST+5 EDT,M4.1.0/2,M10.5.0/2").
Value Range
Default Value
Note
• If this parameter is specified, the following parameters are disabled, and operation will be based on this parameter.
– TIME_ZONE
– DST_ENABLE
– DST_OFFSET
– DST_START_MONTH
– DST_START_ORDINAL_DAY
– DST_START_DAY_OF_WEEK
– DST_START_TIME
– DST_STOP_MONTH
– DST_STOP_ORDINAL_DAY
– DST_STOP_DAY_OF_WEEK
– DST_STOP_TIME
Max. 70 characters
Empty string
TIME_ZONE
Value Format
Description
INTEGER
Specifies the offset of local standard time from UTC (GMT), in minutes.
258 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
5.3.18 Time Settings
Value Range -720–780
Note
• Only the following values are available:
-720 (GMT -12:00), -660 (GMT -11:00), -600 (GMT -10:00),
-540 (GMT -09:00), -480 (GMT -08:00), -420 (GMT -07:00),
-360 (GMT -06:00), -300 (GMT -05:00), -240 (GMT -04:00),
-210 (GMT -03:30), -180 (GMT -03:00), -120 (GMT -02:00), -60
(GMT -01:00), 0 (GMT), 60 (GMT +01:00), 120 (GMT +02:00),
180 (GMT +03:00), 210 (GMT +03:30), 240 (GMT +04:00), 270
(GMT +04:30), 300 (GMT +05:00), 330 (GMT +05:30), 345
(GMT +05:45), 360 (GMT +06:00), 390 (GMT +06:30), 420
(GMT +07:00), 480 (GMT +08:00), 540 (GMT +09:00), 570
(GMT +09:30), 600 (GMT +10:00), 660 (GMT +11:00), 720
(GMT +12:00), 780 (GMT +13:00)
• If your location is west of Greenwich (0 [GMT]), the value should be minus. For example, the value for New York City,
U.S.A. is "-300" (Eastern Standard Time being 5 hours behind
GMT).
• This parameter is disabled when the
" LOCAL_TIME_ZONE_POSIX " parameter is specified.
Default Value 0
Web User Interface Reference
DST_ENABLE
Value Format
Description
BOOLEAN
Specifies whether to enable DST (Summer Time).
Note
• This parameter is disabled when the
" LOCAL_TIME_ZONE_POSIX " parameter is specified.
Value Range • Y (Enable DST [Summer Time])
• N (Disable DST [Summer Time])
Default Value N
Web User Interface Reference
Enable DST (Enable Summer Time)
DST_OFFSET
Value Format
Description
INTEGER
Specifies the amount of time, in minutes, to change the time when
" DST_ENABLE " is set to " Y ".
Note
• This parameter is disabled when the
" LOCAL_TIME_ZONE_POSIX " parameter is specified.
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 259
5.3.18 Time Settings
Value Range 0–720
Note
• This parameter is usually set to "60".
Default Value 60
Web User Interface Reference
DST Offset (Summer Time Offset)
DST_START_MONTH
Value Format
Description
INTEGER
Specifies the month in which DST (Summer Time) starts.
Note
• This parameter is disabled when the
" LOCAL_TIME_ZONE_POSIX " parameter is specified.
Value Range
Default Value
1–12
3
Web User Interface Reference
DST_START_ORDINAL_DAY
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the number of the week on which DST (Summer Time) starts. The actual start day is specified in
" DST_START_DAY_OF_WEEK ". For example, to specify the second
Sunday, specify "2" in this parameter, and "0" in the next parameter.
Value Range
Note
• This parameter is disabled when the
" LOCAL_TIME_ZONE_POSIX " parameter is specified.
1–5
– 1: the first week of the month
– 2: the second week of the month
– 3: the third week of the month
– 4: the fourth week of the month
– 5: the last week of the month
Default Value 2
Web User Interface Reference
DST_START_DAY_OF_WEEK
Value Format INTEGER
260 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
5.3.18 Time Settings
Description Specifies the day of the week on which DST (Summer Time) starts.
Note
• This parameter is disabled when the
" LOCAL_TIME_ZONE_POSIX " parameter is specified.
Value Range 0–6
– 0: Sunday
– 1: Monday
– 2: Tuesday
– 3: Wednesday
– 4: Thursday
– 5: Friday
– 6: Saturday
Default Value 0
Web User Interface Reference
DST_START_TIME
Value Format
Description
INTEGER
Specifies the start time of DST (Summer Time) in minutes after 12:00
AM.
Note
• This parameter is disabled when the
" LOCAL_TIME_ZONE_POSIX " parameter is specified.
Value Range
Default Value
0–1439
120
Web User Interface Reference
DST_STOP_MONTH
Value Format
Description
INTEGER
Specifies the month in which DST (Summer Time) ends.
Value Range
Default Value
Note
• This parameter is disabled when the
" LOCAL_TIME_ZONE_POSIX " parameter is specified.
1–12
11
Web User Interface Reference
DST_STOP_ORDINAL_DAY
Value Format INTEGER
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 261
5.3.18 Time Settings
Description Specifies the number of the week on which DST (Summer Time) ends. The actual end day is specified in " DST_STOP_DAY_OF_WEEK ".
For example, to specify the second Sunday, specify "2" in this parameter, and "0" in the next parameter.
Value Range
Default Value
Note
• This parameter is disabled when the
" LOCAL_TIME_ZONE_POSIX " parameter is specified.
1–5
– 1: the first week of the month
– 2: the second week of the month
– 3: the third week of the month
– 4: the fourth week of the month
– 5: the last week of the month
1
Web User Interface Reference
DST_STOP_DAY_OF_WEEK
Value Format
Description
INTEGER
Specifies the day of the week on which DST (Summer Time) ends.
Value Range
Note
• This parameter is disabled when the
" LOCAL_TIME_ZONE_POSIX " parameter is specified.
0–6
– 0: Sunday
– 1: Monday
– 2: Tuesday
– 3: Wednesday
– 4: Thursday
– 5: Friday
– 6: Saturday
Default Value 0
Web User Interface Reference
DST_STOP_TIME
Value Format INTEGER
262 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
5.3.19 Network Phonebook (Common)
Description Specifies the end time of DST (Summer Time) in minutes after 12:00
AM.
Note
• This parameter is disabled when the
" LOCAL_TIME_ZONE_POSIX " parameter is specified.
Value Range
Default Value
0–1439
120
Web User Interface Reference
5.3.19 Network Phonebook (Common)
ONLY_NPB_ENABLE
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
BOOLEAN
Specifies whether to be available the unit phonebook when the network phonebook is enabled.
• Y : Not use unit phonebook
• N : Use unit phonebook
N
NETWORK_SEARCH_ENABLE
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
BOOLEAN
Specifies whether to perform the phonebook search at the time of the receiving the incoming or the searching the received log.
• Y : Enable phonebook search
• N : Disable
N
NW_PHONEBOOK_ADVANCED_SERACH
Value Format
Description
Value Range
BOOLEAN
Specifies whether to perform a narrowing search with the LDAP phonebook.
• Y : Enable
• N : Disable
Default Value N
5.3.20 Language Settings
AVAILABLE_LANGUAGE
Value Format
Description
STRING
Specifies the selectable language on the unit.
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 263
5.3.20 Language Settings
Value Range en, es, fr, de, it, da, nl, sv, fi, el, hu, pt, pl, sk, cs, sh, ru, uk, tr, no, ro,
ct, kk, me → see 4.4.1.1 Selectable Language
Web User Interface Reference
DEFAULT_LANGUAGE
Value Format STRING
Description
Value Range
Specifies the default language on the unit.
en, es, fr, de, it, da, nl, sv, fi, el, hu, pt, pl, sk, cs, sh, ru, uk, tr, no, ro,
ct, kk, me → see 4.4.1.1 Selectable Language
Default Value en
Web User Interface Reference
LANGUAGE_PATHx
Parameter Name Example
Value Format
Description
Value Range
LANGUAGE_PATH1 , LANGUAGE_PATH2 , …, LANGUAGE_PATH10
STRING
Specifies the URI of the language file.
x=1–10
Max. 384 characters
Note
• For details about the formats, see
Empty string Default Value
LANGUAGE_VERx
Parameter Name Example
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
LANGUAGE_VER1 , LANGUAGE_VER2 , …, LANGUAGE_VER10
STRING
Specifies the version of the language file.
x=1–10
"00.000.000"–"15.999.999"
Empty string
AVAILABLE_LANGUAGE_WEB
Value Format
Description
Value Range
STRING
Specifies the selectable language on the Web.
en, es, fr, de, it, nl, el, hu, pt, pl, sk, cs, sh, ru, uk, tr, ro, ct, kk, me → see
Web User Interface Reference
WEB_LANGUAGE
Value Format STRING
264 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
5.3.21 NAT Settings
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Specifies the default language on the unit.
en, es, fr, de, it, nl, el, hu, pt, pl, sk, cs, sh, ru, uk, tr, ro, ct, kk, me → see
en
Web User Interface Reference
WEB_LANGUAGE_PATHx
Parameter Name Example
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
WEB_LANGUAGE_PATH1 , WEB_LANGUAGE_PATH2 , …,
WEB_LANGUAGE_PATH10
STRING
Specifies the URI of the language file.
x=1–10
Max. 384 characters
Note
• For details about the formats, see
.
Empty string
WEB_LANGUAGE_VERx
Parameter Name Example
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
WEB_LANGUAGE_VER1 , WEB_LANGUAGE_VER2 , …,
WEB_LANGUAGE_VER10
STRING
Specifies the version of the language file.
x=1–10
"00.000.000"–"15.999.999"
Empty string
5.3.21 NAT Settings
STUN_SERV_ADDR
Value Format STRING
Description
Value Range
Specifies the IP address or FQDN of the primary STUN server.
Max. 256 characters
Default Value Empty string
Web User Interface Reference
STUN_SERV_PORT
Value Format
Description
Value Range
INTEGER
Specifies the port of the primary STUN server.
1–65535
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 265
5.3.21 NAT Settings
Default Value 3478
Web User Interface Reference
STUN_2NDSERV_ADDR
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
STUN_2NDSERV_PORT
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
STRING
Specifies the IP address or FQDN of the secondary STUN server.
Max. 256 characters
Empty string
INTEGER
Specifies the port number of the secondary STUN server.
1–65535
3478
STUN_INTVL
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
INTEGER
Specifies the interval of the sending binding request.
60–86400
300
Web User Interface Reference
SIP_ADD_RPORT
Value Format
Description
BOOLEAN
Specifies whether to add the 'rport' parameter to the top Via header field value of requests generated.
Value Range • Y : Enable Rport
• N : Disable
Default Value N
Web User Interface Reference
PORT_PUNCH_INTVL
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
INTEGER
Specifies the interval, in seconds, between transmissions of the Keep
Alive packet in order to maintain the NAT binding information for SIP packet.
0, 10–300
0: Disable
0
Web User Interface Reference
266 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
5.3.22 SIP Settings
RTP_PORT_PUNCH_INTVL
Value Format INTEGER
Description
Value Range
Specifies the interval, in seconds, between transmissions of the Keep
Alive packet in order to maintain the NAT binding information for RTP packet.
0, 10–300
0: Disable
Default Value 0
Web User Interface Reference
EXTERNAL_RTP_PORTx
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
INTEGER
KX-HDV130
KX-HDV230/KX-HDV330
KX-HDV430
: x=1-3
: x=1-24
: x=1-48
Specifies the port number of the router in Static NAT status.
• 0, 1024–59998 (only even ports)
• 0: Disable
0
5.3.22 SIP Settings
SIP_USER_AGENT
Value Format
Description
Value Range
STRING
Specifies the text string to send as the user agent in the headers of
SIP messages.
Max. 64 characters
Note
• If "{mac}" is included in this parameter, it will be replaced with the unit’s MAC address in lower-case.
• If "{MAC}" is included in this parameter, it will be replaced with the unit’s MAC address in upper-case.
• If "{MODEL}" is included in this parameter, it will be replaced with the unit’s model name.
• If "{fwver}" is included in this parameter, it will be replaced with the firmware version of the unit.
• If "{sipver}" is included in this parameter, it will be replaced with the SIP software version of the unit.
Default Value Panasonic-{MODEL}/{fwver} ({mac})
Web User Interface Reference
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 267
5.3.22 SIP Settings
PHONE_NUMBER_n
For details about parameter names end with "_n", see 5.2.1 Configuration File Parameters
Value Format
Description
STRING
Specifies the phone number to use as the user ID required for registration to the SIP registrar server.
Value Range
Default Value
Note
• When registering using a user ID that is not a phone number, you should use the " SIP_URI_n " setting.
Max. 32 characters
Empty string
Web User Interface Reference
SIP_URI_n
For details about parameter names end with "_n", see 5.2.1 Configuration File Parameters
Value Format STRING
Description Specifies the unique ID used by the SIP registrar server, which consists of "sip:", a user part, the "@" symbol, and a host part, for example, "sip:[email protected]", "2405551111_1".
Note
• When registering using a user ID that is not a phone number, you should use this setting.
• In a SIP URI, the user part ("user" in the example above) can contain up to 63 characters, and the host part ("example.com" in the example above) can contain up to 316 characters.
Value Range
Default Value
Max. 384 characters
Empty string
Web User Interface Reference
SIP_RGSTR_ADDR_n
For details about parameter names end with "_n", see 5.2.1 Configuration File Parameters
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
STRING
Specifies the IP address or FQDN of the SIP registrar server.
Max. 256 characters
Empty string
Web User Interface Reference
SIP_RGSTR_PORT_n
For details about parameter names end with "_n", see 5.2.1 Configuration File Parameters
Value Format INTEGER
268 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
5.3.22 SIP Settings
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Specifies the port number to use for communication with the SIP registrar server.
1–65535
5060
Web User Interface Reference
SIP_PRXY_ADDR_n
For details about parameter names end with "_n", see 5.2.1 Configuration File Parameters
Value Format STRING
Description
Value Range
Specifies the IP address or FQDN of the SIP proxy server.
Max. 256 characters
Default Value Empty string
Web User Interface Reference
SIP_PRXY_PORT_n
For details about parameter names end with "_n", see 5.2.1 Configuration File Parameters
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the port number to use for communication with the SIP proxy server.
Value Range
Default Value
1–65535
5060
Web User Interface Reference
SIP_PRSNC_ADDR_n
For details about parameter names end with "_n", see 5.2.1 Configuration File Parameters
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
STRING
Specifies the IP address or FQDN of the SIP presence server.
Max. 256 characters
Empty string
Web User Interface Reference
SIP_PRSNC_PORT_n
For details about parameter names end with "_n", see 5.2.1 Configuration File Parameters
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the port number to use for communication with the SIP presence server.
Value Range
Default Value
1–65535
5060
Web User Interface Reference
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 269
5.3.22 SIP Settings
SIP_OUTPROXY_ADDR_n
For details about parameter names end with "_n", see 5.2.1 Configuration File Parameters
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
STRING
Specifies the IP address or FQDN of the SIP outbound proxy server.
Max. 256 characters
Empty string
Web User Interface Reference
SIP_OUTPROXY_PORT_n
For details about parameter names end with "_n", see 5.2.1 Configuration File Parameters
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the port number to use for communication with the SIP outbound proxy server.
Value Range
Default Value
1–65535
5060
Web User Interface Reference
SIP_DNSSRV_ENA_NAPTR_n
For details about parameter names end with "_n", see 5.2.1 Configuration File Parameters
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether to enable the use of the NAPTR sequence.
Value Range
Default Value
• Y : Enable
• N : Disable
N
SIP_SVCDOMAIN_n
For details about parameter names end with "_n", see 5.2.1 Configuration File Parameters
Value Format STRING
Description Specifies the domain name provided by your phone system dealer/ service provider. The domain name is the part of the SIP URI that comes after the "@" symbol.
Value Range
Default Value
Max. 256 characters
Empty string
Web User Interface Reference
SIP_AUTHID_n
For details about parameter names end with "_n", see 5.2.1 Configuration File Parameters
Value Format STRING
Description Specifies the authentication ID required to access the SIP server.
270 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
5.3.22 SIP Settings
Value Range
Default Value
Max. 128 characters (except ", &, ', :, <, >, and space)
Empty string
Web User Interface Reference
SIP_PASS_n
For details about parameter names end with "_n", see 5.2.1 Configuration File Parameters
Value Format STRING
Description
Value Range
Specifies the authentication password used to access the SIP server.
Max. 128 characters (except ", &, ', :, <, >, and space)
Default Value Empty string
Web User Interface Reference
SIP_SRC_PORT_n
For details about parameter names end with "_n", see 5.2.1 Configuration File Parameters
Value Format
Description
Value Range
INTEGER
Specifies the source port number used by the unit for SIP communication.
1024–49151
Note
• The SIP port number for each line must be unique.
Default Value SIP_SRC_PORT_1 ="5060"
SIP_SRC_PORT_2 ="5070"
SIP_SRC_PORT_3 ="5080"
SIP_SRC_PORT_4 ="5090"
SIP_SRC_PORT_5 ="5100"
SIP_SRC_PORT_6 ="5110"
SIP_SRC_PORT_7 ="5120"
SIP_SRC_PORT_8 ="5130"
SIP_SRC_PORT_9 ="5140"
SIP_SRC_PORT_10 ="5150"
SIP_SRC_PORT_11 ="5160"
SIP_SRC_PORT_12 ="5170"
SIP_SRC_PORT_13 ="5180"
SIP_SRC_PORT_14 ="5190"
SIP_SRC_PORT_15 ="5200"
SIP_SRC_PORT_16 ="5210"
Web User Interface Reference
DSCP_SIP_n
For details about parameter names end with "_n", see 5.2.1 Configuration File Parameters
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the DSCP level of DiffServ applied to SIP packets.
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 271
5.3.22 SIP Settings
Value Range
Default Value
0–63
0
Web User Interface Reference
SIP_DNSSRV_ENA_n
For details about parameter names end with "_n", see 5.2.1 Configuration File Parameters
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether to request the DNS server to translate domain names into IP addresses using the SRV record.
Value Range • Y : Enable DNS SRV lookup
• N : Disable DNS SRV lookup
Note
• If set to " Y ", the unit will perform a DNS SRV lookup for a SIP registrar server, SIP proxy server, SIP outbound proxy server, or SIP presence server.
• If set to " N ", the unit will not perform a DNS SRV lookup for a
SIP registrar server, SIP proxy server, SIP outbound proxy server, or SIP presence server.
Default Value Y
Web User Interface Reference
SIP_UDP_SRV_PREFIX_n
For details about parameter names end with "_n", see 5.2.1 Configuration File Parameters
Value Format STRING
Description Specifies a prefix to add to the domain name when performing a DNS
SRV lookup using UDP.
Note
• This setting is available only when " SIP_DNSSRV_ENA_n " is set to " Y ".
Value Range
Default Value
Max. 32 characters
_sip._udp.
Web User Interface Reference
SIP_TCP_SRV_PREFIX_n
For details about parameter names end with "_n", see 5.2.1 Configuration File Parameters
Value Format STRING
272 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
5.3.22 SIP Settings
Description Specifies a prefix to add to the domain name when performing a DNS
SRV lookup using TCP.
Note
• This setting is available only when " SIP_DNSSRV_ENA_n " is set to " Y ".
Value Range
Default Value
Max. 32 characters
_sip._tcp.
Web User Interface Reference
REG_EXPIRE_TIME_n
For details about parameter names end with "_n", see 5.2.1 Configuration File Parameters
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the length of time, in seconds, that the registration remains valid. This value is set in the "Expires" header of the REGISTER request.
Value Range
Default Value
1–4294967295
3600
Web User Interface Reference
REG_INTERVAL_RATE_n
For details about parameter names end with "_n", see 5.2.1 Configuration File Parameters
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the percentage of the "expires" value after which to refresh registration by sending a new REGISTER message in the same dialog.
Value Range
Default Value
1–100
50
REG_RTX_INTVL_n
For details about parameter names end with "_n", see 5.2.1 Configuration File Parameters
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the interval, in seconds, between transmissions of the
REGISTER request when a registration results in failure (server no reply or error reply).
Value Range
Default Value
1–86400
10
USE_DEL_REG_OPEN_n
For details about parameter names end with "_n", see 5.2.1 Configuration File Parameters
Value Format BOOLEAN
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 273
5.3.22 SIP Settings
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Specifies whether to enable cancelation before registration when, for example, the unit is turned on.
• Y : Send un-REGISTER
• N : Does not send
N
USE_DEL_REG_CLOSE_n
For details about parameter names end with "_n", see 5.2.1 Configuration File Parameters
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether to enable the cancelation of registration before the
SIP function shuts down when, for example, the configuration has changed.
Value Range • Y : Send un-REGISTER
• N : Does not send
Default Value N
SIP_SESSION_TIME_n
For details about parameter names end with "_n", see 5.2.1 Configuration File Parameters
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the length of time, in seconds, that the unit waits before terminating SIP sessions when no reply to repeated requests is received. For details, refer to RFC 4028.
Value Range
Default Value
0, 60–65535 (0: Disable)
0
Web User Interface Reference
Enable Session Timer (RFC 4028)
SIP_SESSION_METHOD_n
For details about parameter names end with "_n", see 5.2.1 Configuration File Parameters
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the refreshing method of SIP sessions.
Value Range
Default Value
0–2
– 0: reINVITE
– 1: UPDATE
– 2: AUTO
0
Web User Interface Reference
SIP_TIMER_T1_n
For details about parameter names end with "_n", see 5.2.1 Configuration File Parameters
Value Format INTEGER
274 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
5.3.22 SIP Settings
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Specifies the default interval, in milliseconds, between transmissions of SIP messages. For details, refer to RFC 3261.
• 250
• 500
• 1000
• 2000
• 4000
500
Web User Interface Reference
SIP_TIMER_T2_n
For details about parameter names end with "_n", see 5.2.1 Configuration File Parameters
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the maximum interval, in seconds, between transmissions of SIP messages. For details, refer to RFC 3261.
Value Range • 2
• 4
• 8
• 16
• 32
Default Value 4
Web User Interface Reference
SIP_TIMER_T4_n
For details about parameter names end with "_n", see 5.2.1 Configuration File Parameters
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the maximum period, in seconds, that a message can remain on the network.
Value Range • 0
• 1
• 2
• 3
• 4
• 5
Default Value 5
SIP_TIMER_B_n
For details about parameter names end with "_n", see 5.2.1 Configuration File Parameters
Value Format INTEGER
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 275
5.3.22 SIP Settings
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Specifies the value of SIP timer B (INVITE transaction timeout timer), in milliseconds. For details, refer to RFC 3261.
250–64000
32000
SIP_TIMER_D_n
For details about parameter names end with "_n", see 5.2.1 Configuration File Parameters
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the value of SIP timer D (wait time for answer resending), in milliseconds. For details, refer to RFC 3261.
Value Range
Default Value
0, 250–64000
5000
SIP_TIMER_F_n
For details about parameter names end with "_n", see 5.2.1 Configuration File Parameters
Value Format INTEGER
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Specifies the value of SIP timer F (non-INVITE transaction timeout timer), in milliseconds. For details, refer to RFC 3261.
250–64000
32000
SIP_TIMER_H_n
For details about parameter names end with "_n", see 5.2.1 Configuration File Parameters
Value Format INTEGER
Description
Value Range
Specifies the value of SIP timer H (wait time for ACK reception), in milliseconds. For details, refer to RFC 3261.
250–64000
Default Value 32000
SIP_TIMER_J_n
For details about parameter names end with "_n", see 5.2.1 Configuration File Parameters
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the value of SIP timer J (wait time for non-INVITE request resending), in milliseconds. For details, refer to RFC 3261.
Value Range
Default Value
0, 250–64000
5000
SIP_100REL_ENABLE_n
For details about parameter names end with "_n", see 5.2.1 Configuration File Parameters
Value Format BOOLEAN
276 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
5.3.22 SIP Settings
Description
Value Range
Specifies whether to add the option tag 100rel to the "Supported" header of the INVITE message. For details, refer to RFC 3262.
• Y : Enable 100rel function
• N : Disable 100rel function
Note
• If set to " Y ", the Reliability of Provisional Responses function will be enabled. The option tag 100rel will be added to the
"Supported" header of the INVITE message and to the
"Require" header of the "1xx" provisional message.
• If set to " N ", the option tag 100rel will not be used.
Default Value Y
Web User Interface Reference
SIP_18X_RTX_INTVL_n
For details about parameter names end with "_n", see 5.2.1 Configuration File Parameters
Value Format INTEGER
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Specifies the retransmission interval, in seconds, for "18x" responses.
0, 1–600 (0: Disable)
0
SIP_SUBS_EXPIRE_n
For details about parameter names end with "_n", see 5.2.1 Configuration File Parameters
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the length of time, in seconds, that the subscription remains valid. This value is set in the "Expires" header of the SUBSCRIBE request.
Value Range
Default Value
1–4294967295
3600
SUB_INTERVAL_RATE_n
For details about parameter names end with "_n", see 5.2.1 Configuration File Parameters
Value Format INTEGER
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Specifies the percentage of the "expires" value after which to refresh subscriptions by sending a new SUBSCRIBE message in the same dialog.
1–100
50
SUB_RTX_INTVL_n
For details about parameter names end with "_n", see 5.2.1 Configuration File Parameters
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 277
5.3.22 SIP Settings
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
INTEGER
Specifies the interval, in seconds, between transmissions of
SUBSCRIBE requests when a subscription results in failure (server no reply or error reply).
1–86400
10
SIP_P_PREFERRED_ID_n
For details about parameter names end with "_n", see 5.2.1 Configuration File Parameters
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether to add the "P-Preferred-Identity" header to SIP messages.
Value Range • Y : Add the "P-Preferred-Identity" header
• N : Do not add the "P-Preferred-Identity" header
Default Value N
SIP_PRIVACY_n
For details about parameter names end with "_n", see 5.2.1 Configuration File Parameters
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
BOOLEAN
Specifies whether to add the "Privacy" header to SIP messages.
• Y : Add the "Privacy" header
• N : Do not add the "Privacy" header
N
ADD_USER_PHONE_n
For details about parameter names end with "_n", see 5.2.1 Configuration File Parameters
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether to add "user=phone" to the SIP URI in SIP messages.
Value Range • Y : Add "user=phone"
• N : Do not add "user=phone"
Default Value
Note
• SIP URI example:
– " sip:[email protected];user=phone ", when set to " Y "
– " sip:[email protected]
", when set to " N "
N
278 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
5.3.22 SIP Settings
SIP_ANM_DISPNAME_n
For details about parameter names end with "_n", see 5.2.1 Configuration File Parameters
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
INTEGER
Specifies the text string to set as the display name in the "From" header when making anonymous calls.
• 0: Use normal display name
• 1: Use "Anonymous" for display name
• 2: Do not send a display name
1
SIP_ANM_USERNAME_n
For details about parameter names end with "_n", see 5.2.1 Configuration File Parameters
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
INTEGER
Specifies the text string to set as the user name in the "From" header when making anonymous calls.
• 0: Use normal user name
• 1: Use "anonymous" for user name
• 2: Do not send a user name
0
SIP_ANM_HOSTNAME_n
For details about parameter names end with "_n", see 5.2.1 Configuration File Parameters
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Specifies whether to set an anonymous host name in the "From" header when making anonymous calls.
• Y : Use "anonymous.invalid" for host name
• N : Use normal host name
N
SIP_DETECT_SSAF_n
For details about parameter names end with "_n", see 5.2.1 Configuration File Parameters
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether to enable SSAF for the SIP servers (registrar server, proxy server, and presence server).
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 279
5.3.22 SIP Settings
Value Range • Y : Enable SSAF
• N : Disable SSAF
Note
• If set to " Y ", the unit receives SIP messages only from the source addresses stored in the SIP servers (registrar server, proxy server, and presence server), and not from other addresses. However, if " SIP_OUTPROXY_ADDR_n " in
is specified, the unit also receives SIP messages from the source address stored in the SIP outbound proxy server.
Default Value N
Web User Interface Reference
Enable SSAF (SIP Source Address Filter)
SIP_RCV_DET_HEADER_n
For details about parameter names end with "_n", see 5.2.1 Configuration File Parameters
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether to check the user name part of the SIP URI in the
"To" header when receiving the INVITE message with an incorrect target SIP URI.
Value Range • Y : Enable username check
• N : Disable username check
Default Value
Note
• If set to " Y ", the unit will return an error reply when it receives the INVITE message with an incorrect target SIP URI.
• If set to " N ", the unit will not check the user name part of the
SIP URI in the "To" header.
N
SIP_RCV_DET_REQURI_n
For details about parameter names end with "_n", see 5.2.1 Configuration File Parameters
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether to check ReqURI that is the part of SIP URI in "To" header when INVITE with wrong target SIP URI is received.
Value Range • Y
• N
Default Value N
SIP_CONTACT_ON_ACK_n
For details about parameter names end with "_n", see 5.2.1 Configuration File Parameters
Value Format BOOLEAN
280 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
5.3.22 SIP Settings
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Specifies whether to add the "Contact" header to SIP ACK message.
• Y : Add the "Contact" header
• N : Do not add the "Contact" header
N
VOICE_MESSAGE_AVAILABLE
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
BOOLEAN
Specifies how the existence of voice messages is determined when a
"Messages-Waiting: yes" message is received.
• Y : Determines that voice messages exist when "Messages-
Waiting: yes" is received with a "Voice-Message" line included.
• N : Determines that voice messages exist when "Messages-
Waiting: yes" is received even without a "Voice-Message" line included.
Y
SIP_INVITE_EXPIRE_n
For details about parameter names end with "_n", see 5.2.1 Configuration File Parameters
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the period, in seconds, in which the INVITE message will expire.
Value Range
Default Value
0, 60–65535 (0: Disable)
0
SIP_FOVR_NORSP_n
For details about parameter names end with "_n", see 5.2.1 Configuration File Parameters
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether to perform the fail-over process when the unit detects that the SIP server is not replying to SIP message.
Value Range • Y : Enable fail-over
• N : Disable fail-over
Default Value
Note
• If set to " Y ", the unit will try to use the other SIP servers via the
DNS SRV and A records.
• If set to " N ", the unit will not try to use the other SIP servers.
Y
SIP_FOVR_MAX_n
For details about parameter names end with "_n", see 5.2.1 Configuration File Parameters
Value Format INTEGER
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 281
5.3.22 SIP Settings
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Specifies the maximum number of servers (including the first [normal] server) used in the fail-over process.
1–4
2
SIP_FOVR_MODE_n
For details about parameter names end with "_n", see 5.2.1 Configuration File Parameters
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether INVITE/SUBSCRIBE will also follow the
REGISTER Failover result.
Value Range • Y : INVITE/SUBSCRIBE will follow the REGISTER Failover result.
• N : INVITE/SUBSCRIBE will not follow the REGISTER Failover result.
Default Value N
SIP_FOVR_DURATION_n
For details about parameter names end with "_n", see 5.2.1 Configuration File Parameters
Value Format INTEGER
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Specifies the number of transmission times for the REGISTER method at the Failover destination.
0–255
0
SIP_ADD_ROUTE_n
For details about parameter names end with "_n", see 5.2.1 Configuration File Parameters
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether or not to add Route headers when setting
OutBoundProxy.
Value Range
Default Value
Note
• Route headers are not added when OutBoundProxy and other server settings are the same.
• Y : Route headers are added
• N : Route headers are not added
Y
SIP_REQURI_PORT_n
For details about parameter names end with "_n", see 5.2.1 Configuration File Parameters
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether to add the port parameter to the Request-Line in the initial SIP request.
282 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
5.3.22 SIP Settings
Value Range
Default Value
• Y : Add the port parameter
• N : Do not add the port parameter
Note
• Request URI in REGISTER example:
– If set to " Y ", the port parameter is added to the Request-
Line, as follows:
Request-Line: REGISTER sip:192.168.0.10:5060 SIP/2.0
– If set to " N ", the port parameter is not added to the Request-
Line, as follows:
Request-Line: REGISTER sip:192.168.0.10 SIP/2.0
Y
ADD_EXPIRES_HEADER_n
For details about parameter names end with "_n", see 5.2.1 Configuration File Parameters
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether to add an "Expires" header to REGISTER (adds an
"expires" parameter to the "Contact" header).
Value Range
Default Value
• Y : Add Expires Header
• N : Do not add Expires Header
N
ADD_TRANSPORT_UDP_n
For details about parameter names end with "_n", see 5.2.1 Configuration File Parameters
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether to add the attribute "transport=udp" to the SIP header URI.
Value Range • Y : Add Transport UDP
• N : Do not add Transport UDP
Default Value N
SIP_ADD_DIVERSION_n
For details about parameter names end with "_n", see 5.2.1 Configuration File Parameters
Value Format INTEGER
Description
Value Range
Specifies whether to add Diversion header information.
0–2
– 0: Do not add Diversion header information
– 1: Use own diversion information only for the Diversion header
– 2: Add diversion information to existing Diversion header
Default Value 0
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 283
5.3.22 SIP Settings
TRANSFER_RECALL_TIM
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
INTEGER
Specifies the time that the original call is resumed when the forwarding party does not response by Refer method for call transfer.
0, 1–240
0
SIGNAL_COMPRESSION_n
For details about parameter names end with "_n", see 5.2.1 Configuration File Parameters
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies whether to use signal compression. When using signal compression, select Required or Supported.
Value Range • 0: Disable
• 1: Enable (Required)
• 2: Enable (Supported)
Default Value 0
MAX_BREADTH_n
For details about parameter names end with "_n", see 5.2.1 Configuration File Parameters
Value Format INTEGER
Description
Value Range
Specifies the Max Breadth that is max Folk number at Proxy.
0–99 (0: Not add max-breadth header)
Default Value 60
MUTIPART_BOUNDARY_DELIMITTER_n
For details about parameter names end with "_n", see 5.2.1 Configuration File Parameters
Value Format STRING
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Specifies the strings that indicates the boundary for Multipart Bodies.
Max. 70 characters boundary1
RINGTONE_183_180_ENABLE_n
For details about parameter names end with "_n", see 5.2.1 Configuration File Parameters
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
BOOLEAN
Specifies whether to ring the local ringback tone when 180 is received after receiving 183 Early media.
• Y : Performs ringback tone after early media
• N : Does not perform
N
284 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
5.3.22 SIP Settings
SIP_403_REG_SUB_RTX_n
For details about parameter names end with "_n", see 5.2.1 Configuration File Parameters
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
BOOLEAN
Specifies whether or not to send a request when a 403 Forbidden reply is received from the server in response to a REGISTER or
SUBSCRIBE.
• Y : Send
• N : Do not send
N
SIP_FORK_MODE_n
For details about parameter names end with "_n", see 5.2.1 Configuration File Parameters
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether to use SIP Fork.
Value Range
Default Value
• Y : Use SIP Fork
• N : Not use SIP Fork
Y
AKA_AUTHENTICATION_ENABLE_n
For details about parameter names end with "_n", see 5.2.1 Configuration File Parameters
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description
Value Range
Specifies whether to use AKA authentication.
• Y : Use AKA authentication
• N : Not use AKA authentication
Default Value N
RFC2543_HOLD_ENABLE_n
For details about parameter names end with "_n", see 5.2.1 Configuration File Parameters
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether to enable the RFC 2543 Call Hold feature on this line.
Value Range • Y : Enable RFC 2543 Call Hold
• N : Disable RFC 2543 Call Hold
Default Value
Note
• If set to " Y ", the "c=0.0.0.0" syntax will be set in SDP when sending a re-INVITE message to hold the call.
• If set to " N ", the "c=x.x.x.x" syntax will be set in SDP.
Y
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 285
5.3.22 SIP Settings
Web User Interface Reference
Enable c=0.0.0.0 Hold (RFC 2543)
SIP_HOLD_ATTRIBUTE_n
For details about parameter names end with "_n", see 5.2.1 Configuration File Parameters
Value Format INTEGER
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Specifies whether to set "a=inactive " or not when the call is on hold.
• 0: send only
• 1: inactive
0
SDP_USER_ID_n
For details about parameter names end with "_n", see 5.2.1 Configuration File Parameters
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
STRING
Specifies the user ID used in the "o=" line field of SDP.
Max. 32 characters
Empty string
TELEVENT_PAYLOAD
Value Format
Description
INTEGER
Specifies the RFC 2833 payload type for DTMF tones.
Note
• This setting is available only when " DTMF_METHOD_n " is set to
" 0 ".
Value Range
Default Value
96–127
101
Web User Interface Reference
HOLD_SOUND_PATH_n
For details about parameter names end with "_n", see 5.2.1 Configuration File Parameters
Value Format
Description
INTEGER
Specifies whether the unit’s hold tone or the network server’s hold tone (Music on hold) is played when a party is put on hold.
Note
• It is necessary to set the following parameters to play the unit’s hold tone.
– HOLD_TONE_FRQ
– HOLD_TONE_GAIN
286 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
5.3.22 SIP Settings
Value Range
Default Value
0–1
– 0: The unit’s hold tone is played.
– 1: The network server’s hold tone (Music on hold) is played.
0
KEEP_EARLYMEDIA_n
For details about parameter names end with "_n", see 5.2.1 Configuration File Parameters
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether to continue Early Media call or not when 18x without SDP is received after Early Media connection is established while making a call.
Value Range
Default Value
• Y : Continues
• N : Does not continue (Switch to ringback tone)
N
RFC3327_SUPPORT_PATH
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
BOOLEAN
Specifies whether to add "supported: path" to support Path header.
• Y : Adds supported: path
• N : Does not add
Y
RFC4244_SUPPORT_HISTORY
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
BOOLEAN
Specifies whether to add "supported: history" to support History info header.
• Y : Adds supported: history
• N : Does not add
N
RFC3319_SUPPORT_JOIN
Value Format
Description
Value Range
BOOLEAN
Specifies whether to add "supported: join" to support join header.
• Y : Adds supported: join
• N : Does not add
N Default Value
RFC6947_DRAFT08_ALTC
Value Format BOOLEAN
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 287
5.3.22 SIP Settings
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Specifies whether to support RFC6947 draft08 when the attvalue is not attached after altc.
• Y : Performs ALTC by Draft08
• N : Performs ALTC by RFC6947
Y
RFC5627_SUPPORT_GRUU_n
For details about parameter names end with "_n", see 5.2.1 Configuration File Parameters
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description
Value Range
Specifies whether to add "supported: gruu" to support join header.
• Y : Adds supported: gruu
• N : Does not add
Default Value N
ESCAPECODE_CONVERSION
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
BOOLEAN
Specifies whether to convert "#" code to "%23".
• Y : Convert "#" code to "%23"
• N : Does not convert
Y
SIP_REPLACE_ENABLE_n
For details about parameter names end with "_n", see 5.2.1 Configuration File Parameters
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description
Value Range
Specifies whether to use "Replaces" Header.
• Y : Use "Replaces" Header
• N : Do not use "Replaces" Header
Default Value Y
SIP_REFRESHER_n
For details about parameter names end with "_n", see 5.2.1 Configuration File Parameters
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies whether to add the refresher parameter for Session Expire in SIP INVITE.
Value Range 0–2
– 0: Do not add the refresher parameter
– 1: Add the refresher parameter with the value "UAS"
– 2: Add the refresher parameter with the value "UAC"
288 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
5.3.22 SIP Settings
Default Value 0
ENH_FOVR_ENABLE_n
For details about parameter names end with "_n", see 5.2.1 Configuration File Parameters
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Specifies whether to enable Enhanced Failover mode.
• Y : Enable
• N : Disable
N
ENH_FOVR_RANDOM_TIMER_n
For details about parameter names end with "_n", see 5.2.1 Configuration File Parameters
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether the retry timer is a fixed value or a random value when the unit re-sends a REGISTER request when a failover failure has occurred.
Value Range
Default Value
Note
• This setting is available only when "ENH_FOVR_ENABLE_n" is set to "Y".
• For the fixed value setting, see "REG_RTX_INTVL_n" in this section.
• Y : Use a random value
• N : Use a fixed value
N
ENH_FOVR_RANDOM_MAX_TIME_n
For details about parameter names end with "_n", see 5.2.1 Configuration File Parameters
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the maximum value, in seconds, of the retry timer, which determines the interval for re-sending REGISTER requests, when the retry timer is set to be a random value.
Value Range
Default Value
Note
• This setting is available only when
"ENH_FOVR_RANDOM_TIMER_n" is set to "Y".
10-86400
15
ENH_FOVR_RANDOM_MIN_TIME_n
For details about parameter names end with "_n", see 5.2.1 Configuration File Parameters
Value Format INTEGER
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 289
5.3.22 SIP Settings
Description Specifies the minimum value, in seconds, of the retry timer, which determines the interval for re-sending REGISTER requests, when the retry timer is set to be a random value.
Note
• This setting is available only when
"ENH_FOVR_RANDOM_TIMER_n" is set to "Y".
10-86400
10
Value Range
Default Value
SIP_INC_INVITE_RTP_MODE_n
For details about parameter names end with "_n", see 5.2.1 Configuration File Parameters
Value Format INTEGER
Description
Value Range
Specifies whether to send RTP after receiving a second INVITE.
• 0: Start receiving RTP after receiving a second INVITE
• 1: Start sending/receiving RTP after receiving a second INVITE
Default Value 0
SIP_183_TALK_ENABLE
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
BOOLEAN
Specifies whether the unit's sate is "Talking" or "Calling" when it receives a SIP 183 message.
• Y : Talking
• N : Calling
N
SEND_180_ALERT_ENABLE
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
BOOLEAN
Specifies whether to send 180 before an alert.
• Y : Send 180
• N : Do not send 180
N
INVITE_403_REGSEND_ENABLE_n
For details about parameter names end with "_n", see 5.2.1 Configuration File Parameters
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether to enable sending a REGISTER request to the SIP server after receiving 403 error in response to an INVITE request.
Value Range • Y : Enable
• N : Disable
290 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
5.3.23 SIP-TLS Settings
Default Value N
ENH_FOVR_408_ENABLE_n
For details about parameter names end with "_n", see 5.2.1 Configuration File Parameters
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Specifies whether to enable failover after receiving a 408 error from the SIP server.
• Y : Enable
• N : Disable
N
ESCAPECODE_CONVERSION_RFC3986
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
BOOLEAN
Specifies whether to comply with RFC2396 or RFC3986 for reserved characters.
• Y : RFC3986 compliant
• N : RFC2396 compliant
N
5.3.23 SIP-TLS Settings
SIP_TRANSPORT_n
For details about parameter names end with "_n", see 5.2.1 Configuration File Parameters
Value Format
Description
INTEGER
Specifies which transport layer protocol to use for sending SIP packets.
Value Range • 0: UDP
• 1: TCP
• 2: TLS
Default Value 0
Web User Interface Reference
SIP_TLS_MODE_n
For details about parameter names end with "_n", see 5.2.1 Configuration File Parameters
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
INTEGER
Specifies the secure SIP protocol.
• 0: SIPS
• 1: SIP-TLS
0
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 291
5.3.23 SIP-TLS Settings
Web User Interface Reference
SIP_TLS_RECONNECT_n
For details about parameter names end with "_n", see 5.2.1 Configuration File Parameters
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Specifies whether to perform TLS reconnect after TLS session is disconnected.
• Y : Performs TLS connection automatically
• N : Does not perform
Y
SIP_TLS_SRV_PREFIX_n
For details about parameter names end with "_n", see 5.2.1 Configuration File Parameters
Value Format STRING
Description
Value Range
Specifies a prefix to add to the domain name when performing a DNS
SRV lookup using TLS.
Max. 32 characters
Default Value _sips._tcp.
Web User Interface Reference
SIP_TLS_VERIFY_n
For details about parameter names end with "_n", see 5.2.1 Configuration File Parameters
Value Format INTEGER
Description
Value Range
Specifies whether to enable the verification of the root certificate.
• 0: No verification
• 1: Simple verification
• 2: Precise verification
Default Value 0
SIP_TLS_ROOT_CERT_PATH
Value Format
Description
Value Range
STRING
Specifies the URI where the root certificate is stored.
Max. 384 characters
Default Value
Note
• For details about the formats, see
Empty string
292 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
5.3.24 CODEC Settings
SIP_TLS_CLIENT_CERT_PATH
Value Format STRING
Description
Value Range
Specifies the URI where the client certificate is stored.
Max. 384 characters
Default Value
Note
• For details about the formats, see
.
Empty string
SIP_TLS_PKEY_PATH
Value Format
Description
Value Range
STRING
Specifies the URI where the private key is stored.
Max. 384 characters
Note
• For details about the formats, see
.
Empty string Default Value
SIP_TLS_RANDOM_PORT
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
BOOLEAN
Specifies whether to assign a random port (ephemeral port) number or a static port number.
Note
• All lines that use SIP-TLS are defined by this parameter.
• UDP/TCP ports are unaffected by this parameter.
• Y : Assign a random TLS port number
• N : Assign a static TLS port number (Refer to SIP_SRC_PORT_n)
Y
5.3.24 CODEC Settings
CODEC_G729_PARAM_n
For details about parameter names end with "_n", see 5.2.1 Configuration File Parameters
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies whether to add an attribute line, "a=fmtp:18 annexb=no", to
SDP when the codec is set to " G729A ".
Value Range
Default Value
• 0: Do not add "a=fmtp:18 annexb=no"
• 1: Add "a=fmtp:18 annexb=no"
0
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 293
5.3.24 CODEC Settings
CODEC_ENABLEx_n
For details about parameter names end with "_n", see 5.2.1 Configuration File Parameters
Value Format
Description
BOOLEAN
Specifies whether to enable the codec specified in the parameter list.
Value Range
Default Value
Web User Interface Reference
Note
• The "x" character in the parameter title should be changed to one of the following numbers, according to the codec to be changed.
– 0 : G.722
– 1 : PCMA
– 3 : G.729A
– 4 : PCMU
• For codec setting examples, see
• Y : Enable
• N : Disable
Y
•
•
•
•
CODEC_PRIORITYx_n
For details about parameter names end with "_n", see 5.2.1 Configuration File Parameters
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the priority order for the codec.
Value Range
Default Value
Note
• The "x" character in the parameter title should be changed to one of the following numbers, according to the codec to be changed.
– 0 : G.722
– 1 : PCMA
– 3 : G.729A
– 4 : PCMU
• For codec setting examples, see
1–255
1
294 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
5.3.25 DTMF Settings
Web User Interface Reference
INBANDDTMF_VOL
Value Format
Description
•
•
•
•
CODEC_G711_REQ
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
OUTBANDDTMF_VOL
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
INTEGER
Specifies whether to automatically select " PCMU " as the codec when a codec other than " PCMU " is selected.
• 0: Do not set "PCMU"
• 1: Set "PCMU"
1
5.3.25 DTMF Settings
DTMF_METHOD_n
For details about parameter names end with "_n", see 5.2.1 Configuration File Parameters
Value Format
Description
Value Range
INTEGER
Specifies the method to notify the DTMF.
• 0: RFC2833
• 1: Inband
• 2: SIP INFO
• 3: RFC2833 & SIP INFO
Note
• RFC2833 refers to Outband DTMF.
• Inband refers to Inband DTMF.
Default Value 0
Web User Interface Reference
INTEGER
Specifies the volume (in decibels [dB]) of the DTMF tone using RFC
2833.
-63–0
-5
INTEGER
Specifies the volume (in decibels [dB]) of in-band DTMF tones.
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 295
5.3.26 RTP/RTCP/RTCP-XR Settings
Value Range
Default Value
DTMF_SIGNAL_LEN
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
DTMF_INTDIGIT_TIM
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
-46–0
-5
INTEGER
Specifies the length of the DTMF signal, in milliseconds.
60–200
180
INTEGER
Specifies the interval, in milliseconds, between DTMF signals.
60–200
90
5.3.26 RTP/RTCP/RTCP-XR Settings
DSCP_RTP_n
For details about parameter names end with "_n", see 5.2.1 Configuration File Parameters
Value Format INTEGER
Description
Value Range
Specifies the DSCP level of DiffServ applied to RTP packets.
0–63
Default Value 0
Web User Interface Reference
DSCP_RTCP_n
For details about parameter names end with "_n", see 5.2.1 Configuration File Parameters
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the DSCP level of DiffServ applied to RTCP/RTCP-XR packets.
Value Range
Default Value
0–63
0
Web User Interface Reference
MAX_DELAY_n
For details about parameter names end with "_n", see 5.2.1 Configuration File Parameters
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the maximum delay, in 10-millisecond units, of the jitter buffer.
296 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
5.3.26 RTP/RTCP/RTCP-XR Settings
Value Range
Default Value
3–50 (× 10 ms)
Note
• This setting is subject to the following conditions:
– This value must be greater than " NOM_DELAY "
– This value must be greater than " MIN_DELAY "
– " NOM_DELAY " must be greater than or equal to
" MIN_DELAY "
20
MIN_DELAY_n
For details about parameter names end with "_n", see 5.2.1 Configuration File Parameters
Value Format INTEGER
Description
Value Range
Specifies the minimum delay, in 10-millisecond units, of the jitter buffer.
1 or 2 (× 10 ms)
Default Value
Note
• This setting is subject to the following conditions:
– This value must be less than or equal to " NOM_DELAY "
– This value must be less than " MAX_DELAY "
– " MAX_DELAY " must be greater than " NOM_DELAY "
2
NOM_DELAY_n
For details about parameter names end with "_n", see 5.2.1 Configuration File Parameters
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the initial delay, in 10-millisecond units, of the jitter buffer.
Value Range 1–7 (× 10 ms)
Default Value
Note
• This setting is subject to the following conditions:
– This value must be greater than or equal to " MIN_DELAY "
– This value must be less than " MAX_DELAY "
1
RTP_PORT_MIN
Value Format
Description
Value Range
INTEGER
Specifies the lowest port number that the unit will use for RTP packets.
1024–59598 (only even)
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 297
5.3.26 RTP/RTCP/RTCP-XR Settings
Default Value 16000
Web User Interface Reference
RTP_PORT_MAX
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the highest port number that the unit will use for RTP packets.
Value Range
Default Value
1424–59998 (only even)
20000
Web User Interface Reference
RTP_PTIME
Value Format
Description
Value Range
INTEGER
Specifies the interval, in milliseconds, between transmissions of RTP packets.
• 20
• 30
• 40
• 60
Default Value 20
Web User Interface Reference
RTCP_ENABLE_n
For details about parameter names end with "_n", see 5.2.1 Configuration File Parameters
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether to enable or disable RTCP (Real-Time Transport
Control Protocol). For details, refer to RFC 3550.
Value Range • Y : Enable RTCP
• N : Disable RTCP
Default Value N
Web User Interface Reference
RTCP_INTVL_n
For details about parameter names end with "_n", see 5.2.1 Configuration File Parameters
Value Format INTEGER
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Specifies the interval, in seconds, between RTCP/RTCP-XR packets.
5–65535
5
Web User Interface Reference
298 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
5.3.27 SRTP Settings
RTCP_SEND_BY_SDP_n
For details about parameter names end with "_n", see 5.2.1 Configuration File Parameters
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
INTEGER
Specifies whether to send RTCP signals by SDP (Session
Description Protocol).
0–1
– 0: Send RTCP signals using the value specified in
" RTCP_INTVL_n ", if the " RTCP_ENABLE_n " parameter is enabled.
– 1: Send RTCP signals using the value specified in the SDP attribute "a=rtcp:".
0
RTP_CLOSE_ENABLE_n
For details about parameter names end with "_n", see 5.2.1 Configuration File Parameters
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
BOOLEAN
Specifies whether to enable processing to close held RTP sockets.
• Y : Enable RTP Close
• N : Disable RTP Close
N
RTCPXR_ENABLE_n
For details about parameter names end with "_n", see 5.2.1 Configuration File Parameters
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether to enable or disable RTCP-XR.
Value Range • Y : Enable RTCP-XR
• N : Disable
Default Value N
Web User Interface Reference
5.3.27 SRTP Settings
SRTP_CONNECT_MODE_n
For details about parameter names end with "_n", see 5.2.1 Configuration File Parameters
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the mode of SRTP feature.
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 299
5.3.27 SRTP Settings
Value Range • 0: SRTP
• 1: RTP/SRTP
• 2: Panasonic Original
• 3: SRTP/RTP
Note
• 0: Use only SRTP for outgoing and incoming calls.
• 1: Use only RTP for outgoing calls, and RTP or SRTP for incoming calls.
• 2: Use RTP or SRTP for both outgoing and incoming calls.
This value is valid only when the unit is connected to a
Panasonic PBX.
"SRTP_MIX_TRANSFER_ENABLE_n" must also be set to "Y".
• 3: If you are using "RTP/AVP" and append "a=crypto", and the response message includes "a=crypto", the conversation will be established with SRTP. If "a=crypto" is not included, the conversation will be established with RTP.
Default Value 1
Web User Interface Reference
SRTP_MIX_CONFERENCE_ENABLE_n
For details about parameter names end with "_n", see 5.2.1 Configuration File Parameters
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether to allow conferences where each participant can use either SRTP or RTP.
Value Range • Y : Enable
• N : Disable
Default Value N
Web User Interface Reference
Enable Mixed SRTP & RTP by Conference
SRTP_MIX_TRANSFER_ENABLE_n
For details about parameter names end with "_n", see 5.2.1 Configuration File Parameters
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether to allow call transfers between a user who is using
SRTP and a user who is using RTP.
Value Range • Y : Enable
• N : Disable
Default Value N
Web User Interface Reference
Enable Mixed SRTP & RTP by Transfer
300 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
5.3.27 SRTP Settings
SRTP_HELD_CALL_RTP_ENABLE
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Specifies whether to allow playing the melody on hold over RTP on a call that is using SRTP.
• Y : Enable
• N : Disable
Y
SRTP_CALL_MODE_ENABLE (For KX-HDV230/KX-HDV330/KX-HDV430)
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
BOOLEAN
Specifies whether to enable the unit to use only encrypted call mode
(SRTP dedicated mode).
• Y : Enable only encrypted call mode (SRTP dedicated mode)
• N : Disable
N
DISPLAY_SRTP_CALL_ENABLE
Value Format
Description
BOOLEAN
Selects whether an icon is displayed when the unit is using encrypted call mode (SRTP).
Value Range
Default Value
Note
If you enable displaying the encrypted call mode icon during
SRTP calls, it is recommended that you set
SIP_TRANSPORT_n="2" to encrypt the SIP packets using TLS encryption.
• Y : Display an icon for encrypted calls
• N : Disable
N
SRTP_VIDEO_CALL_SDP_ENABLE_n (For KX-HDV430)
Parameter Name Example
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
For details about parameter names end with "_n", see
5.2.1 Configuration File Parameters
BOOLEAN
Specifies whether to enable video calls with SDP in SRTP mode.
• Y : Enable to Video Call for SDP
• N : Disable
Y
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 301
5.3.28 VQ Report by PUBLISH
5.3.28 VQ Report by PUBLISH
VQREPORT_COLLECTOR_ADDRESS
Value Format
Description
Value Range
STRING
Specifies the IP address or FQDN of the collector server.
Max. 256 characters
Default Value Empty string
Web User Interface Reference
VQREPORT_COLLECTOR_PORT
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
INTEGER
Specifies the port of the collector server.
1–65535
5060
Web User Interface Reference
VQREPORT_SEND
Value Format
Description
Value Range
INTEGER
Specifies the sending type of the VQ report using PUBLISH.
• 0: Disable
• 1: End of Session Report Using PUBLISH
• 2: Interval report Using PUBLISH
• 3: Alert Report Using PUBLISH
Default Value 0
Web User Interface Reference
ALERT_REPORT_TRIGGER
Value Format INTEGER
Description
Value Range
Specifies the trigger to notify the VQ report.
• 0: Warning
• 1: Critical
Default Value 0
Web User Interface Reference
ALERT_REPORT_MOSQ_CRITICAL
Value Format
Description
Value Range
INTEGER
Specifies the critical criteria to send VQ report at the time of occurring the MOSQ.
0–40
302 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
5.3.28 VQ Report by PUBLISH
Default Value 0
Web User Interface Reference
ALERT_REPORT_MOSQ_WARNING
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the warning criteria to send VQ report at the time of occurring the MOSQ.
Value Range
Default Value
0–40
0
Web User Interface Reference
ALERT_REPORT_DELAY_CRITICAL
Value Format
Description
Value Range
INTEGER
Specifies the critical criteria to send VQ report at the time of occurring the delay.
0–2000
Default Value 0
Web User Interface Reference
ALERT_REPORT_DELAY_WARNING
Value Format
Description
INTEGER
Specifies the warning criteria to send VQ report at the time of occurring the delay.
Value Range
Default Value
0–2000
0
Web User Interface Reference
VQREPORT_SIGNAL_COMPRESSION
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
BOOLEAN
Specifies whether to use signal compression for sending VQ report.
• Y : Enable
• N : Disable
N
VQREPORT_SEND_OPT_CODEC_ENABLE
Value Format
Description
Value Range
BOOLEAN
Specifies whether to enable the sending of VQREPORT (SIP-
PUBLISH) when the codec is changed.
• Y : Send VQREPORT when a change of codec is detected
• N : Send VQREPORT at the end of a conversation
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 303
5.3.29 uaCSTA Settings
Default Value
VQREPORT_SEND_OPT_NW_CHANGE
Value Format
Description
INTEGER
Specifies the number of consecutive times the MOS (Mean Opinion
Score) value may fall below the threshold value specified by either
ALERT_REPORT_MOSQ_CRITICAL or
ALERT_REPORT_MOSQ_WARNING before the phone sends
VQREPORT.
The ALERT_REPORT_TRIGGER setting determines whether
ALERT_REPORT_MOSQ_CRITICAL or
ALERT_REPORT_MOSQ_WARNING is used as the threshold.
Value Range 0–5
(The number of consecutive times. 0:Disable)
Default Value
Note
If "2" is specified and the MOS value falls within the threshold 2 consecutive times, VQREPORT is sent.
0
5.3.29 uaCSTA Settings
UACSTA_ENABLE_n
For details about parameter names end with "_n", see 5.2.1 Configuration File Parameters
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description
Value Range
Specifies whether to enable or disable the uaCSTA feature.
• Y : Enable
• N : Disable
Default Value N
UACSTA_UNIQUE_ID
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
CSTA_PORT
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
N
STRING
Specifies the SIP-URI for registering to CSTA server.
Max. 64 characters
Empty string
INTEGER
Specifies the source port number used by the unit for uaCSTA communication.
1–65535
6060
304 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
5.3.29 uaCSTA Settings
CSTA_PRXY_ADDR
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
CSTA_PRXY_PORT
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
CSTA_RGSTR_ADDR
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
CSTA_RGSTR_PORT
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
CSTA_REG_EXPIRE_TIME
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
CSTA_TRANSPORT
Value Format
Description
Value Range
STRING
Specifies the IP address or FQDN of the proxy server for CSTA.
Max. 256 characters
Empty string
INTEGER
Specifies the port of the proxy server for CSTA.
1–65535
5060
STRING
Specifies the IP address or FQDN of the registrar server for CSTA.
Max. 256 characters
Empty string
INTEGER
Specifies the port of the registrar server for CSTA.
1–65535
5060
INTEGER
Specifies the length of time, in seconds, that the registration remains valid. This value is set in the "Expires" header of the REGISTER request for CSTA.
1–4294967295
3600
INTEGER
Specifies which transport layer protocol to use for sending SIP packets.
• 0: UDP
• 1: TCP
• 2: TLS
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 305
5.3.30 Telephone Settings
Default Value
CSTA_RGSTR_AUTHID
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
CSTA_RGSTR_PASS
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
0
STRING
Specifies the authentication ID for received REGISTER.
Max. 128 characters
Empty string
STRING
Specifies the authentication password for received REGISTER.
Max. 128 characters
Empty string
5.3.30 Telephone Settings
POWER_ON_DISPLAY_LOGO_PATH
Value Format
Description
STRING
Specifies URI for logo image file displayed when power is turned on.
Value Range
Default Value
Note
KX-HDV130/KX-HDV230
• Size: 132 × 64
• File type: BMP (1 bit)
KX-HDV330/KX-HDV430
• Size: 480 × 272
• File type: JPEG, PNG, BMP, GIF
Max. 384 characters
Note
•
For details about the formats, see 2.1.3 Server Address
Empty string
FIRSTDIGIT_TIM
Value Format
Description
INTEGER
Specifies the length of time, in seconds, within which the first digits of a dial number must be dialed.
Value Range
Default Value
1–600 (s)
30
Web User Interface Reference
306 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
5.3.30 Telephone Settings
INTDIGIT_TIM
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the length of time, in seconds, within which subsequent digits of a dial number must be dialed.
Value Range
Default Value
1–15 (s)
5
Web User Interface Reference
POUND_KEY_DELIMITER_ENABLE
Value Format
Description
Value Range
BOOLEAN
Specifies whether the # key is treated as a regular dialed digit or a delimiter, when dialed as or after the second digit.
• Y : # is treated as the end of dialing delimiter
• N : # is treated as a regular dialed digit
Default Value Y
Web User Interface Reference
RINGTONE_SETTING_n
For details about parameter names end with "_n", see 5.2.1 Configuration File Parameters
Value Format INTEGER
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Specifies the ringtone to each line for a unit.
1–32
RINGTONE_SETTING_1=1 , RINGTONE_SETTING_2=2 ,
RINGTONE_SETTING_3=3 , RINGTONE_SETTING_4=4 ,
RINGTONE_SETTING_5=5 , RINGTONE_SETTING_6=6 ,
RINGTONE_SETTING_7=7 , RINGTONE_SETTING_8=8 ,
RINGTONE_SETTING_9=1 , RINGTONE_SETTING_10=2 ,
RINGTONE_SETTING_11=3 , RINGTONE_SETTING_12=4 ,
RINGTONE_SETTING_13=5 , RINGTONE_SETTING_14=6 ,
RINGTONE_SETTING_15=7 , RINGTONE_SETTING_16=8
DISPLAY_NAME_REPLACE
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
BOOLEAN
Specifies whether the name saved in the phonebook is used in place of the name display if a matching entry is found.
• Y : Enable Display Name Replace
• N : Disable Display Name Replace
Y
NUMBER_MATCHING_LOWER_DIGIT
Value Format INTEGER
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 307
5.3.30 Telephone Settings
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Specifies the minimum number of digits with which to match a phonebook entry with an incoming call’s caller ID.
0–15
7
NUMBER_MATCHING_UPPER_DIGIT
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
INTEGER
Specifies the maximum number of digits with which to match a phonebook entry with an incoming call’s caller ID.
0–15
10
FLASH_RECALL_TERMINATE
Value Format
Description
Value Range
BOOLEAN
Specifies the function of the "Flash/Recall" button during a conversation.
• Y : Terminate
• N : EFA
Default Value Y
FLASHHOOK_CONTENT_TYPE
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
STRING
Specifies the type of signal sent when sending a flash hook event.
• Signal
• flashhook
Signal
NUM_PLAN_PARKING
Value Format
Description
STRING
Specifies the call parking number.
Value Range
Default Value
0–4 digits (0–9,*, #)
Empty string
Web User Interface Reference
CALLPARK_KEY_ENABLE
Value Format
Description
Value Range
BOOLEAN
Specifies whether to display "Call Park" in the Call Parking Func menu.
• Y : Enable
• N : Disable
308 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
5.3.30 Telephone Settings
Default Value N
Web User Interface Reference
NUM_PLAN_PARK_RETRIEVING
Value Format STRING
Description
Value Range
Specifies the park retrieve number.
0–4 digits (0–9,*, #)
Default Value Empty string
Web User Interface Reference
IDLE_SOFT_KEY_PARK_RETRIEVING (For KX-HDV130/KX-HDV230)
Value Format
Description
INTEGER
Specifies whether to have soft key for the park retrieving.
Note
• This feature is available only when
" CALLPARK_NOTIFICATION_ENABLE_n " is set to " Y ", and
" NUM_PLAN_PARK_RETRIEVING " is set (see
CALLPARK_NOTIFICATION_ENABLE_n ,
).
Value Range • 0: Not Use
• 1: Soft Key A (Left)
• 2: Soft Key B (Center)
• 3: Soft Key C (Right)
Default Value 0
Web User Interface Reference
Park Retrieve Soft Key (For KX-HDV130/KX-HDV230)
HOLD_RECALL_TIM
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
INTEGER
Specifies the duration of the hold recall timer. If set to "0", the function is disabled.
0–240 (0: Disable)
60
HOLD_TRANSFER_OPERATION
Value Format
Description
Value Range
BOOLEAN
Specifies whether to transfer a call by Hold button.
• Y : Enable (Press the Hold button to transfer a call.) talk → hold → 2nd talk → Transfer (or on-hook)
• N : Disable (Press the Transfer button to transfer a call.) talk → transfer → 2nd talk → transfer (or on-hook)
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 309
5.3.30 Telephone Settings
Default Value N
ONHOOK_TRANSFER_ENABLE
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
BOOLEAN
Specifies whether to enable on hook transfer when
HOLD_TRANSFER_OPERATION =" N ".
• Y : Enable On-hook Transfer
• N : Disable On-hook Transfer
Y
ONHOOK_HOLD_TRNS_ENABLE
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
BOOLEAN
Specifies whether to enable on hook transfer when
HOLD_TRANSFER_OPERATION =" Y ".
• Y : Enable On-hook Transfer
• N : Disable On-hook Transfer
N
BLIND_TRANSFER_ENABLE
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
BOOLEAN
Specifies whether to enable blind transfer.
• Y : Enable
• N : Disable
Y
SYS_LOCK_ENABLE
Value Format
Description
Value Range
BOOLEAN
Specifies whether to enable locking the unit.
• Y : Enable
• N : Disable
Default Value N
Web User Interface Reference
SYS_LOCK_PASSWORD
Value Format
Description
Value Range
STRING
Specifies the password for unlocking the unit.
Null, 4 digits (0–9)
Default Value Empty string
Web User Interface Reference
310 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
5.3.30 Telephone Settings
PAUSE_INPUT_ENABLE
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
BOOLEAN
Specifies whether to enable or disable pause input.
• Y : Enable
• N : Disable
N
NUM_PLAN_PICKUP_DIRECT
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
STRING
Specifies the feature number assigned to a BLF for performing call pickup.
0–4 digits (0–9, *, #)
Empty string
Web User Interface Reference
NUM_PLAN_BARGE_IN
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
STRING
Specifies the feature number for performing barging in.
0–4 digits (0–9, *, #)
Empty string
Web User Interface Reference
DISP_NUM_PHONEBOOK_ENABLE (For KX-HDV330/KX-HDV430)
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Specifies whether the number of remaining items is displayed when a new item is registered in phonebook.
• Y : Enable
• N : Disable
Y
WALLPAPER_WAIT_TIME
Value Format
Description
Value Range
INTEGER
Specifies the time, in seconds, to wait for the screen saver to display.
• 0 (Do not display the screen saver)
• 10
• 30
• 60
• 180
• 300
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 311
5.3.30 Telephone Settings
Default Value 0
Web User Interface Reference
CNIP_FROM_ENABLE
Value Format
Description
Value Range
BOOLEAN
Specifies whether to use the 'FROM' header or the 'PAI' header in
CNIP (Calling Number Identification Presentation).
• Y : Use 'FROM' header
• N : Use 'PAI' header
N Default Value
IDLE_DISPLAY_TYPE
Value Format
Description
Value Range
INTEGER
Specifies what is shown on the display in standby mode.
• 0: Off
• 1: Phone Number
• 2: Phone Number and Name
• 3: Name
Note
"Name" is the display name for the line.
1 Default Value
CNIP_CALL_PAI_ENABLE
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
BOOLEAN
Specifies whether to enable using the 'PAI' header in CNIP (Calling
Number Identification Presentation) on the display when calling.
• Y : Enable
• N : Disable
Y
SOFT_KEY_LABELx (For KX-HDV130/KX-HDV230)
Value Format
Description
STRING x=1-3
Specifies the text of the soft keys displayed on the screen for quick dialing.
Value Range
Note
This setting is available only when
"DISCLOSE_FUNCTION_ENABLE" is set to "Y".
Max. 5 characters
312 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
5.3.30 Telephone Settings
Default Value SOFT_KEY_LABEL1: 1
SOFT_KEY_LABEL2: 2
SOFT_KEY_LABEL3: 3
SOFT_KEY_QUICK_DIALx (For KX-HDV130/KX-HDV230)
Value Format
Description
STRING x=1-3
Specifies quick-dial numbers to assign to the soft keys.
Value Range
Default Value
Note
This setting is available only when
"DISCLOSE_FUNCTION_ENABLE" is set to "Y".
Max. 32 characters
Empty string
BLF_DISPLAY_OFF_OUTGOING
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
BOOLEAN
Specifies whether to display the phone numbers of BLF keys or PAI after dialing.
• Y : Do not display
• N : Display the phone numbers
N
SPLIT_HOLD_TRNS_ENABLE
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Specifies whether to enable the Call Split feature by pressing the
HOLD key while a call is either on transfer hold or conference hold.
• Y : Enable the Call Split feature by using the HOLD key
• N : Disable
N
NUM_PLAN_PICKUP_GROUP
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
STRING
Specifies the feature number for performing "Group Pickup".
0–4 digits (0–9, *, #)
Empty string
Web User Interface Reference
PB_QUICK_SEARCH_ENABLE (For KX-HDV330/KX-HDV430)
Value Format
Description
BOOLEAN
Specifies whether to enable using the Quick-search operation when searching for an item in the phonebook.
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 313
5.3.30 Telephone Settings
Value Range • Y : Enable
• N : Disable
N Default Value
CALLPARK_METHOD
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
INTEGER
Specifies the method for the "Call Park" function.
• 1: Info message type
• 2: Refer type
2
CALL_PARK_PROG_KEY_MODE
Value Format INTEGER
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Specifies the Call Park operation when it is assigned to a function key.
• 0: Numbering plan
• 1: Specified park area with "CALLPARK_METHOD".
0
SUBS_CALLPARK_AREA_ENABLE
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
BOOLEAN
Specifies whether to send "SUBSCRIBE" for each call park area.
• Y : Enable sending "SUBSCRIBE" for each call park area.
• N : Disable
N
RINGER_VOLUME_LEVEL
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
INTEGER
Specifies the value of the ringer volume.
0-8
5
RINGER_VOL_OPERATION_ENABLE
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
BOOLEAN
Specifies whether to enable ringer volume adjustment.
• Y : Enable ringer volume adjustment
• N : Disable
Y
314 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
5.3.31 Flexible Key Settings
5.3.31 Flexible Key Settings
FLEX_BUTTON_FACILITY_ACTx
Value Format
Description
STRING x=1–2 – KX-HDV130 x=1–24 – KX-HDV230/KX-HDV330/KX-HDV430
Specifies a particular Facility Action for the flexible Key. Nofacility action will be taken for the button if the string is empty or invalid.
Note
• If this parameter is specified, " FLEX_BUTTON_QUICK_DIALx " should be an empty string.
Value Range KX-HDV130
X_PANASONIC_IPTEL_LINE ,
X_PANASONIC_IPTEL_ONETOUCH ,
X_PANASONIC_IPTEL_ACD ,
X_PANASONIC_IPTEL_WRAPUP ,
X_PANASONIC_IPTEL_BLF ,
X_PANASONIC_IPTEL_FORWARD ,
X_PANASONIC_IPTEL_CALLPARK ,
X_PANASONIC_IPTEL_APPLICATION ,
X_PANASONIC_IPTEL_GROUPPICKUP
KX-HDV230/KX-HDV330/KX-HDV430
X_PANASONIC_IPTEL_LINE ,
X_PANASONIC_IPTEL_ONETOUCH ,
X_PANASONIC_IPTEL_ACD ,
X_PANASONIC_IPTEL_WRAPUP ,
X_PANASONIC_IPTEL_BLF ,
X_PANASONIC_IPTEL_LINESTATUS ,
X_PANASONIC_IPTEL_FORWARD ,
X_PANASONIC_IPTEL_PHONEBOOK ,
X_PANASONIC_IPTEL_CALLLOG ,
X_PANASONIC_IPTEL_PARARING ,
X_PANASONIC_IPTEL_HOTELING ,
X_PANASONIC_IPTEL_TRANSFER ,
X_PANASONIC_IPTEL_BLINDTRANSFER ,
X_PANASONIC_IPTEL_CONFERENCE ,
X_PANASONIC_IPTEL_DIRECTPICKUP ,
X_PANASONIC_IPTEL_CALLPARK ,
X_PANASONIC_IPTEL_PARKRETRIEVE ,
X_PANASONIC_IPTEL_APPLICATION ,
X_PANASONIC_IPTEL_GROUPPICKUP ,
X_PANASONIC_IPTEL_PRESENCE ,
X_PANASONIC_IPTEL_MYPHONE ,
X_PANASONIC_IPTEL_NETWORKCAMERA (For KX-HDV430)
Default Value Empty string
Web User Interface Reference
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 315
5.3.31 Flexible Key Settings
FLEX_BUTTON_FACILITY_ARGx
Value Format STRING
Description
KX-HDV130
KX-HDV230/KX-HDV330/
KX-HDV430
: x=1–2
: x=1–24
Value Range
Specifies an optional argument associated with the specified Facility
Action for the flexible Key.
Max. 32 characters (For KX-HDV130)
Max. 128 characters (For KX-HDV230/KX-HDV330/KX-HDV430)
Default Value Empty string
Web User Interface Reference
FLEX_BUTTON_LABELx (For KX-HDV230/KX-HDV330/KX-HDV430)
Value Format
Description
Value Range
STRING x=1–24
Specifies the name of flexible key to be displayed on the screen.
Max. 20 characters
Note
• You can use Unicode characters for this setting.
Default Value Empty string
Web User Interface Reference
FLEX_BUTTON_QUICK_DIALx
Value Format
Description
STRING
Value Range
Default Value
KX-HDV130
KX-HDV230/KX-HDV330/KX-HDV430
: x=1–2
: x=1–24
Specifies a quick dial destination number to be used for the flexible
Key.
Max. 32 digits (0–9, *, #)
Empty string
LONG_PRESS_KEY_SETTING_ENABLE (For KX-HDV230/KX-HDV330/
KX-HDV430)
Value Format BOOLEAN
316 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
5.3.32 DSS Key Settings (For KX-HDV230/KX-HDV330/KX-HDV430)
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Selects whether to enable or disable the flexible key or DSS key with a long press.
Note
For KX-HDV330/KX-HDV430, this function is valid only for DSS key.
• Y : Enable
• N : Disable
Y
5.3.32 DSS Key Settings (For KX-HDV230/KX-HDV330/
KX-HDV430)
DSS_BUTTON_FACILITY_ACTx
Value Format
Description
STRING x=1–200
Specifies a particular Facility Action for the flexible key. No facility action will be taken for the button if the string is empty or invalid.
Note
• If this parameter is specified, " DSS_BUTTON_QUICK_DIALx " should be an empty string.
Value Range X_PANASONIC_IPTEL_LINE,
X_PANASONIC_IPTEL_ONETOUCH,
X_PANASONIC_IPTEL_ACD,
X_PANASONIC_IPTEL_WRAPUP,
X_PANASONIC_IPTEL_BLF,
X_PANASONIC_IPTEL_LINESTATUS,
X_PANASONIC_IPTEL_FORWARD,
X_PANASONIC_IPTEL_PHONEBOOK,
X_PANASONIC_IPTEL_CALLLOG,
X_PANASONIC_IPTEL_PARARING,
X_PANASONIC_IPTEL_HOTELING,
X_PANASONIC_IPTEL_TRANSFER,
X_PANASONIC_IPTEL_BLINDTRANSFER,
X_PANASONIC_IPTEL_CONFERENCE,
X_PANASONIC_IPTEL_DIRECTPICKUP,
X_PANASONIC_IPTEL_CALLPARK,
X_PANASONIC_IPTEL_PARKRETRIEVE,
X_PANASONIC_IPTEL_APPLICATION,
X_PANASONIC_IPTEL_GROUPPICKUP,
X_PANASONIC_IPTEL_PRESENCE,
X_PANASONIC_IPTEL_MYPHONE,
X_PANASONIC_IPTEL_NETWORKCAMERA (For KX-HDV430)
Default Value Empty string
Web User Interface Reference
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 317
5.3.33 Tone Settings
DSS_BUTTON_FACILITY_ARGx
Value Format STRING
Description x=1–200
Specifies an optional argument associated with the specified Facility
Action for the flexible key.
Value Range
Default Value
Max. 128 characters
Empty string
Web User Interface Reference
DSS_BUTTON_LABELx
Value Format
Description
Value Range
STRING x=1–200
Specifies the name of flexible key to be displayed on the screen.
Max. 20 characters
Note
• You can use Unicode characters for this setting.
Default Value Empty string
Web User Interface Reference
DSS_BUTTON_QUICK_DIALx
Value Format STRING
Description
Value Range
Default Value x=1–200
Specifies a quick dial destination number to be used for the flexible key.
Max. 32 digits (0–9, *, #)
Empty string
5.3.33 Tone Settings
OUTSIDE_DIAL_TONE_FRQ
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Comma-separated Integer
Specifies the dual-tone frequencies, in hertz, of Second Dial Tone using max. 2 whole numbers separated by a comma.
0, 200–2000 (Hz) (0=No tone)
420
OUTSIDE_DIAL_TONE_GAIN
Value Format INTEGER
Description
Value Range
Specifies the gain, in decibels, of Second Dial Tone
-24–24 (dB)
318 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
5.3.33 Tone Settings
Default Value 0
OUTSIDE_DIAL_TONE_RPT
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
INTEGER
Specifies whether Second Dial Tone is repeated.
• 0: No Repeat
• 1: Repeat
0
OUTSIDE_DIAL_TONE_TIMING
Value Format
Description
Comma-separated Integer
Specifies the pattern, in milliseconds, of Second Dial Tone using Max.
10 whole numbers (off 1, on 1, off 2, on 2…) separated by commas.
Value Range
Default Value
0–16000 (msec) (0=Continuous)
60,0
CONFIRMATION_TONE5_FRQ
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Comma-separated Integer
Specifies the confirmation tone 5 frequencies, in hertz, of confirmation tone 5 using Max. 2 whole numbers separated by a comma.
200–2000 (Hz) (0: no tone)
1000
CONFIRMATION_TONE5_GAIN
Value Format INTEGER
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Specifies the gain, in decibels, of confirmation tone 5.
-24–24 (dB)
0
REORDER_TONE_ENABLE
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
BOOLEAN
Specifies whether to enable reorder tone.
• Y : Enable
• N : Disable
Y
TONE_LEN_DISCONNECT
Value Format INTEGER
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 319
5.3.33 Tone Settings
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Specifies the duration, in seconds, that a disconnect tone will be heard when the other party ends a call and the unit is being used.
1–15 (s)
3
DIAL_TONE1_FRQ
Value Format
Description
Comma-separated Integer
Specifies the dual-tone frequencies, in hertz, of Dial Tone 1 using 2 whole numbers separated by a comma.
Value Range
Default Value
0, 200–2000 (Hz) (0: No tone)
350,440
Web User Interface Reference
DIAL_TONE1_GAIN
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
DIAL_TONE1_RPT
Value Format
Description
Value Range
INTEGER
Specifies the gain, in decibels, of Dial Tone 1.
-24–24 (dB)
0
Default Value
INTEGER
Specifies whether Dial Tone 1 is repeated.
0–1
– 0: No Repeat
– 1: Repeat
0
DIAL_TONE1_TIMING
Value Format
Description
Comma-separated Integer
Specifies the pattern, in milliseconds, of Dial Tone 1 using up to 10 whole numbers (off 1, on 1, off 2, on 2…) separated by commas.
Value Range
Note
• It is recommended that you set a value of 60 milliseconds or more for the first value (off 1).
0–16000 (msec) (0=Continuous)
Note
• Avoid setting 1–50 for any of the values.
Default Value 60,0
Web User Interface Reference
320 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
5.3.33 Tone Settings
DIAL_TONE2_FRQ
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
DIAL_TONE2_GAIN
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
DIAL_TONE2_RPT
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
DIAL_TONE2_TIMING
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
DIAL_TONE4_FRQ
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Document Version: 2017-07
Comma-separated Integer
Specifies the dual-tone frequencies, in hertz, of Dial Tone 2 using 2 whole numbers separated by a comma.
0, 200–2000 (Hz) (0: No tone)
350,440
INTEGER
Specifies the gain, in decibels, of Dial Tone 2.
-24–24 (dB)
0
INTEGER
Specifies whether Dial Tone 2 is repeated.
0–1
– 0: No Repeat
– 1: Repeat
0
Comma-separated Integer
Specifies the pattern, in milliseconds, of Dial Tone 2 using up to 10 whole numbers (off 1, on 1, off 2, on 2…) separated by commas.
Note
• It is recommended that you set a value of 60 milliseconds or more for the first value (off 1).
0–16000 (msec) (0:Infinite time)
Note
• Avoid setting 1–50 for any of the values.
60,0
Comma-separated Integer
Specifies the dual-tone frequencies, in hertz, of Dial Tone 4 (stutter dial tones) to notify that a voice mail is waiting, using 2 whole numbers separated by a comma.
0, 200–2000 (Hz) (0: No tone)
Administrator Guide 321
5.3.33 Tone Settings
Default Value 350,440
Web User Interface Reference
DIAL_TONE4_GAIN
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
DIAL_TONE4_RPT
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
INTEGER
Specifies the gain, in decibels, of Dial Tone 4 (stutter-type dial tone).
-24–24 (dB)
0
INTEGER
Specifies whether Dial Tone 4 (stutter-type dial tone) is repeated.
0–1
– 0: No Repeat
– 1: Repeat
0
DIAL_TONE4_TIMING
Value Format
Description
Comma-separated Integer
Specifies the pattern, in milliseconds, of Dial Tone 4 (stutter dial tones) to notify that a voice mail is waiting, using up to 22 whole numbers (off 1, on 1, off 2, on 2…) separated by commas.
Value Range
Note
• It is recommended that you set a value of 560 milliseconds or more for the first value (off 1).
0–16000 (msec) (0: Continuous)
Note
• Avoid setting 1–50 for any of the values.
Default Value 560,100,100,100,100,100,100,100,100,100,100,100,100,100,100,10
0,100,100,100,100,100,0
Web User Interface Reference
BUSY_TONE_FRQ
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Comma-separated Integer
Specifies the dual-tone frequencies, in hertz, of busy tones using 2 whole numbers separated by a comma.
0, 200–2000 (Hz) (0: No tone)
480,620
Web User Interface Reference
322 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
5.3.33 Tone Settings
BUSY_TONE_GAIN
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
BUSY_TONE_RPT
Value Format
Description
Value Range
INTEGER
Specifies the gain, in decibels, of the busy tone.
-24–24 (dB)
0
Default Value
INTEGER
Specifies whether the busy tone is repeated.
0–1
– 0: No Repeat
– 1: Repeat
1
BUSY_TONE_TIMING
Value Format
Description
Comma-separated Integer
Specifies the pattern, in milliseconds, of busy tones using up to 10 whole numbers (off 1, on 1, off 2, on 2…) separated by commas.
Value Range
Note
• It is recommended that you set a value of 60 milliseconds or more for the first value (off 1).
0–16000 (msec) (0: Continuous)
Note
• Avoid setting 1–50 for any of the values.
Default Value 60,500,440
Web User Interface Reference
REORDER_TONE_FRQ
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Comma-separated Integer
Specifies the dual-tone frequencies, in hertz, of reorder tones using 2 whole numbers separated by a comma.
0, 200–2000 (Hz) (0: No tone)
480,620
Web User Interface Reference
REORDER_TONE_GAIN
Value Format
Description
Value Range
INTEGER
Specifies the gain, in decibels, of the reorder tone.
-24–24 (dB)
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 323
5.3.33 Tone Settings
Default Value
REORDER_TONE_RPT
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
0
INTEGER
Specifies whether the reorder tone is repeated.
0–1
– 0: No Repeat
– 1: Repeat
1
REORDER_TONE_TIMING
Value Format
Description
Comma-separated Integer
Specifies the pattern, in milliseconds, of reorder tones using up to 10 whole numbers (off 1, on 1, off 2, on 2…) separated by commas.
Note
• It is recommended that you set a value of 60 milliseconds or more for the first value (off 1).
0–16000 (msec) (0: Continuous) Value Range
Note
• Avoid setting 1–50 for any of the values.
Default Value 60,250,190
Web User Interface Reference
RINGBACK_TONE_FRQ
Value Format
Description
Comma-separated Integer
Specifies the dual-tone frequencies, in hertz, of ringback tones using
2 whole numbers separated by a comma.
Value Range
Default Value
0, 200–2000 (Hz) (0: No tone)
440,480
Web User Interface Reference
RINGBACK_TONE_GAIN
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
INTEGER
Specifies the gain, in decibels, of the ringback tone.
-24–24 (dB)
0
RINGBACK_TONE_RPT
Value Format INTEGER
324 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
5.3.33 Tone Settings
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Specifies whether the ringback tone is repeated.
0–1
– 0: No Repeat
– 1: Repeat
1
RINGBACK_TONE_TIMING
Value Format
Description
Comma-separated Integer
Specifies the pattern, in milliseconds, of ringback tones using up to
10 whole numbers (off 1, on 1, off 2, on 2…) separated by commas.
Value Range
Note
• It is recommended that you set a value of 60 milliseconds or more for the first value (off 1).
0–16000 (msec) (0: Continuous)
Note
• Avoid setting 1–50 for any of the values.
Default Value 60,2000,3940
Web User Interface Reference
HOLD_ALARM_FRQ
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Comma-separated Integer
Specifies the dual-tone frequencies, in hertz, of the hold alarm using
2 whole numbers separated by a comma.
0, 200–2000 (Hz) (0: No tone)
425
HOLD_ALARM_GAIN
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
CW_TONE1_FRQ
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
INTEGER
Specifies the gain, in decibels, of the hold alarm.
-24–24 (dB)
0
Comma-separated Integer
Specifies the dual-tone frequencies, in hertz, of call waiting tone 1 using 2 whole numbers separated by a comma.
0, 200–2000 (Hz) (0: No tone)
425
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 325
5.3.33 Tone Settings
CW_TONE1_GAIN
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
HOLD_TONE_FRQ
Value Format
Description
INTEGER
Specifies the gain, in decibels, of call waiting tone 1.
-24–24 (dB)
0
Value Range
Default Value
HOLD_TONE_GAIN
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Comma-separated Integer
Specifies the dual-tone frequencies, in hertz, of the hold tone using 2 whole numbers separated by a comma.
0, 200–2000 (Hz) (0: No tone)
425
INTEGER
Specifies the gain, in decibels, of the hold tone.
-24–24 (dB)
0
BELL_CORE_PATTERN1_TIMING
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Comma-separated Integer
Specifies the cadence, in milliseconds, of pattern ID 1, described in the LSSGR, GR-506-CORE, "Signaling for Analog Interfaces" section
14, using up to 8 whole numbers (on 1, off 1, on 2, off 2…) separated by commas.
0–5000 (msec) (0: Continuous)
Default Value
Note
• Avoid setting 1–50 for any of the values.
2000,4000
BELL_CORE_PATTERN2_TIMING
Value Format
Description
Comma-separated Integer
Specifies the cadence, in milliseconds, of pattern ID 2, described in the LSSGR, GR-506-CORE, "Signaling for Analog Interfaces" section
14, using up to 8 whole numbers (on 1, off 1, on 2, off 2…) separated by commas.
Value Range 0–5000 (msec) (0: Continuous)
Default Value
Note
• Avoid setting 1–50 for any of the values.
800,400,800,4000
326 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
5.3.33 Tone Settings
BELL_CORE_PATTERN3_TIMING
Value Format Comma-separated Integer
Description
Value Range
Specifies the cadence, in milliseconds, of pattern ID 3, described in the LSSGR, GR-506-CORE, "Signaling for Analog Interfaces" section
14, using up to 8 whole numbers (on 1, off 1, on 2, off 2…) separated by commas.
0–5000 (msec) (0: Continuous)
Default Value
Note
• Avoid setting 1–50 for any of the values.
400,200,400,200,800,4000
BELL_CORE_PATTERN4_TIMING
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Comma-separated Integer
Specifies the cadence, in milliseconds, of pattern ID 4, described in the LSSGR, GR-506-CORE, "Signaling for Analog Interfaces" section
14, using up to 8 whole numbers (on 1, off 1, on 2, off 2…) separated by commas.
0–5000 (msec) (0: Continuous)
Default Value
Note
• Avoid setting 1–50 for any of the values.
300,200,1000,200,300,4000
BELL_CORE_PATTERN5_TIMING
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Comma-separated Integer
Specifies the cadence, in milliseconds, of pattern ID 5, described in the LSSGR, GR-506-CORE, "Signaling for Analog Interfaces" section
14, using up to 8 whole numbers (on 1, off 1, on 2, off 2…) separated by commas.
0–5000 (msec) (0: Continuous)
Default Value
Note
• Avoid setting 1–50 for any of the values.
500
KEY_PAD_TONE
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
INTEGER
Specifies whether a tone is heard in response to key presses.
• 0: Off
• 1: On
1
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 327
5.3.34 Call Control Settings
5.3.34 Call Control Settings
DEFAULT_LINE_SELECT
Value Format
Description
Value Range
INTEGER
Specifies the line used to make an outgoing call when no line is specified in the dialing operation.
• 1: Line 1
• 2: Line 2
• 3: Line 3
• 4: Line 4
• 5: Line 5
• 6: Line 6
• 7: Line 7
• 8: Line 8
• 9: Line 9
• 10: Line 10
• 11: Line 11
• 12: Line 12
• 13: Line 13
• 14: Line 14
• 15: Line 15
• 16: Line 16
Note
KX-HDV130 Line 1-2
KX-HDV230 Line 1-6
KX-HDV330 Line 1-12
KX-HDV430 Line 1-16
Default Value 1
Web User Interface Reference
ANONYMOUS_CALL_ENABLE_n
For details about parameter names end with "_n", see 5.2.1 Configuration File Parameters
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether to make calls without transmitting the phone number to the called party.
Value Range • Y : Enable anonymous call
• N : Disable
Default Value N
Web User Interface Reference
328 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
5.3.34 Call Control Settings
BLOCK_ANONYMOUS_CALL_ENABLE_n
For details about parameter names end with "_n", see 5.2.1 Configuration File Parameters
Value Format
Description
BOOLEAN
Specifies whether to accept or reject the incoming call without the called party’s phone number.
Value Range • Y : Enable anonymous call block
• N : Disable
Default Value N
Web User Interface Reference
HOTLINE_ENABLE
Value Format
Description
Value Range
BOOLEAN
Specifies whether to enable or disable the Hot line feature.
• Y : Enable
• N : Disable
Default Value N
Web User Interface Reference
HOTLINE_NUMBER
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
STRING
Specifies the Hot line number.
Max. 32 characters
Empty string
Web User Interface Reference
HOTLINE_TIM
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
INTEGER
Specifies a time after off hook for Hot line.
0–10 (s)
2
Web User Interface Reference
DISPLAY_NAME_n
For details about parameter names end with "_n", see 5.2.1 Configuration File Parameters
Value Format
Description
STRING
Specifies the name to display as the caller on the other party’s phone when you make a call.
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 329
5.3.34 Call Control Settings
Value Range Max. 24 characters
Note
• You can use Unicode characters for this setting.
Default Value Empty string
Web User Interface Reference
VM_SUBSCRIBE_ENABLE
Value Format
Description
BOOLEAN
Specifies whether to send the SUBSCRIBE request to a voice mail server.
Note
• Your phone system must support voice mail.
Value Range • Y : Send the SUBSCRIBE request
• N : Do not send the SUBSCRIBE request
Default Value N
Web User Interface Reference
Send SUBSCRIBE to Voice Mail Server
VM_NUMBER_n
For details about parameter names end with "_n", see 5.2.1 Configuration File Parameters
Value Format STRING
Description Specifies the phone number used to access the voice mail server.
Note
• Your phone system must support voice mail.
Value Range
Default Value
Max. 32 characters
Empty string
Web User Interface Reference
VM_SUBSCRIBE_SPECIFIC_n
For details about parameter names end with "_n", see 5.2.1 Configuration File Parameters
Value Format STRING
Description
Value Range
Specifies the defined name of a voice mail box.
Max. 32 characters
Default Value Empty string
DISPLAY_VM_WITH_NUMBER
Value Format
Description
BOOLEAN
Specifies whether to enable displaying the number of unread voice messages.
330 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
5.3.34 Call Control Settings
Value Range
Default Value
• Y : Enable
• N : Disable
Y
DIAL_PLAN_n
For details about parameter names end with "_n", see 5.2.1 Configuration File Parameters
Value Format
Description
STRING
Specifies a dial format, such as specific phone numbers, that control which numbers can be dialed or how to handle the call when making a call. For details, see
Value Range
Default Value
Max. 1000 characters
Empty string
Web User Interface Reference
DIAL_PLAN_NOT_MATCH_ENABLE_n
For details about parameter names end with "_n", see 5.2.1 Configuration File Parameters
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description
Value Range
Specifies whether to enable dial plan filtering so that a call is not made when the dialed number does not match any of the dial formats specified in " DIAL_PLAN_n ".
• Y : Enable dial plan filtering
• N : Disable dial plan filtering
Note
• If set to " Y ", the dialed number will not be sent to the line when the number dialed by the user does not match any of the dial formats specified in the dial plan.
• If set to " N ", the dialed number will be sent to the line, even if the number dialed by the user does not match any of the dial formats specified in the dial plan.
Default Value N
Web User Interface Reference
Call Even If Dial Plan Does Not Match
DIALPLAN_REPLACE_LOG_ENABLE
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Specifies whether to log the number after it was modified by the Dial
Plan or the number as it was input.
• Y : Log the number in the outgoing call log after it was modified by the Dial Plan
• N : Log the number in the outgoing call log as it was input
Y
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 331
5.3.34 Call Control Settings
DIALPLAN_MEMORY_DIAL_ENABLE
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Specifies whether to enable Dial Plan processing for memory dialing.
• Y : Enable Dial Plan
• N : Disable
Y
MACRODIGIT_TIM
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
INTEGER
Specifies the length of time, in seconds, that the unit waits when a "T" or "t" has been entered in the dial plan.
1–15
5
Web User Interface Reference
INTERNATIONAL_ACCESS_CODE
Value Format
Description
Value Range
STRING
Specifies the number to be shown in the place of the first "+" symbol when the phone number for incoming international calls contains "+".
Max. 8 characters (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Note
• No other characters are allowed.
Default Value Empty string
Web User Interface Reference
COUNTRY_CALLING_CODE
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
STRING
Specifies the country/area calling code to be used for comparative purposes when dialing a number from the incoming call log that contains a "+" symbol.
Max. 8 characters (consisting of 0–9)
Empty string
Web User Interface Reference
NATIONAL_ACCESS_CODE
Value Format
Description
Value Range
STRING
When dialing a number from the incoming call log that contains a "+" symbol and the country calling code matches, the country calling code is removed and the national access code is added.
Max. 8 characters (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
332 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
5.3.34 Call Control Settings
Default Value Empty string
Web User Interface Reference
IDLE_SOFT_KEY_A (For KX-HDV130/KX-HDV230)
Value Format INTEGER
Description
Value Range
Specifies the Soft Key A (Left) during IDLE state.
• 1: Phonebook
• 2: Menu
• 3: Outgoing Call Log
• 4: Incoming Call Log
• 5: Redial
• 6: Page (Used when performing Multicast Paging)
Note
The following features are applied to the soft key only when the corresponding parameters are enabled. Otherwise, the soft key will remain in its original setting.
– Page: MPAGE_FUNCKEY_ENABLE
Default Value 1
Web User Interface Reference
IDLE_SOFT_KEY_B (For KX-HDV130/KX-HDV230)
Value Format
Description
Value Range
INTEGER
Specifies the Soft Key B (Center) during IDLE state.
• 1: Phonebook
• 2: Menu
• 3: Outgoing Call Log
• 4: Incoming Call Log
• 5: Redial
• 6: Page (Used when performing Multicast Paging)
Note
The following features are applied to the soft key only when the corresponding parameters are enabled. Otherwise, the soft key will remain in its original setting.
– Page: MPAGE_FUNCKEY_ENABLE
Default Value 2
Web User Interface Reference
IDLE_SOFT_KEY_C (For KX-HDV130/KX-HDV230)
Value Format INTEGER
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 333
5.3.34 Call Control Settings
Description
Value Range
Specifies the Soft Key C (Right) during IDLE state.
• 1: Phonebook
• 2: Menu
• 3: Outgoing Call Log
• 4: Incoming Call Log
• 5: Redial
• 6: Page (Used when performing Multicast Paging)
Note
The following features are applied to the soft key only when the corresponding parameters are enabled. Otherwise, the soft key will remain in its original setting.
– Page: MPAGE_FUNCKEY_ENABLE
Default Value 3
Web User Interface Reference
ADMIN_ABILITY_ENABLE
Value Format
Description
BOOLEAN
Specifies admin rights.
Note
If you attempt to configure System Settings without enabling admin rights, an error will occur and configuration will not be possible.
Value Range • Y : Admin
• N : Non Admin
Default Value Y
Web User Interface Reference
EMERGENCY_CALLx
Parameter Name Example EMERGENCY_CALL1 , EMERGENCY_CALL2 , …, EMERGENCY_CALL5
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
STRING
Specifies the emergency number. (Up to 5 emergency numbers)
Max. 32 characters (except &, ", ', :, ;, <, >)
Empty string
Web User Interface Reference
CALL_REJECTIONx
Parameter Name Example
Value Format
Description
CALL_REJECTION1 , CALL_REJECTION2 , …, CALL_REJECTION30
STRING
Specifies the rejected number per line. (Up to 30 rejected numbers)
334 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
5.3.34 Call Control Settings
Value Range
Default Value
Max. 32 characters (except &, ", ', :, ;, <, >)
Empty string
Web User Interface Reference
CLICKTO_ENABLE_n
For details about parameter names end with "_n", see 5.2.1 Configuration File Parameters
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether to enable or disable Click to Dial/Answer/Hold functions.
Value Range • Y : Enable
• N : Disable
Default Value N
Web User Interface Reference
SIGNALING_AUTO_ANS_ENABLE_n
For details about parameter names end with "_n", see 5.2.1 Configuration File Parameters
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
BOOLEAN
Specifies whether to enable paging mode with "Click to Dial".
• Y : Enable
• N : Disable
Y
CALLPARK_NOTIFICATION_ENABLE_n
For details about parameter names end with "_n", see 5.2.1 Configuration File Parameters
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether to respond to call park notifications from the server.
Value Range • Y : Enable
• N : Disable
Default Value N
Web User Interface Reference
SHARED_CALL_ENABLE_n
For details about parameter names end with "_n", see 5.2.1 Configuration File Parameters
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether to enable the Shared Call feature of the SIP server, which is used to share one line among the units.
Note
• Availability depends on your phone system.
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 335
5.3.34 Call Control Settings
Value Range • Y : Enable shared call
• N : Disable shared call
Default Value
Note
• If set to " Y ", the SIP server will control the line by using a shared-call signaling method.
• If set to " N ", the SIP server will control the line by using a standard signaling method.
N
Web User Interface Reference
SHARED_STOP_LINE_SEIZE
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
BOOLEAN
Specifies whether to stop seizing the Shared Call line at the unit side.
• Y : Stop seizing the line
• N : Seize the line
N
FWD_DND_SYNCHRO_ENABLE_n
For details about parameter names end with "_n", see 5.2.1 Configuration File Parameters
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether to synchronize the Do Not Disturb and Call
Forward settings, configured via the Web user interface or phone user interface, between the unit and the portal server that is provided by your phone system dealer/service provider.
Value Range
Default Value
Note
• Even if you specify " Y ", this feature may not function properly if your phone system does not support it. Before you configure this setting, consult your phone system dealer/service provider.
• Y : Enable Do Not Disturb/Call Forward synchronization
• N : Disable Do Not Disturb/Call Forward synchronization
N
Web User Interface Reference
Enable Key Synchronization (Enable Key Synchronisation)
FWD_SYNCHRO_FORCE_DISABLE_n
For details about parameter names end with "_n", see 5.2.1 Configuration File Parameters
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether to synchronize the Call Forward settings in
"FWD_DND_SYNCHRO_ENABLE_n".
336 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
5.3.34 Call Control Settings
Value Range
Default Value
• Y : Do not synchronize
• N : Synchronize
N
BS_EXECUTIVE_SETTING_ENABLE_n (For KX-HDV330/KX-HDV430)
For details about parameter names end with "_n", see 5.2.1 Configuration File Parameters
Value Format
Description
BOOLEAN
Specifies whether to enable or disable the Executive Call Filtering feature of the selected line.
Value Range • Y : Enable
• N : Disable
Default Value N
Web User Interface Reference
Enable Executive Setting (For KX-HDV330/KX-HDV430)
BS_ASSISTANT_SETTING_ENABLE_n (For KX-HDV330/KX-HDV430)
For details about parameter names end with "_n", see 5.2.1 Configuration File Parameters
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description
Value Range
Specifies whether to enable or disable the Executive Call Filtering feature and Executive-Assistant Divert feature of the selected line.
• Y : Enable
• N : Disable
Default Value N
Web User Interface Reference
Enable Assistant Setting (For KX-HDV330/KX-HDV430)
MOH_SERVER_URI_n
For details about parameter names end with "_n", see 5.2.1 Configuration File Parameters
Value Format STRING
Description Specifies MoH server URI for each line.
Value Range
Default Value
Max. 384 characters
Empty string
Web User Interface Reference
FWD_DND_CONTROL_ENABLE
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
BOOLEAN
Specifies whether to enable the telephone for FWD/DND.
• Y : Enable
• N : Disable
Y
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 337
5.3.34 Call Control Settings
FWD_DND_SYNCHRO_MODE
Value Format INTEGER
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Specifies the mode of FWD/DND synchronizing with server.
• 1: as feature event
• 2: Panasonic original
• 3: Entel
1
FWD_DND_MISSEDLOG_ENABLE
Value Format
Description
Value Range
BOOLEAN
Specifies whether to enable the unit to save forwarded calls and rejected calls on a Missed Call log when "FWD/DND" feature is activated.
• Y : Enable
• N : Disable
Default Value Y
HOLD_AND_CALL_ENABLE
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
BOOLEAN
Specifies whether making new call after holding the call or not.
• Y : Enable (Hold and Call)
• N : Disable (Hold)
N
AUTO_CALL_HOLD
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
BOOLEAN
Specifies whether calls are disconnected or held when another line is selected while having a conversation.
• Y : Enable Auto Call Hold
• N : Disable Auto Call Hold
Y
SIP_RESPONSE_CODE_DND
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
INTEGER
Specifies the response code when a call is received in Do Not Disturb mode.
400–699
403
338 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
5.3.34 Call Control Settings
SIP_RESPONSE_CODE_CALL_REJECT
Value Format INTEGER
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Specifies the response code when a call is rejected.
400–699
603
CW_ENABLE_n
For details about parameter names end with "_n", see 5.2.1 Configuration File Parameters
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description
Value Range
Specifies whether automatic call waiting is enabled.
• Y : Enable Call Waiting
• N : Disable Call Waiting
Default Value Y
Web User Interface Reference
RETURN_VOL_SET_DEFAULT_ENABLE
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
BOOLEAN
Specifies whether the volume is returned to its default setting after each call.
• Y : Volume returns to the default setting after each call
• N : Volume does not change after each call
N
CONFERENCE_SERVER_URI
Value Format STRING
Description Specifies the URI for a conference server, which consists of "sip:", a user part, the "@" symbol, and a host part, for example,
"sip:[email protected]".
Value Range
Default Value
Note
• Availability depends on your phone system.
Max. 256 characters (except ", &, ', :, ;, <, >, and space)
Empty string
Web User Interface Reference
CONF_SERVER_HOLD_ENABLE
Value Format
Description
BOOLEAN
Specifies whether to hold the call when connecting an N-party conference.
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 339
5.3.34 Call Control Settings
Value Range
Default Value
• Y : Hold the call
• N : Do not hold the call
N
RESOURCELIST_URI_n
For details about parameter names end with "_n", see 5.2.1 Configuration File Parameters
Value Format
Description
STRING
Specifies the URI for the resource list, which consists of "sip:", a user part, the "@" symbol, and a host part.
Value Range
Default Value
Max. 256 characters
Empty string
Web User Interface Reference
TALKING_SOFT_KEY_A (For KX-HDV130/KX-HDV230)
Value Format
Description
Value Range
INTEGER
Specifies the display icon of soft key A during a call.
• 0: Original
• 1: Line
• 2: Menu
• 3: Blind (Used when performing Blind Transfer)
• 4: Flash/Recall
• 5: Incoming Log
• 6: Outgoing Log
• 7: Phonebook
• 8: Park (Used when performing Call Park)
• 9: Pause
• 10: Private Hold
Default Value
Note
The following features are applied to the soft key only when the corresponding parameters are enabled. Otherwise, the soft key will remain in its original setting.
– Blind: BLIND_TRANSFER_ENABLE
– Park: CALLPARK_KEY_ENABLE
– Pause: PAUSE_INPUT_ENABLE
– Private Hold: PRIVATE_HOLD_ENABLE
0
TALKING_SOFT_KEY_B (For KX-HDV130/KX-HDV230)
Value Format INTEGER
340 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
5.3.34 Call Control Settings
Description
Value Range
Specifies the display icon of soft key B during a call.
• 0: Original
• 1: Line
• 2: Menu
• 3: Blind (Used when performing Blind Transfer)
• 4: Flash/Recall
• 5: Incoming Log
• 6: Outgoing Log
• 7: Phonebook
• 8: Park (Used when performing Call Park)
• 9: Pause
• 10: Private Hold
Note
The following features are applied to the soft key only when the corresponding parameters are enabled. Otherwise, the soft key will remain in its original setting.
– Blind: BLIND_TRANSFER_ENABLE
– Park: CALLPARK_KEY_ENABLE
– Pause: PAUSE_INPUT_ENABLE
– Private Hold: PRIVATE_HOLD_ENABLE
0 Default Value
TALKING_SOFT_KEY_C (For KX-HDV130/KX-HDV230)
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the display icon of soft key C during a call.
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 341
5.3.34 Call Control Settings
Value Range
Default Value
• 0: Original
• 1: Line
• 2: Menu
• 3: Blind (Used when performing Blind Transfer)
• 4: Flash/Recall
• 5: Incoming Log
• 6: Outgoing Log
• 7: Phonebook
• 8: Park (Used when performing Call Park)
• 9: Pause
• 10: Private Hold
Note
The following features are applied to the soft key only when the corresponding parameters are enabled. Otherwise, the soft key will remain in its original setting.
– Blind: BLIND_TRANSFER_ENABLE
– Park: CALLPARK_KEY_ENABLE
– Pause: PAUSE_INPUT_ENABLE
– Private Hold: PRIVATE_HOLD_ENABLE
0
AUTO_ANS_ENABLE
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
BOOLEAN
Specifies whether to turn on the "Auto Answer" feature.
• Y : On
• N : Off
N
AUTO_ANS_OPER_ENABLE
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
BOOLEAN
Specifies whether to enable users to turn "Auto Answer" on and off from their phones.
• Y : Enable
• N : Disable
Y
AUTO_ANS_DEVICE
Value Format INTEGER
342 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
5.3.34 Call Control Settings
Description
Value Range
Specifies which types of devices can be used to respond using "Auto
Answer".
0-1
– 0 : Speaker Phone
– 1 : Headset
0 Default Value
AUTO_ANS_DELAY
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
INTEGER
Specifies the delay time before "Auto Answer" answers a call.
0-20 (sec)
6
AUTO_ANS_TYPE (For KX-HDV430)
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
INTEGER
Specifies which type of calls can be answered by "Auto Answer".
0-1
– 0: Voice Call
– 1: Voice and Video
0
RETRIVE_TRANS_HOLD_OPER_CHANGE
Value Format
Description
BOOLEAN
Specifies the action for retrieving transfer-hold calls by pressing a
Line key.
Value Range
Default Value
Note
• The action for retrieving conference call on hold by pressing a
Line key in the conference call sequence also follows this setting.
• Y : Disconnect the current call
• N : Follow the "AUTO_CALL_HOLD" setting
N
REMOVE_PREFIX_ENABLE
Value Format
Description
Value Range
BOOLEAN
Specifies whether to enable omitting "+" included in overseas telephone numbers when making or receiving a call.
• Y : Enable
• N : Disable
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 343
5.3.35 Video Communication Settings (For KX-HDV430)
Default Value N
5.3.35 Video Communication Settings (For KX-HDV430)
DEFAULT_CALL_MODE
Value Format
Description
Value Range
INTEGER
Specifies the default call type when you make a call by going off hook, etc.
• 0: Voice
• 1: Video
Default Value 0
Web User Interface Reference
VIDEO_SCREEN_MODE
Value Format
Description
Value Range
INTEGER
Specifies the mode for the video screen.
• 0: Normal
• 1: Split
Default Value 0
Web User Interface Reference
VIDEO_SEND_IMAGE_ENABLE
Value Format
Description
Value Range
BOOLEAN
Specifies whether the video is automatically sent when you start a video call.
• Y : Enable
• N : Disable
Default Value Y
Web User Interface Reference
VIDEO_BIT_RATE
Value Format
Description
INTEGER
Specifies the bit rate for the video when you make a video call.
344 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
5.3.35 Video Communication Settings (For KX-HDV430)
Value Range • 0: 128 kbps
• 1: 256 kbps
• 2: 384 kbps
• 3: 512 kbps
• 4: 768 kbps
• 5: 1024 kbps
• 6: 2048 kbps
Default Value 6
Web User Interface Reference
VIDEO_BIT_RATE_USE
Value Format
Description
INTEGER
Selects whether the specified bit rate is treated as the maximum bit rate or a fixed bit rate.
Value Range • 0: Maximum
• 1: Fixed
Default Value 0
Web User Interface Reference
VIDEO_FRAME_RATE
Value Format INTEGER
Description
Value Range
Specifies the frame rate for the video when you make a video call.
• 15: 15 fps
• 30: 30 fps
Default Value 30
Web User Interface Reference
VIDEO_IMAGE_SIZE
Value Format
Description
Value Range
INTEGER
Specifies the size for video images when you make a video call.
• 0: QCIF
• 1: QVGA
• 2: CIF
• 3: HVGAW
• 4: VGA
Default Value 3
Web User Interface Reference
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 345
5.3.36 Network Camera Settings (For KX-HDV430)
H264_PAYLOAD
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
INTEGER
Specifies the payload size for H.264.
96–125
102
5.3.36 Network Camera Settings (For KX-HDV430)
NWCAMERA_DISPLAY_NAMEx
Parameter Name Example
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
NWCAMERA_DISPLAY_NAME1 , NWCAMERA_DISPLAY_NAME2 , …,
NWCAMERA_DISPLAY_NAME16
STRING x=1–16
Specifies the name of the Network Camera to be displayed in the
Network Camera viewer.
Max. 20 characters
Empty string
NWCAMERA_ADDRx
Parameter Name Example
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
NWCAMERA_PORTx
Parameter Name Example
NWCAMERA_ADDR1 , NWCAMERA_ADDR2 , …,
NWCAMERA_ADDR16
STRING x=1–16
Specifies the address of the Network Camera.
Max. 256 characters
Empty string
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
NWCAMERA_USER_IDx
Parameter Name Example
NWCAMERA_PORT1 , NWCAMERA_PORT2 , …,
NWCAMERA_PORT16
INTEGER x=1–16
Specifies the port of the Network Camera.
1–65535
80
Value Format
NWCAMERA_USER_ID1 , NWCAMERA_USER_ID2 , …,
NWCAMERA_USER_ID16
STRING
346 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
5.3.36 Network Camera Settings (For KX-HDV430)
Description
Value Range
Default Value x=1–16
Specifies the user ID to connect to the Network Camera.
Max. 32 characters
Empty string
NWCAMERA_PASSx
Parameter Name Example
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
NWCAMERA_PASS1 , NWCAMERA_PASS2 , …,
NWCAMERA_PASS16
STRING x=1–16
Specifies the password to connect to the Network Camera.
Max. 32 characters
Empty string
NWCAMERA_PAGING_PHONE_NAMEx
Parameter Name Example
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
NWCAMERA_PAGING_PHONE_NAME1 ,
NWCAMERA_PAGING_PHONE_NAME2 , …,
NWCAMERA_PAGING_PHONE_NAME16
STRING x=1–16
Specifies the name of the phone to use for Network Camera paging.
Max. 24 characters
Empty string
NWCAMERA_PAGING_PHONE_NUMBERx
Parameter Name Example
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
NWCAMERA_PAGING_PHONE_NUMBER1 ,
NWCAMERA_PAGING_PHONE_NUMBER2 , …,
NWCAMERA_PAGING_PHONE_NUMBER16
STRING x=1–16
Specifies the phone number to use for Network Camera paging.
Max. 32 characters
Empty string
NWCAMERA_LINK_PHONEm_NAMEx
Parameter Name Example
Value Format
Description
NWCAMERA_LINK_PHONE1_NAME1 ,
NWCAMERA_LINK_PHONE1_NAME2 , …,
NWCAMERA_LINK_PHONE5_NAME16
STRING m=1–5, x=1–16
Specifies the phone name to use for Network Camera phone number linkage.
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 347
5.3.36 Network Camera Settings (For KX-HDV430)
Value Range
Default Value
Max. 24 characters
Empty string
NWCAMERA_LINK_PHONEm_NUMBERx
Parameter Name Example
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
NWCAMERA_LINK_PHONE1_NUMBER1 ,
NWCAMERA_LINK_PHONE1_NUMBER2 , …,
NWCAMERA_LINK_PHONE5_NUMBER16
STRING m=1–5, x=1–16
Specifies the phone number to use for Network Camera phone number linkage.
Max. 32 characters
Empty string
NWCAMERA_STREAMx
Parameter Name Example
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
NWCAMERA_STREAM1 , NWCAMERA_STREAM2 , …,
NWCAMERA_STREAM16
INTEGER x=1–16
Specifies the stream of the Network Camera image.
• 1: Stream 1
• 2: Stream 2
1
NWCAMERA_ALARM_NOTIFICATION
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
INTEGER
Specifies the mode for Network Camera alarm notifications.
• 0: Off
• 1: Pop-up
0
NWCAMERA_ALARM_DISARM_TIME
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
INTEGER
Specifies the time, in seconds, for the alarm interval.
2–10 (s)
2
NWCAMERA_ALARM_PORT
Value Format
Description
INTEGER
Specifies the local port number for Network Camera alarms.
348 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
5.3.37 Communication Camera Settings (For KX-HDV430)
Value Range
Default Value
1024–65535
1818
NWCAMERA_AUTO_CLOSE_ENABLE
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Specifies whether to disconnect the network camera when the call is ended.
• Y : Disconnect
• N : Do not disconnect
N
NWCAMERA_OPEN_RECEIVE_CALL
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
BOOLEAN
Specifies whether to connect the network camera when the call associated with network camera is incoming.
• Y : Connect
• N : Do not connect
N
5.3.37 Communication Camera Settings (For KX-HDV430)
COMM_CAMERA_NUMBERx
Parameter Name Example COMM_CAMERA_NUMBER1 , COMM_CAMERA_NUMBER2 , …,
COMM_CAMERA_NUMBER16
Value Format
Description
STRING x=1–16
Specifies the phone number of each Communication Camera.
Value Range
Default Value
Max. 32 characters
Empty string
Web User Interface Reference
COMM_CAMERA_NAMEx
Parameter Name Example COMM_CAMERA_NAME1 , COMM_CAMERA_NAME2 , …,
COMM_CAMERA_NAME16
Value Format
Description
STRING x=1–16
Specifies the name of each Communication Camera.
Value Range
Default Value
Max. 24 characters
Empty string
Web User Interface Reference
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 349
5.3.37 Communication Camera Settings (For KX-HDV430)
COMM_CAMERA_RINGTONE_SETTINGx
Parameter Name Example
Value Format
Description
COMM_CAMERA_RINGTONE_SETTING1 ,
COMM_CAMERA_RINGTONE_SETTING2 , …,
COMM_CAMERA_RINGTONE_SETTING16
INTEGER x=1–16
Specifies the ringtone of each Communication Camera.
Value Range
Default Value
1–32 (10: doorbell)
10
Web User Interface Reference
DTMF_CONTROL_UP_CAMERAx
Parameter Name Example
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
DTMF_CONTROL_UP_CAMERA1 , DTMF_CONTROL_UP_CAMERA2 , …,
DTMF_CONTROL_UP_CAMERA16
STRING x=1–16
Specifies the DTMF value for tilting the camera up for each
Communication Camera.
Max. 8 digits (0–9, *, #)
2
DTMF_CONTROL_DOWN_CAMERAx
Parameter Name Example
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
DTMF_CONTROL_DOWN_CAMERA1 , DTMF_CONTROL_DOWN_CAMERA2 ,
…, DTMF_CONTROL_DOWN_CAMERA16
STRING x=1–16
Specifies the DTMF value for tilting the camera down for each
Communication Camera.
Max. 8 digits (0–9, *, #)
8
DTMF_CONTROL_LEFT_CAMERAx
Parameter Name Example
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
DTMF_CONTROL_LEFT_CAMERA1 , DTMF_CONTROL_LEFT_CAMERA2 ,
…, DTMF_CONTROL_LEFT_CAMERA16
STRING x=1–16
Specifies the DTMF value for panning the camera left for each
Communication Camera.
Max. 8 digits (0–9, *, #)
4
350 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
5.3.37 Communication Camera Settings (For KX-HDV430)
DTMF_CONTROL_RIGHT_CAMERAx
Parameter Name Example
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
DTMF_CONTROL_RIGHT_CAMERA1 ,
DTMF_CONTROL_RIGHT_CAMERA2 , …,
DTMF_CONTROL_RIGHT_CAMERA16
STRING x=1–16
Specifies the DTMF value for panning the camera right for each
Communication Camera.
Max. 8 digits (0–9, *, #)
6
DTMF_CONTROL_OPEN_CAMERAx
Parameter Name Example
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
DTMF_CONTROL_OPEN_CAMERA1 , DTMF_CONTROL_OPEN_CAMERA2 ,
…, DTMF_CONTROL_OPEN_CAMERA16
STRING x=1–16
Specifies the DTMF value for opening the door near the camera for each Communication Camera.
Max. 8 digits (0–9, *, #)
5
DTMF_CONTROL_ZOOMUP_CAMERAx
Parameter Name Example
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
DTMF_CONTROL_ZOOMUP_CAMERA1 ,
DTMF_CONTROL_ZOOMUP_CAMERA2 , …,
DTMF_CONTROL_ZOOMUP_CAMERA16
STRING x=1–16
Specifies the DTMF value for zooming in for each Communication
Camera.
Max. 8 digits (0–9, *, #)
9
DTMF_CONTROL_ZOOMDOWN_CAMERAx
Parameter Name Example
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
DTMF_CONTROL_ZOOMDOWN_CAMERA1 ,
DTMF_CONTROL_ZOOMDOWN_CAMERA2 , …,
DTMF_CONTROL_ZOOMDOWN_CAMERA16
STRING x=1–16
Specifies the DTMF value for zooming out for each Communication
Camera.
Max. 8 digits (0–9, *, #)
7
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 351
5.3.38 Logging Settings
DTMF_CONTROL_VOICE_CAMERAx
Parameter Name Example
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
DTMF_CONTROL_VOICE_CAMERA1 ,
DTMF_CONTROL_VOICE_CAMERA2 , …,
DTMF_CONTROL_VOICE_CAMERA16
STRING x=1–16
Specifies the DTMF value for talking with the camera for each
Communication Camera.
Max. 8 digits (0–9, *, #)
*
5.3.38 Logging Settings
SYSLOG_ADDR
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
STRING
Specifies the IP address or FQDN of Syslog server.
Max. 256 characters
Empty string
SYSLOG_PORT
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
INTEGER
Specifies the port of Syslog server.
1–65535
514
LOGGING_LEVEL_DNS
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
LOGGING_LEVEL_NW1
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
LOGGING_LEVEL_FILE
Value Format
Description
INTEGER
Specifies the log level of DNS.
0–6
0
INTEGER
Specifies the log level of SNTP.
0–6
0
INTEGER
Specifies the log level of FILE downloading.
352 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
5.3.38 Logging Settings
Value Range
Default Value
LOGGING_LEVEL_SIP
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
LOGGING_LEVEL_TR069
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
0–6
6
INTEGER
Specifies the log level of SIP.
0–6
0
INTEGER
Specifies the log level of TR-069.
0–6
0
LOGGING_LEVEL_STUN
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
SYSLOG_OUT_START
Value Format
Description
Value Range
INTEGER
Specifies the log level of STUN.
0–6
0
LOGGING_LEVEL_NW2
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
INTEGER
Specifies the log level of Xsi, XML, XMPP, LDAP.
0–6
0
LOGGING_LEVEL_CFGPARSE
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
INTEGER
Specifies the log level of configuration parse.
0–6
0
BOOLEAN
Specifies whether to enable or disable exporting of the Application
Log.
• Y : Enable export to syslog
• N : Disable
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 353
5.3.39 TWAMP Settings
Default Value N
5.3.39 TWAMP Settings
TWAMP_ENABLE
Value Format
Description
Value Range
BOOLEAN
Specifies whether to enable the TWAMP server function.
Y : Enable the TWAMP server function.
N : Disable
Default Value N
Web User Interface Reference
TWAMP_CONTROL_PORT
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
INTEGER
Specifies the port for the TWAMP control session.
1-65535
862
Web User Interface Reference
TWAMP_TEST_PORT
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
INTEGER
Specifies the port for the TWAMP test session.
1-65535
9000
Web User Interface Reference
TWAMP_SERVER_WAIT_TIME
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the time, in seconds, for the TWAMP server to wait for incoming packets for maintaining the session.
Value Range
Default Value
1-65535
900
Web User Interface Reference
TWAMP_REFLECTOR_WAIT_TIME
Value Format
Description
Value Range
INTEGER
Specifies the time, in seconds, for the TWAMP reflector to wait for incoming packets for maintaining the session.
1-65535
Default Value 900
354 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
5.3.39 TWAMP Settings
Web User Interface Reference
TWAMP_PADDING_ZERO
Value Format
Description
Value Range
Default Value
BOOLEAN
Specifies the packet padding for the TWAMP test session.
Y : All zeros
N : Random
N
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 355
5.3.39 TWAMP Settings
356 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
Section 6
Useful Telephone Functions
This section explains phone number settings, dial plan settings, the phonebook import/export function, the
Broadsoft XSI function, the BroadCloud (Presence) function and Pairing (Parallel Mode).
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 357
6.1 Phonebook Import and Export
6.1 Phonebook Import and Export
This section explains how to import and export phonebook data. Phonebook data of the unit includes names and phone numbers.
Phonebook data on the unit can be exported, edited with editor tools, and imported again. In addition, phonebook data created with other software can be imported into the unit.
You can use the phonebook import and export functions as follows.
A.
Phonebook data
B.
Microsoft Excel
C.
Microsoft Outlook
Note
It takes approximately 7 minutes to import a phonebook that contains 500 entries.
Editing Phonebook Data on a PC
The phonebook data stored on the unit can be edited using a program such as Microsoft Excel ® spreadsheet
software. For details about the operation, see 6.1.2 Editing with Microsoft Excel
.
You can export the phonebook data to the PC, edit the exported file using appropriate software, and then import it into the unit.
A B
A B
D C
Importing Address Book Data from a PC
You can import address book data stored in programs, such as Microsoft Outlook ® messaging and collaboration client, into the unit.
First, export address book data from the e-mail software to a program such as Microsoft Excel, edit it as necessary, and then import the exported data into the unit.
For details about the operation, see 6.1.3 Exporting Data from Microsoft Outlook .
A B C
C B A
Backing up Phonebook Data
You can export the phonebook data from the unit to a PC and keep the file as a backup in case of data loss or for use when exchanging the unit.
A
A
B
358 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
6.1 Phonebook Import and Export
Importing the Same Phonebook Data to other Units
You can export the phonebook data created on a unit to a PC, and then import it into other units.
A
A B
You can also import phonebook data created on a PC to other units.
B A B
A
Import/Export File Format
The file format used for importing and exporting the phonebook data is "TSV". When importing or exporting using Microsoft Excel, "CSV (Comma-separated Value)" is generally used as the file format.
A phonebook entry in the unit has 9 fields. An entry in the phonebook data is represented in text as "record
ID <TAB> name <TAB> reserved <TAB> phone number <TAB> phone number <TAB> phone number
<TAB> phone number <TAB> phone number <TAB> reserved <line break>".
The text data can be edited using any text editing software that supports UTF-16 encoding with a BOM and little endian byte ordering. When you save the text file, it must be saved using the same format, or the text might become garbled.
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 359
6.1.1 Import/Export Operation
Phonebook Data in Text Format
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q
1
2
3
4
····
····
Aaron MacDowel
Barbara Nicolls
Carl O’Brien
Dorothy Parker
····
····
····
····
501
502
503
····
····
1234001
1234002
1234003
1234004
····
····
····
····
····
····
····
····
····
····
Record ID (Unique ID: 1–500)
Tab
Name (up to 24 characters)
Tab
Reserved (up to 24 characters)
Tab
Phone number (up to 32 digits)
Tab
Phone number (up to 32 digits)
Tab
Phone number (up to 32 digits)
Tab
Phone number (up to 32 digits)
Tab
Phone number (up to 32 digits)
Tab
Reserved
6.1.1 Import/Export Operation
The following procedures explain how to import phonebook data to units, and how to export phonebook data from units to a PC through the Web user interface.
For details about the settings, see
.
To import phonebook data
1.
Click the [Telephone] tab, and then click [Import Phonebook] .
2.
In [File Name] , enter the full path to the file that you want to import, or click Browse to select the phonebook data file that you want to import.
3.
Click [Import] .
To export the phonebook data
1.
Click the [Telephone] tab, and then click [Export Phonebook] .
2.
Click [Export] .
3.
On the "Now Processing File Data" screen, click the text "HERE" in the displayed message, or wait until
File Download window appears.
360 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
6.1.2 Editing with Microsoft Excel
Note
• Depending on the security settings of your Web browser, pop-up menus might be blocked. If the file cannot be exported successfully, try the export operation again or change the security settings of your Web browser.
4.
Click Save on File Download window.
5.
On the Save As window, select a folder to save the exported phonebook data to, enter the file name in
File name , select TSV File for Save as type , and click Save .
If the file is downloaded successfully, the Download complete window appears.
6.
Click Close .
7.
To exit the operation, click the text "HERE" in the displayed message.
The [Export Phonebook] screen returns.
Note
• Make sure that the import source or unit is in standby mode.
• The import source or unit must be specified at the time of import/export. The imported data is added to the existing phonebook data.
– If the existing phonebook data has an entry with the same record ID as an imported entry, the entry is overwritten with the imported entry.
– If the existing phonebook data has an entry with no record ID, it will be left in the phonebook.
– If the imported phonebook data has an entry with no record ID, the imported entry is added as a new entry unless an existing entry with the same name and phone number is found.
Phonebook entries that are added via the unit are not assigned record IDs. Therefore, it is recommended to export phonebook data from the unit, assign record IDs manually and then re-import them. Doing so can help manage phonebook data.
• The phonebook for a unit has the following limitations:
– A maximum of 500 phonebook entries can be stored in the unit. If the unit already has phonebook data, it accepts up to the 500th entry, including the existing entries.
– The name can contain up to 24 characters.
– The phone number can contain up to 32 digits.
– Phonebook entries exceeding the characters or digits limits cannot be imported properly.
• If the export is interrupted by an operation on the unit, only the data that has been successfully exported before the interruption is exported to a file.
6.1.2 Editing with Microsoft Excel
You can edit exported phonebook data on a PC with software such as Microsoft Excel. You can then import the phonebook data into units.
To open the phonebook data on a PC
1.
Open Microsoft Excel.
2.
Click Office Button , and then Open .
Note
• Make sure to open a TSV file in this procedure. If you change the extension of a TSV file to ".csv", the file will open by simply double-clicking it. However, the character encoding of the file might not be recognized properly, resulting in garbled characters, or the phone numbers might be recognized as numbers, resulting in data alteration.
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 361
6.1.2 Editing with Microsoft Excel
3.
Select All Files for the file type, select the exported phonebook data file, and click Open .
4.
On the Text Import Wizard - Step 1 of 3 window, click Next .
Note
• Regardless of what is selected for File origin , the file will be processed normally if the format is appropriate.
5.
On the Text Import Wizard - Step 2 of 3 window, select Tab for Delimiters , and then click Next .
362 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
6.1.3 Exporting Data from Microsoft Outlook
6.
On the Text Import Wizard - Step 3 of 3 window, select all columns in Data preview , select Text in
Column data format , and then click Finish .
The TSV file will be opened.
Note
• Phone numbers must be treated as text strings. Otherwise, a "0" at the beginning of a phone number might disappear when exported.
To save the phonebook data for importing to the unit
1.
After editing the phonebook entries, click Office Button , and then Save As .
Assign record IDs manually before saving.
2.
Enter a file name in File name , and select Unicode Text in Save as type .
The file will be saved in UTF-16 little endian with a BOM. Fields will be separated by tabs.
3.
Click Save .
A message warning you about file compatibility will be displayed.
4.
Click Yes .
The file will be saved as a Unicode text file, with the fields separated by tabs.
Note
• The procedure may vary depending on the software version of Microsoft Excel. Therefore, files exported and imported between the unit and Microsoft Excel are not always compatible with each other.
6.1.3 Exporting Data from Microsoft Outlook
You can export address book data stored in programs such as Microsoft Outlook, and then edit the exported data with a program such as Microsoft Excel in order to import it to the unit.
To export the Microsoft Outlook address book data
1.
In Microsoft Outlook, click File , and then click Import and Export .
2.
Select Export to a file , and click Next .
3.
Select Tab Separated Values (Windows) , and click Next .
4.
Select Contacts , and click Next .
5.
Click Browse , select a folder, and then enter the file name to export the data to.
6.
Click OK .
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 363
6.2 Dial Plan
7.
On the Export to a File window, click Next .
8.
Click Map Custom Fields .
9.
Clear all items in the To list by clicking Clear Map . Then, drag only Last Name and Business Phone from the From list to the To list, and click OK .
10.
On the Export to a File window, click Finish .
The data will be exported.
Note
• The procedure may vary depending on the software version of Microsoft Outlook.
• You can export data from Microsoft Outlook Express by using a similar procedure. It is also possible to export data from other applications that are compatible with Microsoft Excel.
• You can open the exported file in Microsoft Excel, and then import it to the unit. For details, see
6.1.2 Editing with Microsoft Excel
.
• First and middle names are not exported using this procedure. You can export all necessary items and edit the entry before importing them to the unit.
• In the file exported from Microsoft Outlook, fields are separated by tabs and encoded using the default character encoding for your operating system.
6.2 Dial Plan
The dial plan settings control how numbers dialed by the user are transmitted over the network. Dial plan settings can be configured on a per-line basis. These settings can be programmed either through the Web user interface (→ see
) or by configuration file programming (→ see 5.3.34 Call Control
).
6.2.1 Dial Plan Settings
To set Dial Plan
1.
In the Web user interface, click the [Telephone] tab, and then click [Call Control [Line 1]–[Line x]] .
2.
In [Dial Plan] , enter the desired dial format.
The dial plan settings can be configured for each line separately.
For details about available characters for the dial format, see
Available Values for the Dial Plan Field
in this section.
3.
Select [Yes] or [No] for [Call Even If Dial Plan Does Not Match] .
• If you select [Yes] , the call will be made even if the user dials a phone number that does not match the dial format in [Dial Plan] .
• If you select [No] , the call will be made only if the user dials a phone number that matches the dial format in [Dial Plan] .
Note
• For details about configuring these settings by configuration file programming, see " DIAL_PLAN_n " and " DIAL_PLAN_NOT_MATCH_ENABLE_n " in
5.3.34 Call Control Settings .
Available Values for the Dial Plan Field
The following table explains which characters you can use in the dial format, and what the characters mean.
364 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
6.2.1 Dial Plan Settings
Element
String
Digit
Wildcard
Range
Subrange
Repeat
Substitution
Timer
Reject
Alternation
Comma ,
|
!
-
.
Available Value
0–9, [, -, ], <, :, >, *,
#, !, S, s, T, t, X, x, .,
|, +
0–9, *, #, +
X, x
[ ]
<(before):(after)>
S, s (second)
Macro Timer T, t
Description
You can enter dial plan descriptions using a combination of the characters listed as available values.
Example: "123"
If the dialed phone number is "123", the call is made immediately.
Example: "12xxxxx"
If the dialed phone number is "12" followed by any 5-digit number, the call is made immediately.
Example: "[123]"
If the dialed phone number is either one of "1", "2", or "3", the call is made immediately.
Example: "[1-5]"
If the dialed phone number is "1", "2", "3", "4", or "5", the call is made immediately.
• A subrange is only valid for single-digit numbers. For example, "[4-9]" is valid, but "[12-21]" is invalid.
Example: "1."
If the dialed phone number is "1" followed by zero or more "1"s
(e.g., "11", "111"), the call is made.
Example: "<101:9999>"
If the dialed phone number is "101", "101" is replaced by "9999", and then the call is made immediately.
Example: "1x.S2"
If the dialed phone number begins with "1", the call is made after a lapse of 2 seconds.
• The number (0–9) followed by "S" or "s" shows the duration in seconds until the call is made.
Example: "1x.T"
If the dialed phone number begins with "1", the call is made after a lapse of "T" seconds.
• The value of "T" or "t" can be configured through the Web user interface (→ see [Timer for Dial Plan]
Example: "123xxx!"
If the dialed phone number is "123" followed by 3 digits, the call is not made.
Example: "1xxxx|2xxx"
If the dialed phone number is "1" followed by 4 digits, or "2" followed by 3 digits, the call is made immediately.
You can use this element to specify multiple numbers.
Example: "9,xxxxxxxxxxx.T"
If 9 is dialed, the second dial tone is heard, and then 11 digits are dialed, the call is made after waiting "T" seconds. * The dialing will include the initially dialed "9".
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 365
6.2.1 Dial Plan Settings
Note
• You can enter up to 1000 characters in [Dial Plan] .
• You can assign up to 100 dial plans separated by "|" in [Dial Plan] .
• You can assign up to 32 digits per dial plan in [Dial Plan] .
• You can assign up to 10 substitutions in [Dial Plan] .
• After the user completes dialing, the unit immediately sends all the dialed digits if [Call Even If Dial
Plan Does Not Match] is set to [Yes] in the Web user interface or if
" DIAL_PLAN_NOT_MATCH_ENABLE_n " is set to " N " in a configuration file. The unit recognizes the end of dialing as follows:
– The inter-digit timer expires (→ see [Inter-digit Timeout] in
4.6.1.1 Call Control in the Web user
interface or " INTDIGIT_TIM " in
5.3.30 Telephone Settings in the configuration file).
– The user presses [ / ENTER ] or the # key.
– The call is initiated after going off-hook (pre-dial).
Dial Plan Example
The following example shows dial plans containing character sequences separated by "|".
Example: "[2346789]11|01[2-9]x.|[2-9]xxxxxxxxx"
Complete Match:
Example: " [2346789]11 |01[2-9]x.|[2-9]xxxxxxxxx"
• If the dialed phone number is "211", "911" and so on, the call is made immediately.
Example: "[2346789]11|01[2-9]x.| [2-9]xxxxxxxxx "
• If the dialed phone number is "2123456789", "5987654321" and so on, the call is made immediately.
Partial Match (when the dial plan contains "."):
Example: "[2346789]11| 01[2-9]x.
|[2-9]xxxxxxxxx"
• If the dialed phone number is "01254", "012556" and so on, the call is made after the inter-digit timer expires.
Partial Match (when the dial plan does not contain "."):
Example: " [2346789]11 |01[2-9]x.|[2-9]xxxxxxxxx"
• If the dialed phone number is "21", "91" and so on when [Call Even If Dial Plan Does Not Match] is set to [Yes] , the call is made after the inter-digit timer expires.
• If the dialed phone number is "21", "91" and so on when [Call Even If Dial Plan Does Not Match] is set to [No] , the call is denied after the inter-digit timer expires.
Example: "[2346789]11|01[2-9]x.| [2-9]xxxxxxxxx "
• If the dialed phone number is "21234567", "598765432" and so on when [Call Even If Dial Plan Does
Not Match] is set to [Yes] , the call is made after the inter-digit timer expires.
• If the dialed phone number is "21234567", "598765432" and so on when [Call Even If Dial Plan Does
Not Match] is set to [No] , the call is denied after the inter-digit timer expires.
No Match:
Example: "[2346789]11|01[2-9]x.|[2-9]xxxxxxxxx"
• If the dialed phone number is "0011", "1011" and so on when [Call Even If Dial Plan Does Not Match] is set to [Yes] , the call is made after the inter-digit timer expires.
366 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
6.3 Flexible Keys (For KX-HDV230/KX-HDV330/KX-HDV430)
• If the dialed phone number is "0011", "1011" and so on when [Call Even If Dial Plan Does Not Match] is set to [No] , the call is denied.
6.3 Flexible Keys (For KX-HDV230/KX-HDV330/
KX-HDV430)
You can customize the flexible keys on the unit. They can then be used to make or receive outside calls or as feature buttons (function keys). These settings can be programmed either through the Web user interface
(→ see 4.6.5 Flexible Key Settings (No. 1–24) (For KX-HDV230/KX-HDV330/KX-HDV430) and 4.6.10 DSS
Console (For KX-HDV230/KX-HDV330/KX-HDV430)) or by configuration file programming (→ see
5.3.31 Flexible Key Settings and 5.3.32 DSS Key Settings (For KX-HDV230/KX-HDV330/KX-HDV430)).
The following types of flexible keys are available:
Lamp Indication Button Description
One Touch Dial Used to dial a previously set phone number with one touch.
-
BLF (Busy
Lamp Field)
Used to show the current status of another extension, call the extension and transfer calls to it.
Off : The BLF extension is idle.
Red on : A corresponding BLF extension is using the line.
Flashing red rapidly : The BLF extension is receiving an incoming call.
Note
• It may be necessary to specify the Resource List URI to use this feature, depending on your phone system (→ see
[Resource List URI] in
Web user interface or
" RESOURCELIST_URI_n " in
5.3.34 Call Control Settings in
the configuration file).
• Specify the number assigned to a BLF for performing call pickup
(→ see [Directed Call Pickup] in
Web user interface or
" NUM_PLAN_PICKUP_DIRECT " in
in the configuration file).
Line Used to seize a line in order to make or receive a call. The LED of the function key indicates the status of the line.
Off : The line is idle.
Blue on : The line is on a call.
Flashing blue slowly : A call is on hold.
Flashing blue rapidly : A call (including Hold
Recall) is being received to the line (or a shared line).
Red on : A shared line is in use or a call is on private hold at another unit.
Flashing blue slowly : A shared line is on hold at another unit.
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 367
6.3 Flexible Keys (For KX-HDV230/KX-HDV330/KX-HDV430)
Button
ACD
Line Status
Call Forward
Phonebook
Call History
Description
Used to log in or log out of a group when ACD (Automatic Call
Distribution) is enabled.
Note
• It is necessary to set the ACD feature to enable (→ see
[Enable ACD]
the Web user interface or
" ACD_ENABLE_n
in the configuration file).
The Wrap Up button alternates the setting of Wrap Up mode, Not Ready mode or Ready mode for incoming calls. In Wrap Up mode/Not Ready mode for incoming calls, incoming calls will not be received through the
ACD (Automatic Call Distribution) group.
Note
• It is necessary to set the ACD feature to enable (→ see
[Enable ACD]
the Web user interface or
" ACD_ENABLE_n
in the configuration file).
Used to confirm the status of each line. This allows the function key to work as a Line key such as seizing a line in order to make or receive a call.
Used to forward incoming calls to the assigned extension in the key.
Used to open the phonebook.
Used to open the incoming/outgoing call log.
Lamp Indication
Off : Logged in
Red on : Logged out
Off : Ready mode for incoming calls
Red on : Unavailable
Flashing red slowly : Wrap Up
-
-
-
-
368 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
6.3 Flexible Keys (For KX-HDV230/KX-HDV330/KX-HDV430)
Button
Simultaneous
Hoteling
(Hospitality)
Transfer
Blind Transfer
Conference
Directed Call
Pickup
Call Park
Description
Enables parallel ringing. Up to 10 locations can be specified to ring simultaneously when you receive a call.
Note
• It is necessary to set the XSI feature to enable (→ see
[Enable Xtended Service] and
[Server Address] in
interface or " XSI_ENABLE " and
" XSI_SERVER
file).
Used to log in/log out of the Call
Center Hoteling Event.
Note
• It is necessary to set the
Hoteling (Hospitality) feature to enable (→ see [Enable Call
Center] and [Hoteling Event] in
user interface or
" CALL_CENTER_ENABLE_n " and " CC_HOTELING_EVENT_n " in
in the configuration file).
Used to transfer a call to the extension assigned to the key by confirmation transfer or automatic transfer during a conversation.
Used to transfer a call to the extension assigned to the key by blind transfer during a conversation.
Used to add the extension assigned to the key to a multiple-party conversation (conference).
Used to answer an incoming call arriving at the specified telephone number.
Used to transfer a call to Call Parking.
Used to retrieve a parked call (Call
Parking).
Lamp Indication
Off : Simultaneous Ring off
Blue on : Simultaneous Ring on
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 369
6.3.1 Settings using Web User Interface Programming
Button
Group Call
Pickup
Network
Camera (For
KX-HDV430)
Presence
Description
Used to answer a group call as a representative.
Used to connect to a Network
Camera.
Lamp Indication
-
-
My Phone
Used to confirm the current status of the extension assigned to the key.
Used to configure the current status of
My Phone.
-
-
*1
This is an optional feature and may not be supported on your phone system.
6.3.1 Settings using Web User Interface Programming
To set Flexible Keys
1.
In the Web user interface, click the [Telephone] tab, and then click [Flexible Key Settings] .
2.
Enter settings as described in the following table.
When it is necessary to set both parameter 1 and parameter 2, enter a comma between the values.
Button
One Touch Dial
BLF (Busy Lamp
Field)
Line
ACD
Wrap Up
Parameter 1
Description Value
Phone Number
Phone Number
Up to 32 digits
Up to 32 digits
Line No.
Line No.
Line No.
1–n
1–n
1–n
Parameter 2
Description Value
Line No.
Line No.
1–n
1–n
-
-
-
-
-
-
Line Status
Call Forward
Phonebook
Call History
Simultaneous Ring
-
Phone Number
Classification
Classification
Line No.
-
Up to 32 digits
• 0: Local &
Remote
• 1: Local
Phonebook
• 2: Remote
Phonebook
• 0: Call History
• 1: Missed Calls
• 2: Incoming
Calls
• 3: Outgoing
Calls
1–n
Category
-
-
-
-
1–9
-
-
-
-
370 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
6.3.1 Settings using Web User Interface Programming
Button
Hoteling (Hospitality)
Transfer
Blind Transfer
Conference
Directed Call Pickup
Call Park
Call Park Retrieve
Group Call Pickup
Network Camera (For
KX-HDV430)
Presence
My Phone
Parameter 1
Description Value
-
Phone Number
Phone Number
Phone Number
Phone Number
Call parking
Park retrieve
Phone Number
Up to 32 digits
Up to 32 digits
Up to 32 digits
Up to 32 digits
Up to 16 digits
Up to 16 digits
Up to 32 digits
1–16 Network Camera
Number
User ID
-
Up to 128 digits
-
Parameter 2
Description Value
-
Line No.
-
-
-
1–n
-
-
-
-
Line No.
1–n
Line No.
-
-
-
*1
*2
More than 48 BLF keys can be programmed, but LED status indication is available only up to 48 keys.
Values may vary depending on your phone system dealer/service provider.
[Setting Example]
The following screen shows an example of setting flexible keys for KX-HDV230.
1–n
-
-
-
Description:
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 371
6.3.2 Settings using Configuration File Programming
• Button 1 is set to log in and log out of an ACD group on line 6.
• Buttons 2, 6 and 10 are set to show the status of a certain extension. They can also be used to call that
extension and transfer calls to it.
• Buttons 3, 7 and 9 are set to make calls to a certain destination using the One-Touch Dialing feature.
• Button 4 is set to log in and log out of an ACD group on line 5.
• Buttons 5 and 8 are set to make calls to a certain destination using the Line feature.
*1
You can also assign extension numbers automatically to BLF buttons using the information in the server’s resource list without having to input information here.
6.3.2 Settings using Configuration File Programming
Flexible keys can be configured by configuration file programming using a combination of 3 parameters:
• Parameter 1 refers to either " FLEX_BUTTON_FACILITY_ACTx " or " DSS_BUTTON_FACILITY_ACTx ".
• Parameter 2 refers to either " FLEX_BUTTON_FACILITY_ARGx " or " DSS_BUTTON_FACILITY_ARGx ".
• Parameter 3 refers to either " FLEX_BUTTON_LABELx " or " DSS_BUTTON_LABELx ".
Details about parameters 1 and 2 are explained in the following table.
Note
• For parameter 2, value 1 and value 2 must be separated by a comma.
Parameter 1 Parameter 2
Value
X_PANASONIC_IPTEL_
ONETOUCH
X_PANASONIC_IPTEL_
BLF
X_PANASONIC_IPTEL_
LINE
X_PANASONIC_IPTEL_
ACD
X_PANASONIC_IPTEL_
WRAPUP
X_PANASONIC_IPTEL_
LINESTATUS
X_PANASONIC_IPTEL_
FORWARD
Value 1
Phone Number
(Max. 32 characters)
Phone Number
(Max. 32 characters)
Line Number
(1–n)
Line Number
(1–n)
Line Number
(1–n)
-
Phone Number
(Max. 32 characters)
Value 2
Line Number
(1–n)
Line Number
(1–n)
-
-
-
-
-
Note
Line 1 is set when value 2 is "1", "0", or "None".
Line 1 is set when value 2 is "1", "0", or "None".
The default line is set when value 1 is
"0" or "None".
The default line is set when value 1 is
"0" or "None".
The default line is set when value 1 is
"0" or "None".
-
-
372 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
6.3.2 Settings using Configuration File Programming
Parameter 1
Value
X_PANASONIC_IPTEL_
PHONEBOOK
X_PANASONIC_IPTEL_
CALLLOG
X_PANASONIC_IPTEL_
PARARING
X_PANASONIC_IPTEL_
HOTELING
X_PANASONIC_IPTEL_
TRANSFER
X_PANASONIC_IPTEL_
BLINDTRANSFER
X_PANASONIC_IPTEL_
CONFERENCE
X_PANASONIC_IPTEL_
DIRECTPICKUP
X_PANASONIC_IPTEL_
CALLPARK
X_PANASONIC_IPTEL_
PARKRETRIEVE
X_PANASONIC_IPTEL_
GROUPPICKUP
X_PANASONIC_IPTEL_
NETWORKCAMERA
(For KX-HDV430)
Value 1
1 (Local
Phonebook)
Parameter 2
Value 2
Category
Number (1–9)
Note
The search by name screen is displayed when value 2 is "0" or
"None".
2 (Remote
Phonebook)
0 or None
(Select
Phonebook)
1 (Missed Call)
2 (Incoming Call
Log)
3 (Outgoing Call
Log)
0 or None
(Select Logs)
Line Number
(1–n)
-
-
-
-
Phone Number
(Max. 32 characters)
Phone Number
(Max. 32 characters)
Phone Number
(Max. 32 characters)
Phone Number
(Max. 32 characters)
Call parking number (Max.
16 characters)
Park retrieve number (Max.
16 characters)
Phone Number
(Max.
32characters)
Network
Camera Number
(1–16)
-
-
-
-
-
Line Number
(1–n)
Line Number
(1–n)
Line Number
(1–n)
"
"
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
If value 1 is not set, the value of
NUM_PLAN_PARKING " is used.
If value 1 is not set, the value of
NUM_PLAN_PARK_RETRIEVING used.
-
-
" is
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 373
6.4 Broadsoft XSI (Xtended Services Interface)
Parameter 1
Value
X_PANASONIC_IPTEL
_APPLICATION
X_PANASONIC_IPTEL_
PRESENCE
Value 1
-
Value 2
Parameter 2
-
Note
-
User ID
(Up to 128 digits)
-
X_PANASONIC_IPTEL_
MYPHONE
-
6.4 Broadsoft XSI (Xtended Services Interface)
6.4.1 Outline
BroadWorksXsi is an API library used to support the integration of Internet service-based BroadWorks functionality to create web applications and mashups (web application hybrids).
This product uses the Broadsoft XSI (Xtended Services Interface) to run the following services.
1.
Remote Office
2.
AnyWhere
3.
Simultaneous Ring Personal
4.
Calling Line ID Delivery Blocking (Anonymous Call)
5.
Call Forward
6.
Do Not Disturb
7.
Anonymous Call Rejection
(1) Remote Office
The Remote Office function allows you to use your home phone or cellular phone as your office phone. All incoming calls are forwarded from the IP phone to the Remote Office phone number.
(2) AnyWhere
The AnyWhere function is for remote users to easily access their IP phone's functions (such as making and receiving calls, and voicemail) from any phone.
(3) Simultaneous Ring Personal
The Simultaneous Ring Personal function enables up to 10 other phone numbers to ring at the same time an IP phone receives a call.
(4) Calling Line ID Delivery Blocking (Anonymous Call)
The Calling Line ID Delivery Blocking (Anonymous Call) function sets the caller information for calls made from an IP phone to "Anonymous Call".
(5) Call Forward
The Call Forward function forwards incoming calls to an IP phone to a specified phone number.
* When Feature Key Synchronization is set (FWD_DND_SYNCHRO_ENABLE_n="Y", see page 336), the
Call Forward function will not operate as an XSI function.
(6) Do Not Disturb
The Do Not Disturb function rejects incoming calls to the IP phone.
374 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
6.4.2 XSI Service Settings
* When Feature Key Synchronization is set (FWD_DND_SYNCHRO_ENABLE_n="Y", see page 336), the
Do Not Disturb function will not operate as an XSI function.
(7) Anonymous Call Rejection
The Anonymous Call Rejection function rejects calls made to the IP phone as Anonymous Calls.
6.4.2 XSI Service Settings
Phone settings for using XSI services can be set using configuration parameters or the Web user interface
(administrators only).
See 4.3.7 Xtended Service Settings for making settings using the Web user interface.
The following parameter names will be displayed and can be set as needed.
Parameter Name
XSI_ENABLE
Description
Enables XSI services.
Reference
XSI_SERVER
XSI_SERVER_TYPE
XSI_SERVER_PORT
XSI_USERID_n
XSI_PASSWORD_n
Specifies the XSI server.
Specifies the communication method.
Specifies the port used for communication with the XSI server.
Specifies the user name for each user
(account) that will use XSI.
Specifies the password for each user (account) that will use XSI.
XSI_PHONEBOOK_ENABLE_n
XSI_PHONEBOOK_RESYNC_DUR
ATION
Specifies whether to enable or disable the Xsi phonebook service.
XSI_PHONEBOOK_CYCLIC_INTVL Specifies the interval, in minutes, between periodic checks for updates of the Xsi Directory
(Phonebook) files.
Specifies the time range, in minutes, during which units will access the server at a random time.
XSI_PHONEBOOK_TYPE_n
XSI_CALLLOG_ENABLE_n
XSI_VISUAL_VM_ENABLE_n
XSI_SIP_CREDENTIALS_ENABLE
Specifies the type of Xsi phonebook.
Specifies whether to enable or disable the Xsi call log service.
Specifies whether to enable or disable the
Visual Voice Mail feature of the selected line.
Specifies whether to enable or disable the XSI
SIP Credentials feature.
page 241 page 241 page 241 page 241
Note
To change settings for the following XSI services using a unit, the parameter
ADMIN_ABILITY_ENABLE="Y" (see page 334) must be set. (When ADMIN_ABILITY_ENABLE="N" is
set, the settings can only be viewed.)
• Remote Office (Remote Office)
• AnyWhere (Anywhere)
• Simultaneous Ring Personal (SimultaneousRing)
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 375
6.5 BroadCloud (Presence)
• Calling Line ID Delivery Blocking (Anonymous Call)
• Anonymous Call Rejection (Block Anonymous)
Note
The text in parentheses are shown on the unit display.
Operations for accessing the above XSI services
KX-HDV130/KX-HDV230
1.
2.
[ ]/[ ]: Basic Settings →
OK
3.
[ ]/[ ]: Call Settings →
OK
4.
[ ]/[ ]: Remote Office,Anywhere,SimultaneousRing,Anonymous Call, or Block Anonymous →
OK
KX-HDV330/KX-HDV430
[In standby mode]
1.
Tap / → "Advanced Settings"
2.
Tap "Call Settings"
3.
Tap / → "Remote Office", "Anywhere", "SimultaneousRing", "Anonymous Call", or "Block
Anonymous".
For details, refer to the Operating Instructions on the Panasonic Web site (→ see Introduction ).
6.5 BroadCloud (Presence)
6.5.1 Outline
This product supports the following BroadCloud functions.
(1) BroadCloud Buddies
View the information of your Buddies.
(2) BroadCloud Favorites
View the information of your Buddies that have been marked as Favorites.
(3) BroadCloud Presence
Shares presence statuses.
6.5.2 BroadCloud (Presence) Function Settings
Phone settings for using XMPP functions can be set using configuration parameters or the Web user interface (administrators only).
See 4.3.8 UC Settings for making settings using the Web user interface.
The following parameter names will be displayed and can be set as needed.
Parameter Name
UC_ENABLE
Description
Enables BroadCloud services.
Reference
UC_USERID
UC_PASSWORD
XMPP_SERVER
Specifies user IDs for the BroadCloud server.
Specifies passwords for the BroadCloud server.
Specifies the IP address or FQDN of the XMPP server.
376 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
6.5.2 BroadCloud (Presence) Function Settings
Parameter Name
XMPP_PORT
XMPP_TLS_VERIFY
Description
Specifies the communication port for XMPP.
Specifies the TLS (Transport Layer Security) certification validation type for protocol communication.
Specifies the path (URL) of the ROOT certificate for XMPP.
XMPP_ROOT_CERT_
PATH
XMPP_CLIENT_CERT
_PATH
XMPP_PKEY_PATH
UC_DNSSRV_ENA
UC_TCP_SRV_PREFI
X
UC_USERID_CASE_
SENSITIVE
Specifies the path (URL) of the Client certificate for XMPP.
Specifies the path (URL) of the private key for XMPP.
Specifies whether to request the DNS server to translate domain names into IP addresses using the SRV record.
Specifies a prefix to add to the domain name when performing a DNS SRV lookup using TCP.
Specifies whether the authentication ID is case-sensitive when accessing the UC server.
Reference
page 245 page 245 page 245 page 245 page 245
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 377
6.5.2 BroadCloud (Presence) Function Settings
378 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
Section 7
Firmware Update
This section explains how to update the firmware of the unit.
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 379
7.1 Firmware Server Setup
7.1 Firmware Server Setup
No special server is necessary for the firmware update. You can use an HTTP, HTTPS, FTP, or TFTP server as the firmware server by simply setting its URL.
Note
• This feature is available only in IPv4 mode.
• A firmware update takes about 4 minutes.
• The unit will restart after the firmware update is complete.
• The unit cannot be used while the firmware is being updated.
• It is recommended to select a time for updating in which the unit will not be used. (For details about the timing of updating configuration files, see
2.2.4 Downloading Configuration Files
.)
7.2 Firmware Update Settings
Firmware updates are provided by the manufacturer when necessary.
The firmware update will be executed by setting the corresponding parameters using configuration file
programming (→ see 5.3.6 Firmware Update Settings ) or Web user interface programming (→ see
4.7.2 Firmware Maintenance ). The following shows the parameters and the setting procedures:
Firmware Update Enable/Disable
• In a configuration file, add the line, FIRM_UPGRADE_ENABLE="Y" .
• In the Web user interface, click the [Maintenance] tab, click [Firmware Maintenance] , and then select
[Yes] for [Enable Firmware Update] .
Firmware Version Number
• In a configuration file, specify the new version number in " FIRM_VERSION ".
Firmware Server URL
• In a configuration file, specify the URL in " FIRM_FILE_PATH ".
• In the Web user interface, click the [Maintenance] tab, click [Firmware Maintenance] , and then enter the URL in [Firmware File URL] .
Configuration Parameter Example
By setting the parameters as shown in the following example, the unit will automatically download the firmware file from the specified URL, "http://firm.example.com/firm/01.050.fw", and perform the update operation if the currently used firmware version is older than 01.050.
Example
FIRM_UPGRADE_ENABLE="Y"
FIRM_VERSION="01.050"
FIRM_FILE_PATH="http://firm.example.com/firm/01.050.fw"
7.3 Executing Firmware Update
After configuring the firmware update settings in the configuration file, the firmware will be updated when the configuration file is downloaded. The firmware update procedure is detailed below.
380 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
7.3 Executing Firmware Update
The firmware update process
Note
• Downgrading the firmware is not recommended. Operation cannot be guaranteed after performing a downgrade.
Step 1
The unit downloads a configuration file from the provisioning server.
• For details about setting the timing of when configuration files are downloaded, see
2.2.4 Downloading Configuration Files .
A
A
B
B
Provisioning Server Address
Configuration File
A.
SIP Phone
B.
Provisioning Server
Step 2
The unit compares the version number of the firmware in the configuration file to the unit’s current firmware version.
(In this example, the unit is using version 01.000
and the configuration file specifies version
01.050.)
A
A
B
Compare
A.
SIP Phone
Current Version 01.000
B.
Provisioned Configuration File
FIRM_VERSION="01.050"
Step 3
When a newer firmware version is specified in the configuration file, the unit will download the firmware from the address specified under
" FIRM_FILE_PATH " in the configuration file.
A
B
A
http://firm.example.com/firm/01.050.fw
01.050.fw
A.
SIP Phone
B.
Firmware Server
B
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 381
7.4 Upgrade Firmware (For KX-HDV130/KX-HDV230)
Step 4
Once the newer firmware is downloaded, it is applied to the unit and the unit automatically restarts.
A
Version 01.050 Updated
7.4 Upgrade Firmware (For KX-HDV130/
KX-HDV230)
When an updated version of the firmware is provided on a Web site or other means, you can perform the firmware update manually using Web user interface programming.
For details about the manual firmware update, see
4.7.3 Upgrade Firmware (For KX-HDV130/
KX-HDV130
To manually update the firmware
1.
In the Web user interface, click the [Maintenance] tab, and then click [Upgrade Firmware] .
2.
Enter a URL in [Firmware File URL] .
Example: http://firm.example.com/firm/01.050.fw
3.
Click [Upgrade Firmware] .
Note
• You can use an HTTP server as the firmware server by simply setting its URL.
• A firmware update takes about 4 minutes.
• The unit will restart after the firmware update is complete.
• The unit cannot be used while the firmware is being updated.
KX-HDV230
To manually update the firmware
1.
In the Web user interface, click the [Maintenance] tab, and then click [Upgrade Firmware] .
2.
Click Browse , select the folder where the firmware file is stored, and specify the firmware file on your
PC.
3.
Click [Upgrade Firmware] .
382 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
Section 8
Troubleshooting
This section provides information about troubleshooting.
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 383
8.1 Troubleshooting
8.1 Troubleshooting
If you still have difficulties after following the instructions in this section, disconnect the unit from the AC outlet, then connect the AC adaptor again. If using PoE, disconnect the LAN cable, then connect the LAN cable again.
General Use
Problem
The display is blank.
I cannot hear a dial tone.
Cause/Solution
• The unit may not be receiving power.
The unit is not designed to function when there is a power failure. Make sure that the device supplying PoE is receiving power and that the Ethernet cable is properly connected. (If you are using a PoE hub, the number of devices that you can connect simultaneously is limited by the amount of power supplied by the hub.)
If an AC adaptor is connected, confirm that the AC adaptor is connected and receiving power.
• Network settings may not be correct.
• Many installation issues can be resolved by resetting all the equipment. First, shut down your modem, router, hub, unit, and PC. Then turn the devices back on, one at a time, in this order: modem, router, hub, unit, PC.
• If you cannot access Internet Web pages using your PC, check to see if your phone system is having connection issues in your area.
• Check the VoIP status in the Web user interface and
this section).
• Check that the SIP server address, URLs of the configuration files, encryption key, and other required settings are correct.
• Check the firewall and port forwarding settings on the router.
• For details about the settings, consult your network administrator or phone system dealer.
384 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
8.1 Troubleshooting
Making/Answering Calls, Intercom
Problem
The unit does not ring.
I cannot make a call.
Cause/Solution
• Check the VoIP status in the Web user interface and
in this section).
• Check that the SIP server address, URLs of the configuration files, encryption key, and other required settings are correct.
• Check the firewall and port forwarding settings on the router.
• Check [Call Control] for each line in the [Telephone] tab in the Web user interface.
– If [Enable Do Not Disturb] is set to [Yes] , the unit does
not receive calls (→ see 4.6.2.1 Call Features
).
– If [Enable Call Forwarding No Answer] is set to [Yes] ,
the unit does not receive calls (→ see 4.6.2.1 Call
– If [Enable Block Anonymous Call] is set to [Yes] , the unit does not receive anonymous calls (→ see
).
• Check that [Enable Do Not Disturb] , [Enable Call
Forwarding No Answer] , and [Enable Block
Anonymous Call] are not controlled by your phone system.
• For details about settings, consult your network administrator or phone system dealer.
• Check the VoIP status in the Web user interface and
in this section).
• Check that the SIP server address, URLs of the configuration files, encryption key, and other required settings are correct.
• Check the firewall and port forwarding settings on the router.
• For details about settings, consult your network administrator or phone system dealer.
Password for Web User Interface Programming
Problem
I have lost the login password of the Web user interface for the Administrator or
User account.
Cause/Solution
• Consult your network administrator or phone system dealer.
For security reasons, it is recommended that the
passwords are set again immediately (→ see 4.4.3 Admin
or
).
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 385
8.1 Troubleshooting
Time
Problem
The time is not correct.
Error Codes
During operation, error messages might appear on the unit. The following table lists these messages and possible causes and solutions.
Error code
Error:001
Error:002
Probable Cause
LAN disconnection detected
Solution
Check the LAN cables connections.
Overlapping IP addresses Check the IP addresses and re-set them.
For making settings using a unit, see 1.1.3 Basic Network
Error:003 The REGISTER of the
SIP server has not been registered.
Consult your network administrator or phone system dealer.
Error Message
Error Message
Need Repair
Probable Cause
Hardware failure
Cause/Solution
• In the Web user interface, you can set NTP synchronization and DST (Summer Time) control to adjust
the time automatically (→ see 4.4.4 Time Adjust
• If the time is still incorrect even after setting NTP synchronization, check the firewall and port forwarding settings on the router.
Solution
Consult your network administrator or phone system dealer.
Checking the Status of the Unit
You can check the status of the unit by using Web user interface programming (→ see
) or by looking at system logs (see 5.3.38 Logging Settings
) sent from the unit.
To check the setting status in the Web user interface
1.
Click the [Status] tab, and then click [Network Status] to check the network settings.
2.
Check the status displayed.
3.
Click [VoIP Status] to check the VoIP settings.
4.
Check the status displayed.
To check the setting status using the Unit
KX-HDV130/KX-HDV230
1.
2.
[ ]/[ ]: System Settings →
OK
3.
[ ]/[ ]: Status →
OK
386 Administrator Guide Document Version: 2017-07
KX-HDV330/KX-HDV430
To check the setting status using the Unit
[In standby mode]
1.
Tap / → System Settings .
2.
Tap Status .
Export Logging File
Export the log file using the Web user interface (see
).
Note
Document Version: 2017-07 Administrator Guide 387
Panasonic Corporation
1006, Oaza Kadoma, Kadoma-shi, Osaka 571-8501, Japan
© Panasonic Corporation 2017
PNQX8471YA PM0417SM1067
Download
Public link updated
The public link to your chat has been updated. You may view and manage your chat links after registration here.
Document public link
Advertisement
Key features
High-quality voice communications with wideband audio
Multiple line support for managing multiple calls simultaneously
Intuitive user interface for easy navigation and call management
Advanced features like call forwarding, conferencing, and voicemail
Sleek design that complements any office environment
Support for Power over Ethernet (PoE) for easy installation and power management
Backlit display for clear visibility in all lighting conditions
Headset compatibility for hands-free communication
Frequently asked questions
You can change the language for the phone user interface through the Phone User Interface Programming menu.
To access the Web User Interface, enter the IP address of the unit into a web browser.
The default password for the Web User Interface is 'admin'.
You can update the firmware on the unit through the Web User Interface.
Pre-provisioning allows the unit to obtain a provisioning server address, while provisioning allows the unit to download a configuration file from the provisioning server.